ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

NON-AUTONOMOUS AFFILIATED COLLEGES

REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

B. E. ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

The program aims to develop a proficient engineer in Robotics and Automation field to
I.
serve the various technological needs of Industry and Society.
To develop the engineers to practice the multidisciplinary engineering knowledge in
II. particularly in mechanical, electrical, electronic, control, manufacturing and software for
Robotics and Automation systems development.
The program shall create engineers continuously to uplift the knowledge, skill, attitude, self-
III.
learning, teamwork, value of ethics and able to protect environmental eco-systems.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

PO Graduate Attribute

1 Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2 Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3 Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4 Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge
and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of
data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5 Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources,
and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6 The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge
to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7 Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
 8 Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9 Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member
or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10 Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
11 Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12 Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

(1) Multi-disciplinary Engineering in Robotics: Analyse the real world needs and design
the robot and Automation solutions using the competency in multi domain engineering
elements and integrated software tools.
(2) Enhancement and upgradation: Analyse conventional functions and process of
various engineering elements and propose robots and automation solution for
enhanced performance of conventional systems.
(3) Robotic system integration and automated Solution and connectivity: Recommend
the sensing, interfacing, controlling, actuating, communicating technologies and
analysing the data through various subsystems and build the robots.

PEO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING:

PEO PO PSO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

I. 3 2 3 2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2

II. 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3

III. 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 3
 PROGRAM ARTICULATION MATRIX

PO PSO
Semester
Year

Course name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

Professional English - I 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -

Matrices and Calculus 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Engineering Physics 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
Engineering Chemistry 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
Problem Solving and Python Programming 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
I தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils
Problem Solving and Python Programming
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
Laboratory
3 2.4 2.6 1 1
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1.8 1 1.4 - - - - 1.3 - - -
English Laboratory$ 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Professional English - II 3 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
I Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 3 1 1 0 1 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Applied Materials Science 3 2 1.6 1.4 1.5 1.75 1 - - - - 1.5
Basic Electrical, Electronics Engineering and - - - - - - - -
2 1 1 1 - - -
Measurements
Engineering Graphics 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
II தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட் பமும் / Tamils and - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Technology
NCC Credit Course Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Engineering Practices Laboratory 3 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1
Basic Electrical, Electronics Engineering and - - - - - - - - -
1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
Measurements Laboratory
Communication Laboratory / Foreign 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
Language $
Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Engineering Mechanics 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - - 2 3 1 2
Fluid Mechanics and Thermal Systems 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 1.4 2.3 - - - - 1 1 2.4 2.4 1
Digital Electronics and Microprocessor 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 3 2 3
III
Electrical Drives and Actuators 3 1 1.4 2 1.4 - - - - - - 1 1 3
Robot Kinematics 3 2 1 1.4 - - - - - - - 1 3
Electrical Drives and Actuators Laboratory 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
Robot modelling and simulation lab 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
Professional Development - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
II
Manufacturing Technology - - - - - - -
Design of Robot Elements 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
Sensors and Instrumentation 3 2 1 2.2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 3
Control Systems Engineering 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 3
IV
Fluid Power Systems and Industrial 3 2 1 1 2 - - - - - 1 3 2 3
Automation
Environmental Science and Sustainability 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - -
- 1.8 - -- -
NCC Credit Course Level 2 - - - - - - - - - - --- - -
Manufacturing Technology Laboratory 3 - - - - - 1 - 2 - - 1 1 2 2
Sensors and Instrumentation Laboratory 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 3
Embedded Systems and Programming 3 2 1 1 2 2 - - - - - 1 3 1 3
Robot Path Planning and Programming 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 3
Professional Elective I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Elective II - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
III V Professional Elective III - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Elective IV - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mandatory Course-I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Industrial Automation Laboratory 3 2 1 1 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 2 3
 Robot Dynamics and Control 3 2 1 3 2 - - - - - 1 3 2 3
Open Elective – I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Elective V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Elective VI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Elective VII - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VI Professional Elective VIII - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mandatory Course-II - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
NCC Credit Course Level 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Robot Kinematics and Dynamics Laboratory 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
Mini Project - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Robotic Vision and Intelligence 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Mobile Robotics 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Human Values and Ethics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Elective – Industrial Management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
IV VII Open Elective – II - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Open Elective – III - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Open Elective – IV - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Robotic Vision and Intelligence Laboratory 3 2 1 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 3 2 3
VIII Project Work - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY
B. E. ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR SEMESTERS I TO VIII
SEMESTER I
PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3152 Professional English - I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MA3151 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
GE3151 Problem Solving and Python
6. ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
7. GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
PRACTICAL
7 GE3171 Problem Solving and Python
ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8 BS3171 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BSC 0 0 4 4 2
$
9 GE3172 English Laboratory EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 16 1 10 27 22
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS3252 Professional English - II HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. MA3251 Statistics and Numerical Methods BSC 3 1 0 4 4
3. PH3259 Applied Materials Science BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Basic Electrical, Electronics
4. BE3253 Engineering and Measurements ESC 3 0 0 3 3
5. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
GE3252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
6. Tamils and Technology
7. NCC Credit Course Level - 2 0 0 2 2#
PRACTICAL
8. GE3271 Engineering Practices Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
9. BE3273 Basic Electrical, Electronics
Engineering and Measurements ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
10. GE3272 Communication Laboratory /
Foreign Language $ EEC 0 0 4 4 2
TOTAL 14 1 16 31 23
# NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
$ Skill Based Course
 SEMESTER III

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA3351 Transforms and Partial
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Differential Equations
2. ME3351 Engineering Mechanics ESC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MR3351 Fluid Mechanics and Thermal
ESC 4 0 0 4 4
Systems
4. MR3391 Digital Electronics and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Microprocessor
5. MR3392 Electrical Drives and Actuators PCC 3 0 0 3 3
6. RA3301 Robot Kinematics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. MR3361 Electrical Drives and Actuators PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
8. RA3311 Robot Modelling and PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Simulation Laboratory
9. GE3361 Professional Development $ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 19 1 10 30 25
$ Skill Based Course

SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. ME3493 Manufacturing Technology PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. RA3401 Design of Robot Elements PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MR3491 Sensors and Instrumentation PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. MR3452 Control Systems Engineering PCC 3 0 2 5 4
5. Fluid Power Systems and
MR3591 PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Industrial Automation
6. GE3451 Environmental Sciences and
BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
8. ME3382 Manufacturing Technology
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
9. MR3461 Sensors and Instrumentation
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 17 0 10 27 22
# NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
 SEMESTER V

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. MR3492 Embedded Systems and PCC
2 0 2 4 3
Programming
2. RA3501 Robot Path Planning and PCC
3 0 0 3 3
Programming
3. Professional Elective I PEC - - - - 3
4. Professional Elective II PEC - - - - 3
5. Professional Elective III PEC - - - - 3
6. Professional Elective IV PEC - - - - 3
7. Mandatory Course-I& MC 3 0 0 3 0
PRACTICALS
8. MR3561 Industrial Automation PCC
0 0 4 2 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 8 0 6 12 20
& Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC- I)

SEMESTER VI
PERIODS
PER TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
PERIODS
L T P
THEORY
1. RA3601 Robot Dynamics and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
2. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Professional Elective V PEC - - - - 3
4. Professional Elective VI PEC - - - - 3
5. Professional Elective VII PEC - - - - 3
6. Professional Elective VIII PEC - - - - 3
7. Mandatory Course-II& MC 3 0 0 3 0
8. NCC Credit Course Level 3# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
9. RA3611 Robot Kinematics and PCC 2
0 0 4 4
Dynamics Laboratory
9. RA3612 Mini Project EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 12 0 6 18 21
*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies.
& Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under
MC- II)
# NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be
recorded in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA
 SEMESTER VII / VIII*

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. RA3701 Robotic Vision and
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Intelligence
2. RA3702 Mobile Robotics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Human Values and
HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
Ethics
4. Elective – Management # HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – III*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – IV*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
8. RA3711 Robotic Vision and PCC
0 0 4 4
Intelligence Laboratory 2
TOTAL 20 0 4 24 22

*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII
**Open Elective – II shall be chosen from the emerging technologies
***Open Elective III and IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other Programmes)
Elective – management shall be chosen from the Elective – Management Courses
#

SEMESTER VIII/VII*

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. RA3811 Project Work/ Internship EEC 0 0 20 20 10
TOTAL 0 0 20 20 10

*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII

TOTAL CREDITS: 165

 ELECTIVE – MANAGEMENT COURSES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PERWEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. GE3751 Principles of Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. GE3752 Total Quality Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. GE3753 Engineering Economics and HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Financial Accounting
4. GE3754 Human Resource HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. GE3755 Knowledge Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3792 Industrial Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3

MANDATORY COURSES I
PERIODS TOTAL
S. CATE
COURSE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
CODE L T P PERIODS
1. MX3081 Introduction to Women and MC 3 0 0 3 0
Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3 0
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3 0
4. MX3084 Disaster Risk Reduction MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Management

MANDATORY COURSES II
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3085 Well Being with Traditional
Practices -Yoga, Ayurveda MC 3 0 0 3 0
and Siddha
2. MX3086 History of Science and
MC 3 0 0 3 0
Technology in India
3. MX3087 Political and Economic
Thought for a Humane MC 3 0 0 3 0
Society
4. MX3088 State, Nation Building and
MC 3 0 0 3 0
Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3 0
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES: VERTICALS
VERTICAL 1 VERTICAL 2 VERTICAL 3 VERTICAL 4 VERTICAL 5 VERTICAL 6 VERTICAL 7
APPLIED DESIGN AND SMART MOBILITY INTELLIGENCE INTELLIGENCE AVIONICS AND DIVERSIFIED
ROBOTICS MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS SYSTEMS SYSTEMS DRONE COURSES
TECHNOLOGY GROUP 1
Robots and Systems Automobile Object Oriented Avionics Linear Integrated
Robot and Machine Applied Signal
in Smart Engineering Programming in C++ Circuits
Elements Design Processing
Manufacturing
Electric and Hybrid Applied Image Power Electronics Control Engineering Single Board
Drone Technologies Design for X
Vehicles Processing Computers
Automotive Computer Guidance and Control Reliability and
CNC Machine Tools Machine Learning for
Mircrorobotics Mechatronics Architecture and Maintenance
and Programming Intelligent Systems
Organisation Engineering
Automotive System Condition Monitoring Virtual Navigation and Integrated Product
Agricultural Robotics Computer Integrated
Modelling and and Fault Instrumentation Communication Development
and Automation Manufacturing
Simulation Diagnostics System
Advanced Vehicle Dynamics Systems Modelling Industrial Network Design of UAV
Collaborative Medical
Manufacturing and Controls and Simulation Protocols systems
Robotics Mechatronics
Systems Methods
Aircraft Aerodynamics of Micro Electro
Robot Operating Additive Optimization Motion Control
Mechatronics Drones Mechanical
Systems Manufacturing Techniques System
Systems
Electronics Smart mobility and Immersive Total integrated - Process Planning
Medical Robotics Manufacturing Intelligent Vehicles Technologies and Automation and Cost Estimation
Technology Haptics
Advanced Driver Digital Twin and - VLSI and FPGA
Assistance Systems Industry 5.0
Computer Aided Computer Vision and
Humanoid Robotics
Inspection and Testing Deep Learning

Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:

Professional Elective Courses will be registered in Semesters V and VI. These courses are listed in groups called verticals that represent a particular area of specialisation / diversified group. Students
are permitted to choose all the Professional Electives from a particular vertical or from different verticals. Further, only one Professional Elective course shall be chosen in a semester horizontally
(row-wise). However, two courses are permitted from the same row, provided one course is enrolled in Semester V and another in semester VI.
The registration of courses for B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree shall be done from Semester V to VIII. The procedure for registration of courses explained above shall be followed for the
courses of B.E/B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree also. For more details on B.E./B.Tech (Honours) or Minor degree refer to the Regulations 2021, Clause 4.10 (Amendments).
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS

VERTICAL 1: APPLIED ROBOTICS

SL. COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

CATE-
NO. CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CRA331 Robots and Systems in Smart 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
Manufacturing
2. CRA332 Drone Technologies PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CRA333 Microrobotics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CRA334 Agricultural Robotics and Automation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CRA335 Collaborative Robotics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CRA336 Robot Operating Systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CRA337 Medical Robotics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. CRA338 Humanoid Robotics PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 2: DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING

PERIODS TOTAL
SL. COURSE CATE-
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CRA339 Robot and Machine Elements Design PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CME341 Design for X PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMR331 CNC Machine Tools and Programming PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. ME3792 Computer Integrated Manufacturing PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CMR332 Advanced Manufacturing Systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CME339 Additive Manufacturing PEC 2 0 2 4 3
7. CMR350 Electronics Manufacturing
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
8. CMR333 Computer Aided Inspection and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Testing

VERTICAL 3: SMART MOBILITY SYSTEMS

SL. COURSE CATE PERIODS TOTAL

NO. CODE COURSE TITLE GORY PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
L T P PERIODS
1. CME380 Automobile Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMR334 Automotive Mechatronics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CMR335 Automotive System Modelling and 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
Simulation
5. CMR336 Vehicle Dynamics and Controls PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CMR337 Aircraft Mechatronics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CMR338 Smart Mobility and Intelligent 3 0 0 3 3
PEC
Vehicles
8. Advanced Driver Assistance 3 0 0 3 3
CMR339 PEC
Systems
 VERTICAL 4: INTELLIGENCE SYSTEMS

SL. COURSE CATE PERIODS TOTAL

NO. CODE COURSE TITLE GORY PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
L T P PERIODS
1. CRA340 Applied Signal Processing PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CRA341 Applied Image Processing PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CRA342 Machine Learning for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Intelligent Systems
4. CMR340 Condition Monitoring and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fault Diagnostics
5. CMR341 Systems Modelling and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Simulation Methods
6. CMR342 Optimization Techniques PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CMR343 Immersive Technologies
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Haptics
8. CMR344 Computer Vision and Deep
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Learning

VERTICAL 5: AUTOMATION
SL. COURSE CATE PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE COURSE TITLE GORY PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
L T P PERIODS
1. CMR345 Object Oriented PEC
3 0 0 3 3
Programming in C++
2. EE3591 Power Electronics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMR358 Computer Architecture and PEC
3 0 0 3 3
Organisation
4. CMR359 Virtual Instrumentation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CMR346 Industrial Network PEC
3 0 0 3 3
Protocols
6. CMR347 Motion Control System PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. CMR348 Total integrated Automation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. CMR349 Digital Twin and Industry PEC
3 0 0 3 3
5.0
VERTICAL 6: AVIONICS AND DRONE TECHNOLOGY
SL. COURSE CATE PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE COURSE TITLE GORY PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
L T P PERIODS
1. CAE347 Avionics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CAE348 Control Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CAE349 Guidance and Control PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CAE350 Navigation and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Communication System
5. CAE351 Design of UAV systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CAE352 Aerodynamics of Drones PEC 3 0 0 3 3
 VERTICAL 7: DIVERSIFIED COURSES GROUP 1
SL. COURSE CATE PERIODS TOTAL
NO. CODE COURSE TITLE GORY PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
L T P PERIODS
1. CMR351 Linear Integrated Circuits PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CMR352 Single Board Computers PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMR353 Reliability and Maintenance 3 3
PEC 3 0 0
Engineering
4. CMR354 Integrated Product
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
5. CMR355 Medical Mechatronics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CMR356 Micro Electro Mechanical 3 3
PEC 3 0 0
Systems
7. CME396 Process Planning and Cost 3 3
PEC 3 0 0
Estimation
8. CMR357 VLSI and FPGA PEC 3 0 0 3 3

OPEN ELECTIVES
(Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not
similar to any other course contents/title under other course categories).

OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

(EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES)
To be offered other than Faculty of Information and Communication Engineering

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OCS351 Artificial Intelligence and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machine Learning
Fundamentals
2. OCS352 IoT Concepts and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Applications
3. OCS353 Data Science Fundamentals OEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS333 Augmented Reality /Virtual OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality
 OPEN ELECTIVES – III

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS351 English for Competitive OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Examinations
2. OMG352 NGOs and Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
3. OMG353 Democracy and Good OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
4. OCE353 Lean Concepts, Tools And OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Practices
5. CME365 Renewable Energy OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
6. OME354 Applied Design Thinking OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. OPR351 Sustainable Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. OSF351 Fire Safety Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
14. OML351 Introduction to non- OEC 3 0 0 3 3
destructive testing
15. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OAE352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Aeronautical engineering
17. OGI351 Remote Sensing Concepts OEC 3 0 0 3 3
18. OAI351 Urban Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OEN351 Drinking Water Supply and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Treatment
20. OEE352 Electric Vehicle technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
21. OEI353 Introduction to PLC OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
22. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
23. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OFD352 Traditional Indian Foods OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. OFD353 Introduction to food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
processing
26. OPY352 IPR for Pharma Industry OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OTT351 Basics of Textile Finishing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
28. OTT352 Industrial Engineering for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Garment Industry
29. OTT353 Basics of Textile Manufacture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
30. OPE351 Introduction to Petroleum OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Refining and Petrochemicals
31. OPE334 Energy Conservation and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
32. OPT351 Basics of Plastics Processing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
33. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
34. OEC352 Fundamentals of Electronic OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Devices and Circuits
35. CBM348 Foundation Skills in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
integrated product
Development
36. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
37. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OMA353 Algebra and Number Theory OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. OBT352 Basics of Microbial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
41. OBT353 Basics of Biomolecules OEC 3 0 0 3 3
42. OBT354 Fundamentals of Cell and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Molecular Biology

OPEN ELECTIVES – IV
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. OMA355 Advanced Numerical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Methods
3. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. OMA357 Queuing and Reliability OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Modelling
5. OMG354 Production and Operations OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Entrepreneurs
6. OCE354 Basics of Integrated Water OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Resources Management
7. OMG355 Multivariate Data Analysis OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. CME343 New Product Development OEC 3 0 0 3 3
10. OME355 Industrial Design & Rapid OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Prototyping Techniques
11. MF3010 Micro and Precision OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
12. OMF354 Cost Management of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
13. AU3002` Batteries and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management system
14. OAU352 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
17. OIM353 Production Planning and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
18. OIE353 Operations Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
19. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OSF353 Chemical Process Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
21. OML352 Electrical, Electronic and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Magnetic materials
22. OML353 Nanomaterials and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
applications
23. OMR352 Hydraulics and Pneumatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
24. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. MV3501 Marine Propulsion OEC 3 0 0 3 3
26. OMV351 Marine Merchant Vessels OEC 3 0 0 3 3
27. OMV352 Elements of Marine OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
28. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
29. OGI352 Geographical Information OEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
30. OAI352 Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
Development
31. OEN352 Biodiversity Conservation OEC 3 0 0 3 3
32. OEE353 Introduction to control OEC 3 0 0 3 3
systems
33. OEI354 Introduction to Industrial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Automation Systems
34. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. OFD354 Fundamentals of Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
37. OFD355 Food safety and Quality OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Regulations
38. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
39. OTT354 Basics of Dyeing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Printing
40. FT3201 Fibre Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OTT355 Garment Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
42. OPE353 Industrial Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
43. OPE354 Unit Operations in Petro OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chemical Industries
44. OPT352 Plastic Materials for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
45. OPT353 Properties and Testing of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Plastics
46. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
47. CBM370 Wearable devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
48. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
49. OBT355 Biotechnology for Waste OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
50. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
51. OBT357 Biotechnology in Health OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Care
 SUMMARY

B.E. ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

Total
Subject Area Credits per Semester
S. No Credits
I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII
1 HSMC 4 3 5 12
2 BSC 12 7 4 2 25
3 ESC 5 11 7 - 23
4 PCC 13 20 8 5 8 54
5 PEC 12 12 24
6 OEC 3 9 12
7 EEC 1 2 1 1 10 15

Non-Credit
8 √ √
/(Mandatory)

Total 22 23 25 22 20 21 22 10 165
 ENROLLMENT FOR B.E. / B. TECH. (HONOURS) / MINOR DEGREE (OPTIONAL)
A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for the
award of B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) or Minor Degree.
For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.
For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester V
onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other programmes,
Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the following
verticals also.

Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.

VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE

(In addition to all the verticals of other programmes)

Vertical I Vertical II Vertical III Vertical IV Vertical V

Business
Fintech and Public Environment and
Block Chain
Entrepreneurship
Administration
Data Sustainability
Analytics
Financial Foundations of Principles of Public Statistics for Sustainable
Management Entrepreneruship Administration Management infrastructure
Development
Fundamentals Team Building and Constitution of Datamining Sustainable
of Investment Leadership India for Business Agriculture and
Management for Intelligence Environmental
Business Management
Banking, Creativity and Public Personnel Human Sustainable Bio
Financial Innovation in Administration Resource Materials
Services and Entrepreneurship Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Principles of Marketing Administrative Marketing and Materials for Energy
Blockchain and Management for Theories Social Media Sustainability
its Applications Business Web Analytics

Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation and Green Technology

Personal Management for Administrative Supply Chain
Finance and Entrepreneurs System Analytics
Payments
Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental Quality
Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Monitoring and
Analysis
- - - - Integrated Energy
Planning for
Sustainable
Development
- - - - Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable
Development
 (Choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other
programmes or from anyone of the following verticals)

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG331 Financial
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG332 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. CMG333 Banking, Financial
Services and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Insurance
4. CMG334 Introduction to
Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. CMG335 Fintech Personal
Finance and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Fintech

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENERUSHIP

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG337 Foundations of PEC 3
Entrepreneruship 3 0 0 3

2. CMG338 Team Building and

Leadership Management PEC 3 0 0 3 3
for Business
3. CMG339 Creativity and Innovation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
in Entrepreneurship
4. CMG340 Principles of Marketing
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business
5. CMG341 Human Resource
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. CMG342 Financing New PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures
 VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG343 Principles of Public PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMG345 Public Personnel
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative Theories PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CMG347 Indian Administrative
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. CMG348 Public Policy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CMG349 Statistics for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG350 Datamining for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Intelligence
3. CMG351 Human Resource PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. CMG352 Marketing and Social PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. CMG353 Operation and Supply PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chain Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK CONTACT
CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CES331 Sustainable infrastructure
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. CES332 Sustainable Agriculture
and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CES334 Materials for Energy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CES336 Environmental Quality
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. CES337 Integrated Energy
Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. CES338 Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME

This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the institution.
Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.

The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:

“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The
graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she
must also have broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an
engineer, a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying values
are needed.”

“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable, allow
them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them work for
excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students, give a
broader view of life, and build character. “

Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self, people
around them, society at large, and nature.

The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.

(i) Physical Activity

This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.

(ii) Creative Arts

Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday
for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a sense
of aesthetics and also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering design later.

(iii) Universal Human Values

This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself and
allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, take decisions with courage,
be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and department, be
sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base. Methodology of
teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and dont's, but get students
to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught through group discussions and
real life activities rather than lecturing.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty
mentor each. It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for the
student for the full duration of the UG programme.
(iv) Literary Activity
Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.
(v) Proficiency Modules
This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer
familiarity etc.

(vi) Lectures by Eminent People

Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the students
exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.

(vii) Visits to Local Area

A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.

(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.

(ix) Department Specific Activities

About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of
Engineering/Technology/Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building
things (become a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop.
For example, CSE and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational thinking,
and get them to build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple circuits as
an extension of their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build stuff using
their knowledge of science.

Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be no
tests / assessments during this programme.

References:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE

HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH - I L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :

 To improve the communicative competence of learners

 To learn to use basic grammatic structures in suitable contexts
 To acquire lexical competence and use them appropriately in a sentence and understand their
meaning in a text
 To help learners use language effectively in professional contexts
 To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

What is effective communication? (Explain using activities) Why is communication critical for
excellence during study, research and work? What are the seven C’s of effective communication?
What are key language skills? What is effective listening? What does it involve? What is effective
speaking? What does it mean to be an excellent reader? What should you be able to do? What is
effective writing? How does one develop language and communication skills? What does the course
focus on? How are communication and language skills going to be enhanced during this course?
What do you as a learner need to do to enhance your English language and communication skills to
get the best out of this course?

INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8

Reading - Reading brochures (technical context), telephone messages / social media messages
relevant to technical contexts and emails. Writing - Writing emails / letters introducing oneself.
Grammar - Present Tense (simple and progressive); Question types: Why/ Yes or No/ and Tags.
Vocabulary - Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (as used in technical
contexts).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

Reading - Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, and travel
& technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing-- Paragraph writing Short Report on an event (field trip
etc.) Grammar –Past tense (simple); Subject-Verb Agreement; and Prepositions. Vocabulary - Word
forms (prefixes& suffixes); Synonyms and Antonyms. Phrasal verbs.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

Reading – Reading advertisements, gadget reviews; user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions;
instructions; and Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of
comparison; Present & Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; and
Homophones, discourse markers (connectives & sequence words).

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports –and Non Verbal Communication (tables, pie charts
etc,). Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Writing
recommendations; Transferring information from non verbal ( chart , graph etc, to verbal mode)
Grammar – Articles; Pronouns - Possessive & Relative pronouns. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed
/ Semi fixed expressions.

UNIT V EXPRESSION 9
Reading – Reading editorials; and Opinion Blogs; Writing – Essay Writing (Descriptive or narrative).
Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation (Statements & Questions); and Simple,
Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect Expressions – Content vs Function
words.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To use appropriate words in a professional context
 To gain understanding of basic grammatical structures and use them in right context.
 To read and interpret information presented in tables, charts and other graphic forms
 To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department of English,
Anna University, (2020 edition)
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press, 2021.
Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta
Sharma, Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill
Education, ISBN : 0070264244.
4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
5. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal, Allied Publishing House, New Delhi,2003.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 3 - 3 - - -
AVg. 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C

3 1 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.
UNIT - I MATRICES 9+3
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigenvalues
and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by orthogonal
transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation –
Nature of quadratic forms – Applications: Stretching of an elastic membrane.

UNIT - II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules (sum,
product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation - Applications :
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT - III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of
two variables – Applications : Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and Lagrange’s
method of undetermined multipliers.

UNIT - IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration: Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial
fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications: Hydrostatic force and
pressure, moments and centres of mass.
UNIT - V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals – Applications: Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
 Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
 Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
 Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
 Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
 Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44th Edition,
2018.
3. James Stewart, "Calculus : Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition, New Delhi,
2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems only), 2.8, 3.1 to
3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change theorem), 5.5,
7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].

REFERENCES:
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, " Calculus ", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain. R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, "Engineering Mathematics” Oxford University Press, 2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, "Thomas Calculus ", 14th Edition, Pearson India, 2018.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To make the students effectively to achieve an understanding of mechanics.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Equipping the students to be successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
 To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.
UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multi-particle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM –
kinetic energy of system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational
kinetic energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies
– M.I of a diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of
angular momentum – rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional
pendulum – double pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions
on the wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and
waves in matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM
waves: Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone
reception. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating
systems - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave -
sound waves - Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection -
interference –Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment.
Theory of laser -
characteristics - Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population
inversion - Nd-YAG laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.

UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger
equation (Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function -
Normalization –Free particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes-
Normalization, probabilities and the correspondence principle.

UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)-
Tunneling microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
 Understand the importance of mechanics.
 Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
 Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Understand the importance of quantum physics.
 Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy
bands.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017. 

2. E.M.Purcell and D.J.Morin, Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge Univ.Press, 2013.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-
Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian Edition),
2009.

2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
 3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag, 2012.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

CY3151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To introduce the basic concepts and applications of phase rule and composites.
 To facilitate the understanding of different types of fuels, their preparation, properties and
combustion characteristics.
 To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and applications
of energy conversion and storage devices.

UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Water: Sources and impurities, Water quality parameters: Definition and significance of-color, odour,
turbidity, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD, flouride and arsenic. Municipal water
treatment: primary treatment and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination). Desalination
of brackish water: Reverse Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge, Boiler corrosion, Caustic
embrittlement, Priming &foaming. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal treatment (phosphate,
colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) and External treatment – Ion exchange
demineralization and zeolite process.

UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; Size-dependent
properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition,
properties and uses of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation
of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition, electrochemical
deposition and electro spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine, agriculture, energy,
electronics and catalysis.

UNIT III PHASE RULE AND COMPOSITES 9

Phase rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples. One component system - water system;
Reduced phase rule; Construction of a simple eutectic phase diagram - Thermal analysis; Two
component system: lead-silver system - Pattinson process.
Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Constitution: Matrix materials (Polymer
matrix, metal matrix and ceramic matrix) and Reinforcement (fiber, particulates, flakes and whiskers).
Properties and applications of: Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix composites and
Polymer matrix composites. Hybrid composites - definition and examples.

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction: Classification of fuels; Coal and coke: Analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate),
Carbonization, Manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Petroleum and Diesel:
Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel oil - cetane
number; Power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction: Calorific value - higher and lower calorific values, Theoretical
calculation of calorific value; Ignition temperature: spontaneous ignition temperature, Explosive
range; Flue gas analysis - ORSAT Method. CO2 emission and carbon foot print.

UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy; Nuclear energy: light water nuclear
power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and applications of solar
cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy; Geothermal energy; Batteries:
Types of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery - lead acid battery and lithium-ion-
battery; Electric vehicles – working principles; Fuel cells: H2-O2 fuel cell, microbial fuel cell;
Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will be able:
 To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable treatment
methodologies to treat water.
 To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing the
synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology applications.
 To apply the knowledge of phase rule and composites for material selection requirements.
 To recommend suitable fuels for engineering processes and applications.
 To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications in
energy sectors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi,
2008.
3. S.S. Dara, “A Text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12th Edition, 2018.

REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of nanoscience
and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and Materials Science, 2018.
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2017.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 - - 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 1 1 - - 1 2 - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
 To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building blocks
of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo code, flow chart,
programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for developing algorithms
(iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card in a list of sorted cards,
guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode, debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean,
string, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting, histogram, Students marks
statement, Retail bill preparation.

UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and looping for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2 nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press
2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

GE3152 தமிழர் மரபு LTPC

1 001

அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3

இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி – தமிழ்
தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன்மம – ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக் கருத்துக்கள் – தமிழ் க்
கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி
இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் – தமிழில்
நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற் றும்
பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.
அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர – சிற் பக்
கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர்
தெய் யும் கமல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப்புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல – இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற,
வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.

அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
மதொல் பொமவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விமளயொட்டுகள் .

அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப் பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய
அறக்மகொட்பொடு – ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் – ெங் ககொல
நகரங் களும் துமற முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும் இறக்குமதி –
கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.

அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில்
தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் ,
சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப்
புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC
1 001
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam Literature
- Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism in Tamil
Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development of Modern
literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.

UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.

UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam Literature
- Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities and Ports of
Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of Cholas.

UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the other
parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of
Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world
problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted
to the sample experiments listed here.

1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and developing
flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight of a
motorbike, Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit, etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of
list & tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language,
components of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets &
Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas,
numpy. Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to
another, word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems.
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly
Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition, 2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers and
Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With Applications
to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT Press, 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to Programming”,
2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
7. 1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY: (Any Seven Experiments)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.
 To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise manner.
 To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of experimental
data.
 To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such
error.
 To make the student as an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.

1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of

regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
 Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
 Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
 Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing physical
reality.
 Access, process and analyze scientific information.
 Solve problems individually and collaboratively.
CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
 1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
 Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters, such
as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
 To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles

1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample

using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in water sample.
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness and
DO.
 To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
 To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
 To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
 To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques
TEXT BOOK:
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook of
Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3172 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials like
lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 6

Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening
and filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; -
politeness strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and
offers- understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and interviews
with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about current and
temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and feelings-
engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 6

Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements
about products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving
instruction to use the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing
shapes and sizes and weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6

Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking – Small
Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about
positions and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about
transportation-
UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To listen to and comprehend general as well as complex academic texts information
 To listen to and understand different points of view in a discussion
 To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
 To describe products and processes and explain their uses and purposes clearly and
accurately
 To express their opinions effectively in both formal and informal discussions

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking
 End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

HS3252 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH - II L T P C

2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES :
 To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their reading and writing
skills
 To learn various reading strategies and apply in comprehending documents in
professional context.
 To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
 To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
 To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placements

UNIT I MAKING COMPARISONS 6

Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals, brochures; Writing – Professional emails,
Email etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar – Mixed Tenses, Prepositional
phrases
UNIT II EXPRESSING CAUSAL RELATIONS IN SPEAKING AND WRITING 6
Reading - Reading longer technical texts– Cause and Effect Essays, and Letters / emails of
complaint, Writing - Writing responses to complaints. Grammar - Active Passive Voice
transformations, Infinitive and Gerunds

UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING 6

Reading - Case Studies, excerpts from literary texts, news reports etc. Writing – Letter to the
Editor, Checklists, Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay. Grammar – Error
correction; If conditional sentences

UNIT IV REPORTING OF EVENTS AND RESEARCH 6

Reading –Newspaper articles; Writing – Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report,
Survey Report Grammar – Reported Speech, Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions- use of
prepositions

UNIT V THE ABILITY TO PUT IDEAS OR INFORMATION COGENTLY 6

Reading – Company profiles, Statement of Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with
professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application – Cover letter & Resume; Grammar
– Numerical adjectives, Relative Clauses.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
 To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical
texts
 To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in
the written format.
 To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
 To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd.
Department of English, Anna University.
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press 2021.
3. Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr.
KN. Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.
REFERENCES:
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university
press. New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001,
NewDelhi.
3. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan,
Tata McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd.
1990, Delhi.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3251 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring
in engineering and technology.
 To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays
an important role in real life problems.
 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering and
technology disciplines.
 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.

UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and
small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for
goodness of fit – Independence of attributes.

UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block
design – Latin square design - 22 factorial design.

UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton
Raphson method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting
- Gauss Jordan method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of
a matrix by Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.

UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods:
Milne’s and Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential
equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
 Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of
agriculture.
 Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
 Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
 Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science",
Khanna Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage
Learning, New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia,
New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, 12th Edition, 2020.
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and
Statistics ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

PH3259 APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students to understand the basics of crystallography and its importance in
studying materials properties.
 To inculcate the knowledge of phase relationships for the understanding of material
properties.
 To understand the electrical properties of materials including free electron theory,
applications of quantum mechanics and magnetic materials.
 To instil knowledge on physics of semiconductors, determination of charge carriers and
device applications
 To establish a sound grasp of knowledge on different optical properties of materials,
optical displays and applications
UNIT I CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 9
Crystal structures: BCC, FCC and HCP – directions and planes - linear and planar densities –
crystal imperfections- edge and screw dislocations – grain and twin boundaries - Burgers vector
and elastic strain energy- Slip systems, plastic deformation of materials - Polymorphism – phase
changes – nucleation and growth – homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation.

UNIT II PHASE DIAGRAMS 9

Phase equilibrium – solubility limit – solid solution (interstitial and substitution) – intermediate
phases – intermetallics – electron compound – Gibbs phase rule – Unary phase diagram (iron)
– Binary phase diagrams: Isomorphous systems (Cu-Ni) – determination of phase composition
and phase amounts – tie line and lever rule – binary eutectic diagram with no solid solution and
limited solid solution (Pb-Sn) – eutectoid and peritectic reactions – other invariant reactions –
microstructural development during the slow cooling: eutectic, hypereutectic and hypoeutectic
compositions.

UNIT III ELECTRICAL AND MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Quantum free electron theory :Tunneling – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac
statistics – Density of energy states – Electron in periodic potential – Energy bands in solids –
tight binding approximation - Electron effective mass – concept of hole. Magnetic materials: Dia,
para and ferromagnetic effects – paramagnetism in the conduction electrons in metals –
exchange interaction and ferromagnetism – quantum interference devices – GMR devices.

UNIT IV SEMICONDUCTORS AND TRANSPORT PHYSICS 9

Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect band gap semiconductors
– Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier
concentration in N-type & P-type semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with
temperature – Carrier transport in Semiconductors: Drift, mobility and diffusion – Hall effect and
devices – Ohmic contacts – Schottky diode.

UNIT V OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classification of optical materials – Optical processes in semiconductors: optical absorption and
emission, charge injection and recombination, optical absorption, loss and gain. Optical
processes in quantum wells – Optoelectronic devices: light detectors and solar cells – light
emitting diode – laser diode - optical processes in organic semiconductor devices –excitonic
state – Electro-optics and nonlinear optics: Modulators and switching devices – plasmonics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the students should be able to
 Know basics of crystallography and its importance for varied materials properties.
 Understand the properties of materials through the study of phase relationships.
 Gain knowledge on the electrical and magnetic properties of materials and their
applications
 Understand clearly of semiconductor physics and functioning of semiconductor devices
 Understand the optical properties of materials and working principles of various optical
devices.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.Raghavan. Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited, 2015.
2. Safa Kasap, Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.
3. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Devices: Basic Principles, Wiley (India), 2007.
4. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Technology, Mc-Graw Hill India
(2019)
5. Safa kasap, Optoelectronics & Photonics: Principles and Practices, Pearson, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Balasubramaniam, Callister’s Materials Science and Engineering. Wiley (Indian Edition),
2014.
2. Wendelin Wright and Donald Askeland, Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering,
CL Engineering, 2013.
3. Robert F.Pierret, Semiconductor Device Fundamentals, Pearson, 2006.
4. Simon Sze and Ming-kwei Lee, Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology, Wiley,
2015.
5. Pallab Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Pearson, 2017.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - -
4 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - 2 - - -
AVG 3 2 1.6 1.4 1.75 1 1.5 1.5
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

BE3253 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING AND L T PC

MEASUREMENTS 3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
 To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical
machines
 To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
 To educate on the fundamental concepts of linear integrated circuits
 To introduce the functional elements and working of measuring instruments.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law -
Kirchhoff’s Laws –Independent and Dependent Sources – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis,
Mesh analysis with Independent sources only (Steady state) Introduction to AC Circuits and
Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value, Instantaneous power, real power, reactive
power and apparent power, power factor – Steady state analysis of RLC circuits (Simple
problems only)

UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9

Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and
Applications. Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase
Alternator, Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.
UNIT III ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9
Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon
&Germanium – PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar
Junction Transistor-Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and
Applications, Rectifier and Inverters
UNIT IV LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 9
Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, Basic applications of op-amp – Inverting and Non-inverting
Amplifiers, summer, differentiator and integrator-S/H circuit, D/A converter (R- 2R ladder), A/D
converters- Flash type ADC using OP-AMPS . Functional block, characteristics of 555 timer–
Astable multi-vibrator mode.
UNIT V MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION 9
Functional elements of an instrument, Standards and calibration, Operating Principle , types -
Moving Coil and Moving Iron meters, Measurement of three phase power, Energy Meter,
Instrument Transformers-CT and PT,DSO- Block diagram- Data acquisition.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
CO2:Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
CO3:Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
CO4:Explain the basic concepts of linear integrated circuits
CO5:Explain the operating principles of measuring instruments.

TEXT BOOKS
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education, Second Edition, 2020.
2. Allan S Moris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Third Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, 2001.
3. S.K. Bhattacharya, Basic Electrical Engineering, Pearson Education, 2019
4. James A .Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, “Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits”, Wiley, 2018.

REFERENCES
1. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronic Devices’, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
2. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi,January 2015.
3. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition,
2017
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs&PS POs PSOs
Os 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 2 1 1
CO/PO & PSO 2 2 1 1 2 1 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Drawing engineering curves.
2. Drawing freehand sketch of simple objects.
3. Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
4. Drawing development of solids
5. Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)
Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments - BIS
conventions and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction
of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid —
construction of involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above
curves.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating
object method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of
Three Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from
pictorial views of objects.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 6+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the
one of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders
and cones.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software (Not for examination)

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale —lsometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD
Software (Not for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
• Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
• Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
• Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
• Draw the development of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhatt
rd
N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
53 Edition, 2019.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2 n d Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications,
Bangalore, 27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press,
New Delhi, 2015.
5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition,
2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and lay out of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Avg 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

GE3252 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் LTPC

1 0 01

அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் தநெவுத் ததொழில் – பொமனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப் பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .

அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவமமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில்
வீட்டுப் தபொருட்களில் வடிவமமப் பு- ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும்
நடுகல் லும் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மமமட அமமப் பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் -
மொமல் லபுரெ் சிற் பங் களும் , மகொவில் களும் – மெொழர் கொலத்துப்
தபருங் மகொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக்
மகொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டமமப் புகள் பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுமர மீனொட்சி அம் மன்
ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமமல நொயக்கர் மஹொல் – தெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் –
பிரிட்டிஷ் கொலத்தில் தென்மனயில் இந்மதொ-ெொமரொதெனிக் கட்டிடக் கமல.

அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

கப் பல் கட்டும் கமல – உமலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் ெொமல – இரும் மப
உருக்குதல் , எஃகு – வரலொற் றுெ் ெொன்றுகளொக தெம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள்
– நொணயங் கள் அெ்ெடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் ெொமலகள் –
கல் மணிகள் , கண்ணொடி மணிகள் – சுடுமண் மணிகள் – ெங் கு மணிகள் –
எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் – ததொல் லியல் ெொன்றுகள் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின்
வமககள் .

அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

அமண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – மெொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம்
– கொல் நமட பரொமரிப் பு – கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவமமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
மவளொண்மம மற் றும் மவளொண்மமெ் ெொர்ந்த தெயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் ெொர் அறிவு
– மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய
அறிவு – அறிவுெொர் ெமூகம் .

அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3

அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள
மின்பதிப் பு தெய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன்தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இமணயக்
கல் விக்கழகம் – தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் –
தெொற் குமவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
GE3252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY LTPC
1 001
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries
(BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.
UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3
Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam
Age - Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and
other worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)-
Thirumalai Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during
British Period.
UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3
Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass
beads - Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types
described in Silappathikaram.
UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3
Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry
- Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries
– Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3
Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference Book.
 NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3251 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘
Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

NX3252 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3253 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to provide hands on training to the students in:
1. Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in common household
wood work.
2. Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
3. Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
4. Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.
GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)

PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling, unions,
reducers, elbows and other components which are commonly used in
household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and flexible pipes
used inhousehold appliances.

WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.

Wood Work Study:

a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.

PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board
wiring with lamp, fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using
Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater

GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.

BASIC MACHINING WORK:

a) (simple)Turning.
 b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.

ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an airconditioner.

SHEET METAL WORK:

a) Making of a square tray

FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.

PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.

ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:

a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:

a) Study an elements of smart phone..
b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.
c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop
TOTAL = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household plumbing
work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household wood work.
2. Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
3. Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple processes
like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of common
household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
4. Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple electronic components on
PCB.
 BE3273 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING AND L T P C
MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY 0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in conducting load tests on electrical machines
 To gain practical experience in characterizing electronic devices
 To train the students to use DSO for measurements

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

ELECTRICAL
1. Verification of ohms and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Load test on DC Shunt Motor.
3. Load test on Self Excited DC Generator
4. Load test on Single phase Transformer
5. Load Test on Induction Motor
ELECTRONICS
6. Experiment on Transistor based application circuits (Inverting and non-inverting amplifier or
switching circuits)
(Or)
Experiments on Operational Amplifier based Inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
7. Experiments on ADC.
8. Experiments on 555 timer

MEASUREMENTS
9. Study on function of DSO.
10. Measurement of Amplitude, Frequency, Time, Phase Measurement using DSO.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
1. Use experimental methods to verify the Ohm’s and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Analyze experimentally the load characteristics of electrical machines
3. Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
4. Use DSO to measure the various parameters

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs&PSOs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 1 1 1.5 2 2 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
GE3272 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY LT P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective discussions
in a professional context.
 To analyse concepts and problems and make effective presentations explaining them clearly
and precisely.
 To be able to communicate effectively through formal and informal writing.
 To be able to use appropriate language structures to write emails, reports and essays
 To give instructions and recommendations that are clear and relevant to the context

UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life- discussing
past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).

UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems-
discussing travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing
arrangements-discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding
common technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.

UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios- talking
about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons- discussing likes
and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary scenarios Writing: short
essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.

UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-( example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.

UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues( making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing:
job application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
 Discuss, analyse and present concepts and problems from various perspectives to arrive at
suitable solutions
 Write emails, letters and effective job applications.
 Write critical reports to convey data and information with clarity and precision
 Give appropriate instructions and recommendations for safe execution of tasks

Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
MA3351 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
 To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
 To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations
that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Formation of partial differential equations –Solutions of standard types of first order partial differential
equations - First order partial differential equations reducible to standard types- Lagrange’s linear
equation - Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients
of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous types.

UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 9+3

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series
and cosine series – Root mean square value – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier series solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution
of two dimensional equation of heat conduction (Cartesian coordinates only).

UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3

Statement of Fourier integral theorem– Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity.

UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3

Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Convergence of Z-transforms - – Initial and final value
theorems - Inverse Z-transform using partial fraction and convolution theorem - Formation of
difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z - transforms.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
 Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in
engineering applications.
 Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
 Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
 Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using
Z transform techniques for discrete time systems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 44thEdition, Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, India,
2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Andrews. L.C and Shivamoggi. B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
2. Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2015.
3. James. G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 4thEdition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2018.
6. Wylie. R.C. and Barrett . L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 ‘04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
ME3351 ENGINEERING MECHANICS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To Learn the use scalar and vector analytical techniques for analysing forces in statically
2. determinate structures
3. To introduce the equilibrium of rigid bodies, vector methods and free body diagram
4. To study and understand the distributed forces, surface, loading on beam and intensity.
5. To learn the principles of friction, forces and to determine the apply the concepts of frictional
forces at the contact surfaces of various engineering systems.
6. To develop basic dynamics concepts – force, momentum, work and energy;

UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES 9

Fundamental Concepts and Principles, Systems of Units, Method of Problem Solutions, Statics of
Particles -Forces in a Plane, Resultant of Forces, Resolution of a Force into Components,
Rectangular Components of a Force, Unit Vectors. Equilibrium of a Particle- Newton’s First Law of
Motion, Space and Free-Body Diagrams, Forces in Space, Equilibrium of a Particle in Space.

UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 9

Principle of Transmissibility, Equivalent Forces, Vector Product of Two Vectors, Moment of a Force
about a Point, Varignon’s Theorem, Rectangular Components of the Moment of a Force, Scalar
Product of Two Vectors, Mixed Triple Product of Three Vectors, Moment of a Force about an Axis,
Couple - Moment of a Couple, Equivalent Couples, Addition of Couples, Resolution of a Given Force
into a Force -Couple system, Further Reduction of a System of Forces, Equilibrium in Two and Three
Dimensions - Reactions at Supports and Connections.

UNIT III DISTRIBUTED FORCES 9

Centroids of lines and areas – symmetrical and unsymmetrical shapes, Determination of Centroids
by Integration, Theorems of Pappus-Guldinus, Distributed Loads on Beams, Centre of Gravity of a
Three-Dimensional Body, Centroid of a Volume, Composite Bodies, Determination of Centroids of
Volumes by Integration. Moments of Inertia of Areas and Mass - Determination of the Moment of
Inertia of an Area by Integration, Polar Moment of Inertia, Radius of Gyration of an Area, Parallel-
Axis Theorem, Moments of Inertia of Composite Areas, Moments of Inertia of a Mass - Moments of
Inertia of Thin Plates, Determination of the Moment of Inertia of a Three-Dimensional Body by
Integration.

UNIT IV FRICTION 9
The Laws of Dry Friction, Coefficients of Friction, Angles of Friction, Wedge friction, Wheel Friction,
Rolling Resistance, Ladder friction.

UNIT V DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9

Kinematics - Rectilinear Motion and Curvilinear Motion of Particles. Kinetics- Newton’s Second Law
of Motion -Equations of Motions, Dynamic Equilibrium, Energy and Momentum Methods - Work of
a Force, Kinetic Energy of a Particle, Principle of Work and Energy, Principle of Impulse and
Momentum, Impact of bodies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
 Illustrate the vector and scalar representation of forces and moments
 Analyse the rigid body in equilibrium
 Evaluate the properties of distributed forces
 Determine the friction and the effects by the laws of friction
 Calculate dynamic forces exerted in rigid body
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer Ferdinand P, Russel Johnston Jr., David F Mazurek, Philip J Cornwell, Sanjeev
Sanghi, Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and Dynamics, McGraw Higher
Education., 12thEdition, 2019.
2. Vela Murali, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics and Dynamics”, Oxford University Press, 2018.

REFERENCES:
1. Boresi P and Schmidt J, Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics, 1/e, Cengage
learning, 2008.
2. Hibbeller, R.C., Engineering Mechanics: Statics, and Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics,
13th edition, Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. Irving H. Shames, Krishna Mohana Rao G, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics,
4thEdition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
4. Meriam J L and Kraige L G, Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Engineering Mechanics:
Dynamics, 7th edition, Wiley student edition, 2013.
5. Timoshenko S, Young D H, Rao J V and SukumarPati, Engineering Mechanics, 5thEdition,
McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2013.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
2 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
4 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
5 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
Low (1); Medium (2); High (3)
MR3351 FLUID MECHANICS AND THERMAL SYSTEMS L TPC
4 0 04
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To knowledge in Fluid Properties and Statics
2. To understand the concept of fluid kinematics and Dynamics.
3. To learn about the flows in fluid, Viscous flows and flow through pipes
4. To understand the basics laws of thermodynamics
5. To understand the second law of thermodynamics and entropy
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS 12
Fluid Definition and Classification – Properties of fluids: Density, Specific Weight, Specific Volume,
Specific Gravity, Viscosity, Compressibility, Bulk Modulus, Capillary and Surface Tension – Fluid
statics: Concept of fluid static pressure – Pascal‘s law –Absolute and Gauge pressures –
Manometers: Types and Pressure measurement – Concept of Buoyancy and Floatation.

UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS AND FLUID DYNAMICS 12

Fluid Kinematics: Types of fluid flow – Continuity equation in two and three dimensions – Velocity
and Acceleration of fluid particle – Velocity potential function and Stream function. Fluid dynamics:
Euler's equation along a streamline –Bernoulli's equation and applications – Venturi meter, Orifice
meter and Pitot tube.

UNIT III VISCOUS FLOW, FLOW THROUGH PIPES AND

DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12
Viscous flow: Shear stress, pressure gradient relationship – Flow of viscous fluid through circular
pipe – Flow through pipes: Loss of head due to friction – Minor head losses – Hydraulic gradient
and Total energy lines – Flow through pipes in series and in parallel – Power transmission through
pipes. Dimensional analysis: Buckingham's theorem.

UNIT IV BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS AND FIRST LAW OF

THERMODYNAMICS 12
Thermodynamics – Microscopic and macroscopic point of view – Systems, properties, process,
path, cycle. Thermodynamic equilibrium – Zeroth law of Thermodynamics – internal energy,
enthalpy, specific heat capacities CV and CP, Relationship between CV and CP. First law of
Thermodynamics – Application to closed and open systems – Steady Flow Energy Equation (SFEE)
– Simple problems.

UNIT V SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS AND ENTROPY 12

Second Law of thermodynamics – Kelvin Planck and Clausius Statements – Equivalents of Kelvin
Planck and Clausius statements. Reversibility – Irreversibility, reversible cycle – Heat engine, heat
pump and refrigerator. Carnot cycle and Clausius theorem, the property of entropy, the inequality of
Clausius – Entropy principle – General expression for entropy – Simple problems in entropy.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student able to:
CO1: Recognize the fluid properties, fluid statics and laws of thermodynamics
CO2: Interpret the problems related to kinematics and dynamics of fluids and thermal
systems
CO3: Review the energy losses in flow through pipes and steady flow equation in
thermal systems.
CO4: Analyse the fluid flow and thermal process
CO5: Solve the problems related to fluid and thermal systems.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs&PS POs PSOs
Os 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 3 1
CO4 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 1.4 2.3 1 1 2.4 2.4 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOK:
1. Bansal R.K., ―Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines‖, 9th Edition, Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Nag P.K., ―Engineering Thermodynamics‖, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Cengel Yunus A. and Boles Michael A., ―Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach‖, 7th
Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2011.
3. Frank M. White., ―Fluid Mechanics‖, 7th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2009.
MR3391 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND MICROPROCESSOR LTPC
3 003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To present the Digital fundamentals, Boolean algebra and its applications in digital systems
2. To familiarize with the design of various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
3. To introduce the analysis and design procedures for synchronous and asynchronous
sequential circuits
4. To explain the various semiconductor memories and related technology
5. To introduce the electronic circuits involved in the making of logic gate

UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 9

Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, 1‘s and 2‘s complements, Codes – Binary,
BCD, Excess 3, Gray, Alphanumeric codes, Boolean theorems, Logic gates, Universal gates, Sum
of products and product of sums, Minterms and Maxterms, Karnaugh map Minimization and Quine-
McCluskey method of minimization.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL & SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Design of Half and Full Adders, Half and Full Subtractors, Binary Parallel Adder -Multiplexer,
Demultiplexer, Decoder, Priority Encoder. Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D, design of clocked sequential
circuits – Design of Counters- Shift registers, Universal Shift Register

UNIT III ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS AND MEMORY DEVICES 9

Stable and Unstable states, output specifications, cycles and races, state reduction, race free
assignments, Hazards, Essential Hazards, Pulse mode sequential circuits, Design of Hazard free
circuits. Basic memory structure – ROM -PROM – EPROM – EEPROM –EAPROM, RAM – Static
and dynamic RAM - Programmable Logic Devices – Programmable Logic Array (PLA) -
Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA).

UNIT IV 8085 PROCESSOR 9

Hardware Architecture, pin diagram – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Timing Diagram – Interrupts.

UNIT V PROGRAMMING PROCESSOR 9

Instruction - format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data
manipulation& control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing – Look
up table - Subroutine instructions – stack -8255 architecture and operating modes

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the student able to:
CO1: State the fundamental operating concepts behind digital logic circuits and
microprocessors.
CO 2: Recognize the use of various digital logic circuits and sub units in microprocessors.
CO 3: Interpret the information flow in digital logic circuits and the architectures of microprocessors.
CO 4: Design the DLC and Microprocessor for the standard applications.
CO 5: Create the circuits using DLC and Microprocessor for given applications
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos&PSO POs PSOs
s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2014.
2. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 6th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2013.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education Inc, 2011
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller and
Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
4. R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, with 8085, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2013
MR3392 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND ACTUATORS LT PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To familiarize a relay and power semiconductor devices
2. To get a knowledge on drive characteristics
3. To obtain the knowledge on DC motors and drives.
4. To obtain the knowledge on AC motors and drives.
5. To obtain the knowledge on Stepper and Servo motor.

UNIT I RELAY AND POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

Study of Switching Devices – Relay and Types, Switching characteristics -BJT, SCR, TRIAC, GTO,
MOSFET, IGBT and IGCT-: SCR, MOSFET and IGBT - Triggering and commutation circuit -
Introduction to Driver and snubber circuits

UNIT II DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS 9

Electric drive – Equations governing motor load dynamics – steady state stability – multi quadrant
Dynamics: acceleration, deceleration, torque, and Direction starting & stopping – Selection of motor.
UNIT III DC MOTORS AND DRIVES 9
DC Servomotor - Types of PMDC & BLDC motors - principle of operation- emf and torque equations
- characteristics and control – Drives- H bridge - Single and Three Phases – 4 quadrant operation –
Applications
UNIT IV AC MOTORS AND DRIVES 9
Introduction – Induction motor drives – Speed control of 3-phase induction motor – Stator voltage
control – Stator frequency control – Stator voltage and frequency control – Stator current control –
Static rotor resistance control – Slip power recovery control.
UNIT V STEPPER AND SERVO MOTOR 9
Stepper Motor: Classifications- Construction and Principle of Operation – Modes of Excitation-Drive
System-Logic Sequencer - Applications. Servo Mechanism – DC Servo motor-AC Servo motor –
Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the student able to:
CO 1: Recognize the principles and working of relays, drives and motors.
CO 2: Explain the working and characteristics of various drives and motors.
CO 3: Apply the solid state switching circuits to operate various types of Motors and Drivers
CO 4: Interpret the performance of Motors and Drives.
CO 5: Suggest the Motors and Drivers for given applications.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 1 1.4 2 1.4 1 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bimbhra B.S., "Power Electronics", 5th Edition, Kanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Mehta V.K. & Rohit Mehta, "Principles of Electrical Machines", 2nd Edition, S.Chand& Co. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Gobal K. Dubey, "Fundamentals of Electrical Drives", 2nd Edition, Narosal Publishing House,
New Delhi, 2001.
2. Theraja B.L. &Theraja A.K., "A Text Book of Electrical Technology", 2nd Edition, S.Chand& Co.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
3. Singh M.D. &Kanchandhani K.B., "Power Electronics", McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos&PS POs PSOs
Os 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 1 1.4 2 1.4 1 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
RA3301 ROBOT KINEMATICS LT PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce Robots history, terminologies, classification and configurations.
2. To get knowledge about basic Geometrical and Algebraic approach to solve forward
kinematics of serial manipulator.
3. To get knowledge about advanced forward kinematics of serial manipulator.
4. To get knowledge about inverse kinematics of various serial manipulator.
5. To get knowledge about Jacobian aspects and infinitesimal motion of robot mechanisms.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF ROBOTICS 9

Introduction to Robotics - History - Definitions - Law of Robotics – Terminologies - Classifications
Overview – Links & Joints - Degrees of Freedoms - Coordinate Systems - Work Volume - Precision,
Repeatability & Accuracy - Position and Orientation of Objects - Roll, Pitch and Yaw Angles - Joint
Configuration of Five Types of Serial Manipulators - Wrist Configuration- Overview of end effector -
Selection and Application of Serial Manipulators.

UNIT II FORWARD KINEMATICS - GEOMETRICAL AND ALGEBRAIC

APPROACH 9
Need for forward and Inverse Kinematics Equation – Parameters in Design and Control – Methods
of forward and inverse kinematics- Geometrical and Algebraic Approach in Forward Kinematics
Solution, 1 DOF - 2 DOF Planar Robot (2P and 2R); 3DOF 2RP Spatial Robot.

UNIT III FORWARD KINEMATIC MODELING – DENAVIT-HARTEBERG (DH)

APPROACH 9
Unit Circle Trigonometry - Translation Matrix - Rotation matrix, Euler Angles - Quaternion
Fundamental - Dot and Cross Products - Frames and Joint Coordinates - Homogeneous
Transformation - D-H and Modified D-H Convention and Procedures – Forward kinematics Solution
using D-H Convention: 3 DOF wrist , RR Planar, 3 DOF RRP, Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical ,
SCARA and Articulated 3 DOF robots - 3 DOF robot with wrist.

UNIT IV INVERSE KINEMATICSMODELING 9

Introduction to inverse kinematics -Issues in inverse kinematics - Inverse kinematics of 2 DOF
Planar robot - 2 and 3DOF planar and Spatial robot - Tool configuration - Inverse kinematics of 3
axis robot and 6 axis Robot - Inverse kinematics Computation- Closed loop solution

UNIT V KINEMATIC MODELING OF DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE ROBOT 9

Degree of Mobility, Steerability and Maneuverability- Mobile Robot kinematics - Kinematic model
and constraints, Mobile robot workspace – Representation of robot position – Kinematic models of
differential wheel drive - Fixed wheel and steered wheel - Mobile manipulators and its applications
– swarm robots.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course students able to
CO1: Explain the history, classifications, and basic terminologies of robotics and various
configuration of robots.
CO 2: Evaluate forward kinematic model for planar and spatial robot manipulator.
CO 3: Evaluate forward kinematic model for multi-DOF robot manipulators.
CO 4: Evaluate inverse kinematic model for multi-DOF robot manipulators.
CO 5: Evaluate forward kinematic model for differential drive mobile robot.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mikell P. Groover, "Industrial Robotics", McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2012.
2. John J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, ISE 2008.
3. Lynch, Kevin M., and Frank C. Park. Modern Robotics: Mechanics, Planning, and Control 1st
ed. Cambridge University Press, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. S K Saha, Introduction to Robotics, Tata McGraw-Hill, Second Edition, 2017
2. Mikell P. Groover, "Industrial Robotics", McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2017
3. Arthor Critchlow, “Introduction to Robotics”, 1st edition, Macmillan, 2009.
4. Mohsen Shahinpoor, “A Robot Engineering Text Book”, 1st edition, Harper and Row, 2004.
5. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw - Hill
Publis Robotics: Control and Programming.
6. J. Srinivas, R. V. Dukkipati, K., “Robotics: Control and Programming”, Narosa Publishing
House, 2009.
7. Tsuneo Yohikwa, Foundations of Robotics Analysis and Control, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., 2001
8. Bijay K. Ghosh, Ning Xi, T.J. Tarn, Control in Robotics and Automation Sensor - Based
integration, Academic Press, 1999.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO & PSO
Average 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.4 1.0 1.0 1.0 3.0
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
MR3361 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND ACTUATORS LABORATORY L T PC
0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

1. To impart knowledge on Performance of the fundamental control practices associated with

AC and DC machines (starting, reversing, braking, plugging, etc.) using power electronics
To impart industry oriented learning
2. To evaluate the use of computer-based analysis tools to review the major classes of
machines and their physical basis for operation

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

(i) Load test on DC Motor

(ii) Load test on 3 Phase Induction Motor
(iii) Load test on 3 Phase Synchronous Motor.
(iv) Rheostat based Speed control of motors (AC and DC)
(v) Switching circuits of MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRAIC.
(vi) Gate pulsation generation using PWM signals.
(vii) Speed control of DC motor using Power Electronic Drive.
(viii) Position and direction control DC servomotor using Power Electronic Drive.
(ix) Position, direction and speed control of BLDC and PMDC motors using Power Electronic Drive.
(x) Position, Direction and speed control of stepper Motor.
(xi) Four quadrant operation of three-phase Induction Motor using Power Electronic Drive.
(xii) VFD control of single phase and three-phase induction motor using Power Electronic Drive.
(xiii) AC servomotor position, direction and speed control using Power Electronic Drive.
(Any 10 experiments)

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student able to:
CO1: Practice the basic working of AC, DC motor, stepper motor, servo motor and synchronous
motor using power electronic drive
CO2: Demonstrate the control of AC, DC motor, stepper motor, servo motor and synchronous
motor using power electronic drive
CO3: Analyze the performance of AC, DC motor, stepper motor, servo motor and synchronous
motor using power electronic drive

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
RA3311 ROBOT MODELLING AND SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. Make the students knowledgeable in modeling the basic components of a robot
2. Make the students knowledgeable in modeling some common joints, links and
transmission assembly for a robot.
3. Make the students knowledgeable in modeling a robot and its end effector.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 2D Sketch of a Gear.
2. 2D Sketch and 3D modelling of Sheet Metal Components
3. 3D Modelling Mounting clamp for motor.
4. 3D Modeling of GT2 pulley and belt drive system
5. 3D Modelling Ball Screw and Nut assembly.
6. 3D Modelling and motion simulation of Rotational Joint assembly.
7. 3D Modelling and motion simulation of Prismatic Joint assembly.
8. 3D modelling and simulation of Cartesian Robot
9. 3D modelling and simulation of Articulated / Spherical / Cylindrical Robot.
10. 3D modelling and motion simulation of 2 fingered gripper assembly.
11. 3D modelling of 2 Wheeled skid steering Mobile Robot.
12. 3D modelling of 4 Wheeled 2 steering Mobile Robot.
13. 3D modelling of 4 Wheeled 4 steering Mobile Robot.
14. Study on Harmonic Gear drive.
(ANY 10 EXPERIMENTS)
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course, the students will be able to;
1. Identify components and physical features of various parts for a robot system and sub
systems.
2. Model components and physical features of various parts for a robot system and sub
systems.
3. Create a CAD and simulation model for a robot system and sub systems.
CO-PO MAPPING:

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC
0 021
OBJECTIVES:
To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using
standard templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance
the presentability and overall utility value of content.
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the
common statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search
and explore, visualize, interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS
PowerPoint, including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media
elements and enhance the overall quality of presentations.

MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility

MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate
results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook

MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
 Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their
day to day technical and academic requirements
 Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
 Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common
tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.
ME3493 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY L T PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To study the concepts and basic mechanics of metal cutting and the factors affecting
machinability
2. To learn working of basic and advanced turning machines.
3. To teach the basics of machine tools with reciprocating and rotating motions and abrasive
finishing processes.
4. To study the basic concepts of CNC of machine tools and constructional features of CNC.
5. To learn the basics of CNC programming concepts to develop the part programme for
Machine centre and turning centre
UNIT I MECHANICS OF METAL CUTTING 9
Mechanics of chip formation, forces in machining, Types of chip, cutting tools – single point cutting
tool nomenclature, orthogonal and oblique metal cutting, thermal aspects, cutting tool materials, tool
wear, tool life, surface finish, cutting fluids and Machinability.

UNIT II TURNING MACHINES 9

Centre lathe, constructional features, specification, operations – taper turning methods, thread
cutting methods, special attachments, surface roughness in turning, machining time and power
estimation. Special lathes - Capstan and turret lathes- tool layout – automatic lathes: semi-automatic
– single spindle: Swiss type, automatic screw type – multi spindle

UNIT III RECIPROCATING MACHINE TOOLS 9

Reciprocating machine tools: shaper, planer, slotter: Types and operations- Hole making: Drilling,
reaming, boring, tapping, type of milling operations-attachments- types of milling cutters– machining
time calculation - Gear cutting, gear hobbing and gear shaping – gear finishing methods
Abrasive processes: grinding wheel – specifications and selection, types of grinding process –
cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding, internal grinding - micro finishing methods

UNIT IV CNC MACHINES 9

Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tools, constructional details, special features –
Drives, Recirculating ball screws, tool changers; CNC Control systems – Open/closed, point-to-
point/continuous - Turning and machining centres – Work holding methods in Turning and
machining centres, Coolant systems, Safety features.

UNIT V PROGRAMMING OF CNC MACHINE TOOLS 9

Coordinates, axis and motion, Absolute vs Incremental, Interpolators, Polar coordinates, Program
planning, G and M codes, Manual part programming for CNC machining centers and Turning centers
– Fixed cycles, Loops and subroutines, Setting up a CNC machine for machining.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Apply the mechanism of metal removal process and to identify the factors involved in
improving machinability.
2. Describe the constructional and operational features of centre lathe and other special
purpose lathes.
3. Describe the constructional and operational features of reciprocating machine tools.
4. Apply the constructional features and working principles of CNC machine tools.
5. Demonstrate the Program CNC machine tools through planning, writing codes and setting
up CNC machine tools to manufacture a given component.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education India
Edition, 2009.
2. Michael Fitzpatrick, Machining and CNC Technology, McGraw-Hill Education; 3rd edition,
2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Roy. A. Lindberg, Processes and materials of manufacture, PHI / Pearson education, 2006.
2. GeofreyBoothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools”, McGraw Hill,
1984. Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology,” Metal Cutting and Machine Tools, Tata
McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. A. B. Chattopadhyay, Machining and Machine Tools, Wiley, 2nd edition, 2017.
4. Peter Smid, CNC Programming Handbook, Industrial Press Inc.,; Third edition, 2007

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
RA3401 DESIGN OF ROBOT ELEMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. To introduce the students to the fundamentals of machine design, material selection and to
solve the basic design problems.
2. To learn to derive various parameters for modelling links and joints in a robot.
3. To learn about Fundamentals of Computer Graphics
4. To learn and understand curves and surfaces in robot modelling.
5. To learn to derive various parameters for modelling end-effectors of a robot

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL DESIGN 9

Fundamentals of Machine Design-Engineering Design, Phases of Design, Design Consideration
- Standards and Codes - Design against Static and Dynamic Load –Modes of Failure, Factor of
Safety, Principal Stresses, Theories of Failure-Stress Concentration, Stress Concentration
Factors, Variable Stress, Fatigue Failure, Endurance Limit, Design for Finite and Infinite Life,
Soderberg and Goodman Criteria.

UNIT II DESIGN OF LINKS AND JOINTS 9

Loads and Forces on Links and Joints - Design of solid and hollow shafts - Rigid and flexible
couplings -Threaded fasteners - rolling contact bearings-– Links Design: Path and Motion
Synthesis – Cognate Linkages – Design of Spherical Joints.

UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9

Product cycle- Design process - Computer Aided Design – Computer graphics – co-ordinate
systems- 2D and 3D transformations- homogeneous coordinates - graphic primitives (point, line,
circle drawing algorithms) - Clipping- viewing transformation.

UNIT IV CURVES AND MODELLING 9

Representation of curves - Hermite cubic spline curve, Bezier curve, B-spline curves,
Fundamentals of solid modeling, Different solid representation schemes, Half -spaces, Boundary
representation (B-rep), Constructive solid geometry (CSG), Sweep representation, Analytic solid
modeling, Perspective, Parallel projection, Hidden line removal algorithms.

UNIT V DESIGN OF GRIPPERS 9

Grippers – Types of Grippers Mechanisms – Gripping Methods – Gripping Force analysis –
Gripper Design – Two Finger gripper – Three Finger Gripper – Magnetic Gripper Design –
Vacuum Gripper Design – Hooks – Scoops – Spools – Miscellaneous Grippers

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. State the design parameters for designing the components of a robot.
2. Apply the CAD modelling techniques in designing a Robot
3. Analyse the design parameters for designing the components of a robot.
4. Formulate the methods for designing the entire robot assembly
5. Create a Robot CAD Model.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph Edward Shigley, Charles R. Mischke “Mechanical Engineering Design”,
McGraw Hill, International Edition, 1992
2. Sharma. C.S. and Kamlesh Purohit, “Design of Machine Elements”, Prentice Hall of
India Private Limited, 2003
3. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2008
4. Ashby. M.F., “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Third edition, Butterworth-
Heineman, New York, 16th edition, 2012

REFERENCES:
1. Bhandari. V.B., “Design of Machine Elements”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, 2003.
2. Robert L. Norton, “Machine Design – An Integrated Approach”, Prentice Hall
International Edition, 2000.
3. Charles. J. A. and Crane. F. A. A, “Selection and Use of Engineering Materials”,
second edition, Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd., 3rd edition 2005.
4. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson Education, 7th Reprint, 2011.
5. Mikell P. Groover, "Industrial Robotics", McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2012.
6. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, Teppei Tsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling
and Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
7. Zeid, I., CAD/CAM, McGraw Hil , 2008.
MR3491 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the concepts of measurement technology.
2. To learn the various sensors used to measure various physical parameters.
3. To learn the fundamentals of signal conditioning, data acquisition and communication
systems used in mechatronics system development
4. To learn about the optical, pressure and temperature sensor
5. To understand the signal conditioning and DAQ systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basics of Measurement – Classification of errors – Error analysis – Static and dynamic
characteristics of transducers – Performance measures of sensors – Classification of sensors –
Sensor calibration techniques – Sensor Output Signal Types.
UNIT II MOTION, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9
Motion Sensors – Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical, Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive,
LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – GPS, Bluetooth, Range Sensors – RF
beacons, Ultrasonic Ranging, Reflective beacons, Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR).

UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 8

Strain Gage, Load Cell, Magnetic Sensors –types, principle, requirement and advantages: Magneto
resistive – Hall Effect – Current sensor Heading Sensors – Compass, Gyroscope, Inclinometers.
UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS 10
Photo conductive cell, photo voltaic, Photo resistive, LDR – Fiber optic sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm, Bellows, Piezoelectric – Tactile sensors, Temperature – IC, Thermistor, RTD,
Thermocouple. Acoustic Sensors – flow and level measurement, Radiation Sensors - Smart Sensors
- Film sensor, MEMS & Nano Sensors, LASER sensors.
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING AND DAQ SYSTEMS 9
Amplification – Filtering – Sample and Hold circuits – Data Acquisition: Single channel and multi-
channel data acquisition – Data logging - applications - Automobile, Aerospace, Home appliances,
Manufacturing, Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize with various calibration techniques and signal types for sensors.
CO2: Describe the working principle and characteristics of force, magnetic, heading,
pressure and temperature, smart and other sensors and transducers.
CO3: Apply the various sensors and transducers in various applications
CO4: Select the appropriate sensor for different applications.
CO5: Acquire the signals from different sensors using Data acquisition systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ernest O Doebelin, “Measurement Systems – Applications and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2009.
2. Sawney A K and Puneet Sawney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation
and Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Co, 12th edition New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. C. Sujatha ... Dyer, S.A., Survey of Instrumentation and Measurement, John Wiley & Sons,
Canada, 2001.
2. Hans Kurt Tönshoff (Editor), Ichiro, “Sensors in Manufacturing” Volume 1, Wiley-VCH April
2001.
3. John Turner and Martyn Hill, “Instrumentation for Engineers and Scientists”, Oxford Science
Publications, 1999.
4. Patranabis D, “Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2011.
5. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communication Technology Handbook” 2nd edition, CRC Press,
2015.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 2.2 2 1 1 2 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
MR3452 CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 2 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the components and their representation of control systems
2. To learn various methods for analyzing the time response, frequency response and stability
of the systems.
3. To learn the various approach for the system frequency analysis
4. To understand the concept of stability analysis
5. To know about the state variable methods of control system analysis

UNIT I SYSTEMS COMPONENTS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION 9

Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure-Feed forward and Feedback control theory-
Electrical and Mechanical Transfer Function Models-Block diagram Models-Signal flow graphs

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the standard first order and
second order system-effect on an additional zero and an additional pole-steady error constant and
system- type number-PID control-Analytical design for PD, PI, PID control systems

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9

Closed loop frequency response-Performance specification in frequency domain-Frequency
response of standard second order system- Bode Plot - Polar Plot-Design of compensators using
Bode plots- Cascade lead, lag and lag-lead compensation.

UNIT IV CONCEPTS OF STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh stability criterion-Relative
stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus-Nyquist stability criterion.

UNIT V CONTROL SYSTEM ANALYSIS USING STATE VARIABLE METHODS 9

State variable representation-Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions-Conversion
of transfer functions to state variable models-Solution of state equations-Concepts of Controllability
and Observability

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Experiments
1. Mathematical Modelling and Simulation of a Physical Systems and
Simulation and Reduction of Cascade and Parallel, and Closed Loop Sub-System.
2. Simulation and Analysis of First and Second Order System Equations in Time and Frequency
Domain.
3. Simulation and Analysis of System using Root-Locus and Bode Plot.
4. Simulation and Implementation of PID Combination for First Order Systems.
5. Simulation and Implementation of PID Combination Second Order Systems.
6. Auto tuning of PID parameters and analysis of PID Control.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: State the various control terminologies and concepts.
CO2: Know the procedures in developing the transfer function, state space models and time
and frequency domain analysis methods.
CO3: Apply the procedures on developing the systems in transfer function and state space approach
and apply to evaluate the performance of system in time and frequency domain techniques.
CO4: Illustrate the time and frequency response characteristics of system response.
CO5: Analyze the performance of system using various time and frequency domain
techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Gopal,“Control System – Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. K.Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI, 5 th Edition, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers,
5th Edition, 2007.
2. S.K.Bhattacharya, “Control System Engineering”, Pearson, 3 rd Edition, 2013.
3. Benjamin.C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition,1995.
4. Nagoor Kani, “Conrol Systems”, RBA Publications, 2017.
5. Norman. S. Nise, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley India edition, 2018.

TOTAL : 45(L) + 30(P) = 75 PERIODS

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
MR3591 FLUID POWER SYSTEMS AND INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LT P C
3 00 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To recognize the standard symbols and to understand the functions of basic fluid power
generation and actuation elements.
2. To realize the functions of fluid regulation and control elements and its typical uses in fluid power
circuit and to acquire the practice on assembling the various types of pneumatic circuits.
3. To familiar and exercise the design procedure of various types of pneumatic and hydraulic fluid
power circuits and to provide a training to create the various types of hydraulic circuits.
4. To learn about the fundamentals of Programmable Logic Controller.
5. To familiarize the Data Communication and Supervisory Control Systems.

UNIT – I FLUID POWER SYSTEM GENERATION AND ACTUATORS 9

Need For Automation, Classification of Drives - Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric –Comparison –
ISO Symbols for their Elements, Selection Criteria. Generating Elements- Hydraulic Pumps and
Motor Gears, Vane, Piston Pumps – Motors - Selection and Specification - Drive Characteristics –
Utilizing Elements - Linear Actuator – Types, Mounting Details, Cushioning – Power Packs –
Accumulators.

UNIT – II CONTROL AND REGULATIING ELEMENTS 9

Control and Regulating Elements — Direction, Flow and Pressure Control Valves -Methods of
Actuation, Types, Sizing of Ports. Spool Valves - Operating Characteristics -Electro Hydraulic Servo
Valves - Types - Characteristics and Performance.

UNIT – III CIRCUIT DESIGN FOR HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATICS 9

Typical Design Methods – Sequencing Circuits Design - Combinational Logic Circuit Design -
Cascade Method – KV Mapping - Electrical Control of Pneumatic and Hydraulic Circuits - Use of
Relays, Timers, Counters and PLC in pneumatics and hydraulics

UNIT – IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9

Industrial Automation - Programmable Logic Controller - Functions of PLCs - Features of PLC -
Selection of PLC - Architecture – IEC61131-3 programming standard and types - Basics of PLC
Programming – Ladder Logic Diagrams – Communication in PLC – Programming Timers and
Counters – Data Handling - PLC modules – Advanced motion controlled Multi Axis PLC

UNIT – V DATA COMMUNICATION AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Industrial Data Communications -– Modbus – HART – DeviceNet – Profibus – Fieldbus – RS232-
RS485- Modbus/ Modbus TCP/IP - mechatrolink – CAN – EtherCAT - Introduction to Supervisory
Control Systems – SCADA - Distributed Control System (DCS) – Safety Systems – human machine
interfaces - Total Integrated Automation (TIA) – Industry 4.0.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Recognize the various concepts of fluid power and PLC systems.
CO 2: Comprehend functions of fluid power and PLC systems.
CO 3: Explain the various standard fluid power circuits, functions, communication and IO details
of PLC.
CO 4: Demonstrate the standard fluid power circuits and PLC based interfaces.
CO 5: Construct the fluid power circuits and PLC based automation system.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Antony Esposito, “Fluid Power Systems and Control”, Prentice-Hall, 2006.
2. Peter Rohner, “Fluid Power Logic Circuit Design”, the Macmillan Press Ltd., London,
1979.
3. Frank D, Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controller” McGraw – Hill Publications, Fourth
Edition, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Lucas, M.P., “Distributed Control System”, Van Nastrand Reinhold Company, New York,
1986.
2. Mackay S., Wrijut E., Reynders D. and Park J., “Practical Industrial Data Networks
Design, Installation and Troubleshooting”, Newnes Publication, Elsevier, First Edition,
2004.
3. Patranabis. D, “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.
GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T PC
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and emphasize
on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and nonrenewable
resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental
management.
 To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity– values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats
to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6

Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .

UNIT III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 6

Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different types
new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal energy
conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6

Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects
of sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and protocols-
Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate change- Global,
Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies. Concept of Carbon
Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.

UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6

Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles-
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio-
economical and technological change.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
their conservation.
 To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and contribute
to the preventive measures in the society.
 To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
  To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
 To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials,
energy cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication,
London, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 . Edition 2010.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ., House,
Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, Third
Edition, 2015.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 ME3382 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1 To Selecting appropriate tools, equipment’s and machines to complete a given job.
2 To Performing various welding process using GMAW and fabricating gears using gear making
machines.
3 To Performing various machining process such as rolling, drawing, turning, shaping, drilling,
milling and analyzing the defects in the cast and machined components.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Fabricating simple structural shapes using Gas Metal Arc Welding machine.
2. Preparing green sand moulds with cast patterns.
3. Taper Turning and Eccentric Turning on circular parts using lathe machine.
4. Knurling, external and internal thread cutting on circular parts using lathe machine.
5. Shaping – Square and Hexagonal Heads on circular parts using shaper machine.
6. Drilling and Reaming using vertical drilling machine.
7. Milling contours on plates using vertical milling machine.
8. Cutting spur and helical gear using milling machine.
9. Generating gears using gear hobbing machine.
10. Generating gears using gear shaping machine.
11. Grinding components using cylindrical and centerless grinding machine.
12. Grinding components using surface grinding machine.
13. Cutting force calculation using dynamometer in milling machine
14. Cutting force calculation using dynamometer in lathe machine

TOTAL:60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Demonstrate the safety precautions exercised in the mechanical workshop and join two metals
using GMAW.
2. The students able to make the work piece as per given shape and size using machining process
such as rolling, drawing, turning, shaping, drilling and milling.
3. The students become make the gears using gear making machines and analyze the defects in
the cast and machined components
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 1 1 2 2
2 3 1 2 1 1 2 2
3 3 1 2 1 1 2 2
3 1 2 1 1 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
MR3461 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES

1. To learn about various force, pressure and vibration measuring sensors.

2. To learn about various Temperature, light and magnetic field measuring sensors
3. To learn about various displacement and speed measuring sensors.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION
1. Determination of Load, Torque and Force using Strain Gauge.
2. Determination of the characteristics of Pressure Sensor and Piezoelectric Force Sensor
3. Determination of Displacement using LVDT.
4. Determine the Characteristics of Various Temperature Sensors.
5. Determine the Characteristics of Various Light Detectors (Optical Sensors).
6. Distance Measurement using Ultrasonic and Laser Sensor.
7. Determine angular velocity of gyroscope,
8. Vibration measurement using Accelerometer.
9. Direction measurement using Magnetometer.
10. Speed, Position and Direction Measurement Using Encoders.
11. Force measurement using 3 axis force sensor.
12. Force Measurement using tactile sensors.
13. Data acquisition, visualization and analysis of signals.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course, the students will be able to;
CO1: Demonstrate the various contact and non-contact sensors.
CO2: Analyze and Identify appropriate sensors for given applications.
CO3: Create a sensor system for given requirements.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
MR3492 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS AND PROGRAMMING L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To familiarize the architecture and fundamental units of microcontroller.
2. To know the microcontroller programming methodology and to acquire the interfacing skills
and data exchange methods using various communication protocols.
3. To design the interface circuit and programming of I/O devices, sensors and actuators.
4. To understand ARM processor architecture and its functions to meet out the computational
and interface needs of growing mechatronic systems.
5. To acquaint the knowledge of real time embedded operating system for advanced system
developments.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROCONTROLLER 6
Fundamentals Functions of ALU - Microprocessor - Microcontrollers – CISC and RISC – Types
Microcontroller - 8051 Family - Architecture - Features and Specifications - Memory Organization -
Instruction Sets – Addressing Modes.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING AND COMMUNICATION 6
Fundamentals of Assembly Language Programming – Instruction to Assembler – Compiler and IDE
- C Programming for 8051 Microcontroller – Basic Arithmetic and Logical Programming - Timer and
Counter - Interrupts – Interfacing and Programming of Serial Communication, I2C, SPI and CAN of
8051 Microcontroller – Bluetooth and WI-FI interfacing of 8051 Microcontroller.
UNIT III PERIPHERAL INTERFACING 6
I/O Programming – Interfacing of Memory, Key Board and Displays – Alphanumeric and Graphic,
RTC, interfacing of ADC and DAC, Sensors - Relays - Solenoid Valve and Heater - Stepper Motors,
DC Motors - PWM Programming – Closed Loop Control Programming of Servomotor – Traffic Light
UNIT IV ARM PROCESSOR 6
Introduction ARM 7 Processor - Internal Architecture – Modes of Operations – Register Set –
Instruction Sets – ARM Thumb - Thumb State Registers – Pipelining – basic programming of ARM
7 - Applications.
UNIT V SINGLE BOARD COMPUTERS AND PROGRAMMING 6
System on Chip - Broadcom BCM2711 SoC – SBC architecture - Models and Languages –
Embedded Design – Real Time Embedded Operating Systems - Real Time Programming
Languages -– Python for Embedded Systems- GPIO Programming – Interfacing
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LAB

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Assembly Language Programming and Simulation of 8051.
2. Alphanumeric and Graphic LCD Interfacing using 8051 Microcontroller.
3. Input switches and keyboard interfacing of 8051.
4. Sensor Interfacing with ADC to 8051 and DAC & RTC Interfacing with 8051. .
5. Timer, Counter and Interrupt Program Application for 8051.
6. Step Motor (Unipolar & Bipolar Motor) and PWM Servo Motor Control to Interfacing with
8051.
7. UART Serial and Parallel Port Programming of 8051.
8. I2C, SPI and CAN Programming of 8051.
9. Interfacing and Programming of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi with 8051
10. Programming of ARM Processor for Sensor Interface.
11. Stepper Motor and Servo Motor Control Using ARM Processor.
12. Serial Communication of ARM Processor with Computation Platform.
13. Wireless Communication of ARM Processor with Computation Platform.
14. GPIO Programming of Real Time Embedded Operating Systems.
15. IOT application using SBC.
(any 7 experiments) TOTAL:30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Know the various functional units of microcontroller, processors and system-on-chip based
on the features and specifications.
CO 2: Recognize the role of each functional units in microcontroller, processors and system- on-
chip based on the features and specifications.
CO 3: Interface the sensors, actuators and other I/O’s with microcontroller, processors and system
on chip based interfacing
CO 4: Design the circuit and write the programming microcontroller, processors and system on chip
CO 5: Develop the applications using Embedded system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Vahid and Tony Givagis, “Embedded System Design”, 2011, Wiley.
2. Kenneth J. Aylala, “The 8051 Microcontroller, the Architecture and Programming
Applications”, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice GillispicMazdi, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems”, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Simon Monk, Programming the Raspberry Pi, Second Edition: Getting Started with Python
McGraw Hill TAB; 2nd edition,2015
3. James W. Stewart, “The 8051 Microcontroller Hardware, Software and Interfacing”, Regents
Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. John B. Peatman, “Design with Microcontrollers”, McGraw Hill International, USA, 2005.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & PSOs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 3
CO/PO & PSO Average 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 3
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
RA3501 ROBOT PATH PLANNING AND PROGRAMMING L TPC
30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. Introduce basic trajectory planning problems.
2. Provide a basic review of various path planning theory of manipulator.
3. Provide a basic review of various path planning theory of mobile robot.
4. Introduction to the most widely used classical motion planning algorithms.
5. Introduce sufficient terminology and concepts in ROS for robot programming.

UNIT - I TRAJECTORY PLANNING APPROACHES 9

Definitions – Task planning and Trajectory planning – Representation of end-effector: Cartesian and
joint space schemes. Workspace Analysis: work envelope of a multi DOF manipulator. Applications:
Point to point motion and continuous path motion.

UNIT - II TRAJECTORY PLANNING OF MANIPULATOR 9

Joint space techniques – Motion profiles – Cubic polynomial, Linear Segmented Parabolic Blends
and cycloidal motion - Cartesian space technique – Straight line and circular trajectories.

UNIT - III PATH PLANNING OF MOBILE ROBOT 9

Introduction - Representation of the Robot's Environment - Review of configuration spaces - Visibility
Graphs - Voronoi diagrams - Potential Fields – Attractive and Repulsive – Cell Decomposition -
Planning with moving obstacles - Probabilistic Roadmaps - Random trees - Execution of the
Quadtree- Based Path Planner Program.

UNIT - IV PATH PLANNING ALGORITHMS 9

Planning - A* Algorithm - the D∗ algorithm - Path control. Graph search and discrete planning
algorithms. - Sensor-Based Motion Planning Algorithms – the “Bug” algorithms – the Tangent Bug
algorithm.

UNIT - V ROS PROGRAMMING 9

Robot language classification - Programming methods: Lead through method, teach pendent
method - Syntax features and applications of various programming languages – Examples - Inter
locking commands - Safety features - Introduction to Robot Operating System (ROS) - ROS
examples - Introduction to programming using ROS - Industrial ROS - ROS examples -
Programming for point to point /continuous – operations - Case Study
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
CO1: Recognize various trajectory planning and path planning for mobile robot and Manipulator.
CO2: Classify trajectory planning and path planning for mobile robot and Manipulator.
CO3: Choose appropriate Path and Trajectory planning algorithm for various Industrial
Applications.
CO4: Plan the path and trajectory for various Industrial robots and mobile robots for specific
Applications.
CO5: Program the developed path and trajectory into real time robot applications.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Niku S B, "Introduction to Robotics, Analysis, Control, Applications", John-Wiley & Sons
Inc, 2011.
2. Howie Choset, Kevin Lynch Seth Hutchinson, George Kantor, Wolfram Burgard, Lydia
Kavraki, Sebastian Thrun , "Principles of Robot Motion-Theory, Algorithms, and
Implementation", MIT Press, Cambridge, 2005
REFERENCES:
1. Planning Algorithms by Steve LaValle (Cambridge Univ. Press, New York, 2006).
2. Principles of Robot Motion: Theory, Algorithms, and Implementations (by Howie Choset,
Kevin Lynch, Seth Hutchinson, George Kantor, Wolfram Burgard, Lydia Kavraki, and
Sebastian Thrun.
3. Robot Motion Planning by J.C. Latombe.
4. Patnaik, Srikanta , "Robot Cognition and Navigation An Experiment with Mobile Robots",
Springer-Verlag Berlin and Heidelberg, 2007.
5. Reza N Jazar , "Theory of Applied Robotics", Springer, 2010.
6. Morgan Quigley, Brian Gerkey, William D. Smart, Programming Robots with Ros: A Practical
Introduction to the Robot Operating System, First Edition, 2016, ISBN 9352132793; 978-
9352132799

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
 MR3561 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LABORATORY LTPC
004 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To familiar and exercise the design procedure of various types of pneumatic and hydraulic
fluid power circuits.
2. To practice the fundamentals of Programmable Logic Controller.
3. To practice the Data Communication between PLC.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
FLUID POWER DRIVES
1. Experimental Verification of Speed Control Circuits in Pneumatic and Hydraulic Trainer.
2. Experimental Verification of Single and Double Acting Cylinder Circuits Using Different
Directional Control Values.
3. Experimental Verification of Electro-Pneumatic Circuits.
4. Experimental Verification of Pneumatic Sequencing Circuits.
5. Experimental Verification of Logic, Metre-in and Metre-out Pneumatic Circuits.
6. Experimental Verification of Electro Pneumatic Sequencing Circuits.
7. Control of PLC Based Electro Pneumatic Sequencing Circuits.
8. Control of PLC Based Electro Hydraulic Sequencing Circuits.
Any 6 Experiments

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
1. Design a Ladder Logic Program for various Logic Gates AND, OR, NOT, NOR, NAND,
EX-OR and EX-NOR.
2. Develop Ladder Diagram Programming to set Timer and Counter in PLC.
3. Develop PLC Program to Control Traffic Light.
4. Develop PLC Program to Maintain the Pressure and Level in a Bottle Filling System.
5. Develop Ladder Diagram Program in PLC For Material Filling, Object Shorting,
Orientation Check and Material Property Check.
6. Develop the Ladder Diagram Program in PLC for Material Handling, Delaying
Conveyor, Feeding, Pick and Place Operation.
7. Sensor and Actuator Interfacing in PLC and PLC to PLC Communication.
Any 6 Experiments
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course, the students will be able to;
CO1: Design and simulate the fluid power circuits.
CO2: Test the simulated output by constructing the fluid power circuits using suitable actuators
and valves.
CO3: Practice the PLC programming, Interfacing with IO and establish the communication
between stations.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
RA3601 ROBOT DYNAMICS AND CONTROL LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To learn and understand generalized co-ordinates, Jacobian matrix Mass Distribution and
other fundamental equations.
2. To understand Lagrangean and Hamiltonian mechanics
3. To understand nonlinearities in control system
4. To Understand various force control strategies
5. to understand various concepts in linearizing a no linear signal

UNIT - I ROBOT FORCE MODELS 9

Generalized co-ordinates - Generalized Forces - Equation of Motions – Static Forces in Manipulators
- Jacobian matrix - Jacobians in The Force Domain - Cartesian Transformation of Velocities and
Static Forces - Acceleration of A Rigid Body - Mass Distribution – Nonrigid Body Effects - Newton's
Equation - Euler's Equation – Langrage Equation

UNIT - II ROBOT DYNAMICS 9

General Expressions for Kinetic and Potential Energy - Kinetic Energy for an n-Link Robot - Potential
Energy for an n-Link Robot - Equations of Motion -Lagrangian Multiplier - Langrage’s Equation -
Hamilton Equation - Hamilton vector Field- Euler - Langrage Equation – State Vector and Equation
Formulation

UNIT - III ROBOT CONTROL SYSTEM 9

The manipulator control problem, Linear second-order model of manipulator. Functions of controller
and power amplifier. Joint actuators- stepper motor, servo motor. Control Schemes: PID control
scheme – Position and force control schemes. Robotic sensors and its classification, Internal
sensors – Position, velocity, acceleration and force information, External Sensors – Contact
sensors-Limit switches, piezoelectric, pressure pads, Non-contact sensors – Range sensors, Vision
sensor- robotic vision system, Description of components of vision system.
UNIT - IV CONTROL OF MANIPULATORS 9
Linear Time Varying and Linearization – Input and Output Stability - Background: The Frobenius
Theorem - Single-Input Systems. Introduction to nonlinear system – time varying systems - multi-
input, multi-output control systems - the control problem for manipulators - practical considerations
- current industrial-robot control systems - Lyapunov stability analysis – Cartesian - based control
systems - adaptive control - Limit Cycle - Describing Function

UNIT - V FORCE CONTROL 9

Constrained Dynamics - Static Force/Torque Relationships - Constraint Surfaces - Natural and
Artificial Constraints - Network Models and Impedance - Impedance Operators - Classification of
Impedance Operators - Force Control Strategies - Impedance Control - Hybrid Impedance Control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
CO1. Describe generalized co-ordinates, Jacobian matrix Mass Distribution and equation of motion.
CO2. Develop the static force model and inverse dynamic model of multi-degree of freedom
(DOF) manipulator. Evaluate dynamics of robot using Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics.
CO3. Describe the control architecture of robot manipulator.
CO4. Evaluate linear and nonlinearities in dynamics of robot.
CO5. Develop the control strategies for robot system
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark W. Spong, Seth Hutchinson, M. Vidyasagar.
2. John J. Craig, "Introduction to Robotics – Mechanics and control”, 3rd edition, Prentice
hall, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Groover,M.P., Weis,M., Nagel,R.N. and Odrey,N.G., “Industrial Robotics Technology,
Programming and Applications”, McGraw-Hill, Int., 1986.
2. K.S.Fu, Gonzalez, R.C. and Lee, C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence”, McGraw Hill, 1987.
3. Saeed B. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Control, Applications”, 2nd edition,
John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2011
4. Klafter,R.D., Chmielewski, T.A. and Negin,M., “Robotics Engineering – An Integrated
Approach”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1984.
RA3611 ROBOT KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To model and simulate a robot and verify its kinematics
2. To model and simulate a robot and generate a trajectory plan.
3. To model and simulate a robot and verify its dynamics
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of Forward Kinematics for 2R, 2P and RP Robot.
2. Verification of D-H transformation for 6DOF Serial manipulator
3. Verification of Inverse Kinematics for 2R, 2P and RP Robot.
4. Verification of Forward Kinematics for 3R spatial Robot.
5. Kinematic Analysis of 2R planar robot for varying trajectories using Robo analyzer
6. Workspace Analysis of 2R planar robot manipulator for a specified trajectory
7. Kinematic Analysis of 6 DOF robot for varying trajectories using Robo analyzer
8. Inverse Dynamic Analysis of 6 DOF robot robot for varying trajectories using
Roboanalyzer
9. Forward and Inverse Dynamics of 2R planar robot using Roboanalyzer
10. Creation of Robot in ROS using Gazebo/V-REP
11. Motion Simulation of Robot in ROS using Gazebo/V-REP/Moveit/Industrial.
12. Simulation of Trajectory Analysis of 2R and 3R manipulators using MATLAB-
SIMULINK
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analyze the kinematics and dynamics for various robots
CO2: Simulate and evaluate the kinematics and dynamics for various robots
CO3: Create a robot and program a trajectory plan for the robot.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
RA3701 ROBOT VISION AND INTELLIGENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics concepts of optics and vision systems.
2. To learn and understand the fundamentals of image processing
3. To impart knowledge on object recognition and feature extraction.
4. To understand algorithms in image processing.
5. To demonstrate the various applications of machine vision system.

UNIT I IMAGE ACQUISITION 9

The Nature of Vision- Robot vision – Need, Applications - image acquisition – Physics of Light –
Interactions of light – Refraction at a spherical surface – Thin Lens Equation - Illumination
techniques - linear scan sensor, planar sensor, camera transfer characteristic, Raster scan,
Image capture time, volume sensors, Image representation, picture coding techniques.

UNIT II IMAGE PROCESSING FUNDAMENTALS 9

Introduction to Digital Image Processing - Image sampling and quantization - Image
enhancement: Gray Value Transformations, Radiometric Calibration, Image Smoothing–
Geometric transformation– Image segmentation– Object Recognition and Image Understanding
- Feature extraction: Region Features, Gray Value Features, Contour Features–Morphology–
Edge extraction– Fitting and Template matching.

UNIT III OBJECT RECOGNITION AND FEATURE EXTRACTION 9

Image segmentation- Edge Linking-Boundary detection-Region growing-Region splitting and
merging- Boundary Descriptors-Freeman chain code-Regional Descriptors- recognition-
structural methods- Recognition procedure, mahalanobic procedure

UNIT IV COLLISON FRONTS ALGORITHM 9

Introduction, skeleton of objects. Gradients, propagation, Definitions, propagation algorithm,
Thinning Algorithm, Skeleton lengths of Top most objects.

UNIT V ROBOT VISION APPLICATION 9

Case study-Automated Navigation guidance by vision system – vision based de palletizing- line
tracking-. Automatic part Recognition. Image processing techniques implementation through
Image Processing software

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO 1: Know the various types of sensors, lightings, hardware and concept of machine vision.
CO 2: Acquire the image by the appropriate use of sensors, lightings and hardware.
CO 3: Apply the various techniques of image processing in real time applications.
CO 4: Select the suitable sensors, lightings and hardware.
CO 5: Apply the vision techniques in Robot vision system.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rafael C. Gonzales, Richard. E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing Publishers”, Fourth
Edition
2. EmanueleTrucco, Alessandro Verri, “Introductory Techniques For 3D Computer Vision”,
First Edition

REFERENCES
1. Yi Ma, Jana Kosecka, Stefano Soatto, Shankar Sastry, “An Invitation to 3-D Vision From
Images to Models”, First Edition, 2004
2. Fu .K.S, Gonzalez .R.S, Lee .C.S.G, “Robotics – Control Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
3. RafelC.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods,StevenL.Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using
MATLAB”, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
RA3702 MOBILE ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
2. To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
3. To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
4. To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
5. To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and intelligence.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 6

Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots –
Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues –
Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles – Teleportation and Control.

UNIT – II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot Constraints
– Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees of Freedom – Path
and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots – Open Loop and Feedback
Motion Control – Humanoid Robot - Kinematics Overview.

UNIT – III PERCEPTION 9

Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor
Sensors – Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed Sensors –
Vision Based Sensors – Uncertainty - Statistical Representation - Error Propagation - Feature
Extraction Based on Range Data (Laser, Ultrasonic, Vision-Based Ranging) - Visual Appearance
based Feature Extraction.

UNIT – IV LOCALIZATION 12
The Challenge of Localization - Sensor Noise and Aliasing - Effector Noise – Localization Based
Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Belief Representation – Single - Hypothesis Belief And
Multiple-Hypothesis Belief - Map Representation - Continuous Representations - Decomposition
Strategies - Current Challenges In Map Representation - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization -
Markov Localization - Kalman Filter Localization - Landmark-Based Navigation - Globally Unique
Localization - Positioning Beacon Systems - Route-Based Localization - Autonomous Map Building
- Stochastic Map Technique - Other Mapping Techniques. Simultaneous Localization and Mapping
(SLAM).

UNIT – V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9

Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Modularity for Code Reuse and Sharing - Control
Localization - Techniques for Decomposition - Case Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm
Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2:Analyze the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics
CO3: Evaluate the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence fordesired
applications.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOK
1. Roland Siegwart and IllahR.Nourbakish, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015.
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.
5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea,
Air, and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.
RA3711 ROBOTIC VISION AND INTELLIGENCE L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To understand various lighting techniques, design and image acquisition of machine
vision system.
2. To practice Feature Extraction, Image pre-processing and pattern recognition.
3. To apply machine learning technique to classification and object detection.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study on different kinds of vision sensors and lighting techniques for machine vision
2. Study on Design of Machine Vision System.
3. Experimentation on image acquisition towards the computation platform.
4. Pre-processing techniques in image processing
5. Edge detection and region of interest extraction.
6. Experimentation with image processing algorithm for feature extraction.
7. Experimentation with pattern recognition.
8. Vision based image classification using Machine Learning Techniques.
9. Vision based Object detection using Machine Learning Techniques.
10. Experimentation for Stereo vision.
11. Robot assisted image acquisition.
12. Vision based defect identification
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completing this course Students able to
1. Select appropriate lighting techniques and image acquisition device for robot vision
system.
2. Apply Feature Extraction, Image pre-processing and pattern recognition algorithm in real
time robot.
3. Create a machine learning technique to classification and object detection.
CRA331 ROBOTS AND SYSTEMS IN SMART L T P C
MANUFACTURING 3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To get a knowledge of working on Industrial robots and their load handling capacity
2. To enlist with an application of robots in various operation
3. To familiar with a material handling system
4. To impart the knowledge on robotic welding
5. To obtain the knowledge on various type of robot welding operation
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 7
Types of industrial robots - Load handling capacity - general considerations in Robotic material
handling-material transfer - machine loading and unloading - CNC machine tool loading - Robot
centered cell

UNIT – II SELECTION OF ROBOTS AND OTHER APPLICATIONS 9

Factors influencing the choice of a robot - robot performance testing - economics of robotisation
- Impact of robot on industry and society. Application of Robots in continuous arc welding - Spot
welding - Spray painting -assembly operation - cleaning - robot for underwater applications.

UNIT – III MATERIAL HANDLING 13

concepts of material handling - principles and considerations in material handling systems design
- conventional material handling systems - industrial trucks - monorails - rail guided vehicles -
conveyor systems -cranes and hoists - advanced material handling systems - automated guided
vehicle systems - automated storage and retrieval systems(ASRS) - bar code technology - radio
frequency identification technology -Introduction to Automation Plant design software.
UNIT – IV ROBOTIC WELDING 8
Robotic welding system, Programmable and flexible control facility –Introduction-Types- Flex
Pendant-Lead through programming, Operating mode of robot, Jogging-Types, programming for
robotic welding, Welding simulation, Welding sequences, Profile welding

UNIT – V APPLICATIONS OF ROBOTS IN WELDING AND ALLIED PROCESSES 8

Application of robot in manufacturing: Exploration of practical application of robots in welding:
Robots for car body’s welding, robots for box fabrication, robots for microelectronic welding and
soldering – Applications in nuclear, aerospace and ship building, case studies for simple and
complex applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The Student must be able to
CO 1: Recognize various concepts of Industrial Robot.
CO 2: Select the appropriate manufacturing procedure for Robots
CO 3: Apply various manufacturing process in Robot manufacturing.
CO 4: Learn about the Welding operation and also related to Programming
CO 5: Produce a manufacturing plan for developing a robot
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Richard D Klafter, Thomas Achmielewski, MickaelNegin , "Robotic Engineering – An
integrated Approach", Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Mikell P Groover , "Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing", Pearson Education, New York, 2019.
3. Pires J N, Loureiro A, Bolmsjo G, "Welding Robots: Technology, System Issues and
Application", Springer, London, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Parmar R S , "Welding Processes and Technology", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2013.
2. John A. piotrowski, William T. Randolph , "Robotic welding: A Guide to Selection and
Application, Welding Division, Robotics International of SME", Publications Development
Dept., Marketing Division, 1987.
3. Mikell P Groover, Mitchel Weiss, Roger N Nagel, N.G.Odrey, AshishDutta , "Industrial
Robotics (SIE): Technology, Programming and Applications", 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
Education India Pvt Ltd, 2012.
4. YoramKoren , "Robotics for Engineers", McGraw-Hill, 1987.

CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics of drone concepts
2. To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
3. To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
4. To know about the various applications of drone
5. To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of
drones based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone
business through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and
employability

UNIT – II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9

Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the
parts -Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of
autonomy- Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -
Install program on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi
connection.

UNIT – III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment-
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity -
Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications

UNIT – IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering
mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines
and power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing
UNIT – V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9
The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO4: Createthe programs for various drones

CO-PO MAPPING:
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc,
2016

REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and
ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for
Security and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.
CRA333 MICROROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To expose students to the fundamental aspects of the emerging field of micro robotics.
2. To expose students to micro scale, technologies for fabricating small devices, bio-inspired
design, and applications of the field.
3. To expose students to various Mathematical formalism for flexures, Electrostatic actuators,
Piezo-electric actuators, Magneto-strictive actuator and other sensors.
4. To apply micro robotics to various applications
5. To engage students in implementation of microrobotics

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MICROROBOTICS 9

Introduction to Micro robotics -MST (Micro System Technology) - Micromachining - Working
principles of Microsystems Applications of Microsystems - Micro-fabrication principles-Design
selection criteria for micromachining - Packaging and Integration aspects - Micro-assembly
platforms and manipulators

UNIT – II SCALING LAWS AND MATERIALS FOR MEMS 9

Introduction - Scaling laws - Scaling effect on physical properties scaling effects on Electrical
properties - scaling effect on physical forces - Physics of Adhesion - Silicon - compatible material
system - Shape memory alloys - Material properties - Piezoresistivity, Piezoelectricity and
Thermoelectricity

UNIT – III FLEXURES, ACTUATORS AND SENSORS 9

Elemental flexures - Flexure systems - Mathematical formalism for flexures - Electrostatic
actuators - Piezo-electric actuators - Magneto-strictive actuators - Electromagnetic sensors -
Optical-based displacement sensors - Motion tracking with microscopes

UNIT – IV MICROROBOTICS 9
Introduction - Task specific definition of micro-robots - Size and Fabrication Technology based
definition of micro- robots - Mobility and Functional-based definition of micro-robots - Applications
for MEMS based micro-robots.

UNIT – V IMPLEMENTATION OF MICROROBOTS 9

Arrayed actuator principles for micro-robotic applications - Micro-robotic actuators - Design of
locomotive micro-robot devices based on arrayed actuators - Micro-robotics devices - Micro-
grippers and other micro-tools - Micro-conveyors - Walking MEMS Micro-robots - Multi-robot
system: Micro-robot powering, Micro-robot communication.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

The Student will be able to

CO1: Explain and apply the concepts of mass, energy, and momentum balance in microrobotics.
CO2: Apply adapt, and synthesize learned engineering skills to create microrobot.
CO3: Modelmicrorobots for different robotics applications
CO4: Formulate the specifications and design of mechatronic systems.
CO5: Program the Microrobot for different robotics applications
CO PO MAPPING:
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak , "The MEMS Handbook", 2nd Edition, CRC Press, New York, 2019.
2. Yves Bellouard, "Microrobotics Methods and Applications", CRC Press,
Massachusetts, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. NadimMaluf and KirtWilliams, "An Introduction to Microelectromechanical systems
Engineering", 2nd edition, Artech House, 2004.
2. Julian W Gardner, "Microsensors: Principles and Applications", 2nd edition, Wiley,
2007.
3. MetinSitti, "Mobile Microrobotics", MIT Press, 2017.
4. Nicolas Chaillet, Stephane Rangier "Microrobotics for Micromanipulation", John
Wiley & Sons, 2013.
CRA334 AGRICULTURAL ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn about Farming related Machines.
2. To understand the global position and information system in machines.
3. To know about traction and testing
4. To familiarize the concept on weed management
5. To learn about machinery selection.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
History of Mechanized Agriculture - Farming Operations and Related Machines - Tillage, Planting
Cultivation, and Harvesting, Agricultural Automation - Agricultural Vehicle Robot.

UNIT – II PRECISION AGRICULTURE 9

Sensors – types and agricultural applications, Global Positioning System (GPS) - GPS for civilian
use, Differential GPS, Carrier-phase GPS, Real-time kinematic GPS, Military GPS, Geographic
Information System, Variable Rate Applications and Controller Area Networks

UNIT – III TRACTION AND TESTING 9

Hitching- Principles of hitching, Types of hitches, Hitching and weight transfer, Control of hitches,
Tires and Traction models, Traction predictor spread sheet, Soil Compaction, Traction Aids,
Tractor Testing.

UNIT – IV SOIL TILLAGE AND WEED MANAGEMENT 9

Tillage Methods and Equipment, Mechanics of Tillage Tools, Performance of Tillage Implements,
Hitching of Tillage Implements, Weed Management - Conventional Cropping Systems, Tools,
Crop Rotation, Mechanical Cultivation

UNIT – V MACHINERY SELECTION 9

Screw Conveyors, Pneumatic Conveyors, Bucket Elevators, Forage Blowers and Miscellaneous
Conveyors, Machinery Selection - Field Capacity and Efficiency, Draft and Power Requirements,
Machinery Costs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
The Student will be able to
CO 1: Recognize the areas in agricultural process where robotics can be applied.
CO 2: Integrate sensor and system for a required specificprocess in agricultural applications.
CO 3: Apply Mechanics to the design various robot parameters
CO 4: Convert various mechanisms into robot by providing actuation at specific links and joints
of the mechanism.
CO 5: Develop suitable robotic system for specific agricultural tasks.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3
CO2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3
CO3 1 2 3 2 1 2 3
CO4 1 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO5 1 2 3 2 1 2 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 2.2 1.4 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ajit K. Srivastava, Carroll E. Goering, Roger P. Rohrbach, Dennis R. Buckmaster,
"Engineering Principles of Agricultural Machines", ASABE Publication, 2012.
2. Myer Kutz , "Handbook of Farm, Dairy and Food Machinery Engineering", Academic
Press, 2019.

REFERNCE BOOKS:
1. Qin Zhang, Francis J. Pierce, "Agricultural Automation Fundamentals and Practices",
CRC Press, 2016.
2. Stephen L Young, Francis J. Pierce, "Automation: The Future of Weed Control in
Cropping Systems", Springer, Dordrecht Heidelberg New York London, 2014.
3. R.A. Kepner, Roy Bainer, E.L. Barger, "Principles of Farm Machinery", 3rd Edition,
CBS Publishers, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Guangnan Chen, "Advances in Agricultural Machinery and Technologies", 1st Edition,
CRC Press, 2021.
CRA335 COLLABORATIVE ROBOTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To know the fundamentals of Collaborative Robotics
2. To introduce Swarm robot and trajectory planning for Swarm
3. To introduce Modular Robotics and its Mechanics
4. To learn about various Natural models of robot collaboration
5. To introduce the concept of Reconfigurable robot

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO COBOTICS 9

Collaborative Robotics- Properties - Introduction to Modern Mobile Robots: Swarm Robots,
Cooperative and Collaborative Robots, Mobile Robot Manipulators-Current Challenges.

UNIT – II SWARM ROBOTICS 9

Introduction, mapping, kinematics and trajectory error compensation, state transitions, collective
decision making and methodologies, swarm robot scenarios-aggregation, clustering dispersion,
pattern formation, sorting, flocking and collective motion, shepherding, heterogeneous swarms,
Error Detection and Security.

UNIT – III MODULAR ROBOTICS 9

Module Designs - Modular Robot Representation -Modular Serial Robot Kinematics - Kinematic
Calibration for Modular Serial Robots- Modular Serial Robot Dynamics - Modular Parallel Robot
Kinematics

UNIT – IV NATURALLY INSPIRED COLLABORATION 9

Collective Decision-Making. Group Decision Making in Animals, Collective Motion as Decision
Process, Models for Collective Decision-Making Processes, Urn Models, Voter Model ,Majority
Rule , Hegselmann and Krause , Kuramoto Model , Axelrod Model, Ising Model, Fiber Bundle
Model, Sznajd Model, Bass Diffusion Model, Sociophysics and Contrarians .

UNIT – V RECONFIGURABLE ROBOTS 9

V-Shaped Formation Control for Robotic Swarms Constrained by Field of View – formation of
reconfigurable virtual linkage - Reconfigurable Formation Control of Multi-Agents - Self-Assembly
Modular Robot Platform Based on Sambot - Swarm Dynamics Emerging from Asymmetry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize the fundamentals of Collaborative Robotics
CO2: Apply Swarm robots technology in real time applications
CO3: Analyze and select the suitable concept of Modular Robotics and its Mechanics for
modelling a collaborative robot
CO4: Create various Natural models for robot collaboration
CO5: Develop collaborative robots for various requirement in industrial tasks.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2
CO5 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO/PO & 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1.2
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS
1. Guilin Yang, I-Ming Chen, “Modular Robots: Theory and Practice”, Springer, 2022.
2. Giandomenico Spezzano, “Swarm Robotics”, Applied Sciences, MDPI, 2019.
REFERENCES
1. Heiko Hamann, “Collective Decision-Making in Swarm Robotics: A Formal Approach”,
Springer, 2019.
CRA336 ROBOT OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce ROS and programming
2. To develop the Robot environment
3. To obtain the simulation robots in ROS with GAZEBO
4. To simulate robots with V-Rep
5. To understand mapping, navigation and motion planning ROS with Move-it

UNIT – I ROS ESSENTIALS 9

Introduction to ROS- Advantages and Disadvantages of ROS - ROS Framework- ROS package
C++, Python – ROS computation Graph – nodes, Messages, topics, services, bags, ROS
Master- ROS Community- Basic programming and Syntax overview in C++ and Python – start
with ROS programming - Creating Environment - Services-Actions and Nodes- Simple
Interaction with the Simulation environment

UNIT – II BUILD YOUR OWN ROBOT ENVIRONMENT 9

CAD Tools for Robot Modelling – ROS Packages for robot modelling – Unified Robot Description
Format and Tags- Kinematics and Dynamics Library – Create URDF Model - Robot Modelling
using Unified Robot Description Format (URDF),-ROS parameter server and adding real-world
object representations to the simulation environment _ Create Robot description using 7 DOF:
joint number, name, type and angle limits – Xacro – Rviz – viewing of 7 DOF arm – creation of
wheeled robot

UNIT – III SIMULATION ROBOTS IN ROS WITH GAZEBO 9

Robot simulation - Gazebo –create simulation model at Gazebo- Adding colors, textures,
transmission tags, 3D vision sensor to Gazebo- Moving robot joints using ROS controllers- ROS
controller interacts with Gazebo, interfacing state controller, simulation of moving the robot joints
– simulation of differential wheeled robot in Gazebo.

UNIT – IV ROS WITH VREP 9

V-REP is a multi-platform robotic simulator - Simulating the robotic arm using V-REP - Adding the
ROS interface to V-REP joint - Simulating a differential wheeled robot, Adding a laser sensor , 3D
vision sensor

UNIT – V MAPPING, NAVIGATION AND MOTION PLANNINGROS WITH MOVEIT 9

Move it Instattion - Generating the Self-Collision matrix .virtual joints, planning groups, robot poses,
robot end effector - MoveIt Architecture Diagram - Trajectory from RViz GUI executing in Gazebo
- Planning scene overview diagram- Collision Checking - Motion Planning, Pick and Place
Behaviors using Industrial Robots with ROS Moveit – ROS with MATLAB - ROS with Industrial

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize the concept of ROS and programming.
CO2: Evaluate various robot algorithms in ROS programming
CO3: Deploy mapping, navigation and motion planning ROS with Move-it.
CO4:Simulate robots in ROS with GAZEBO and V-REP
CO5: Program a Robot using ROS and its tool boxes

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos&PSO POs PSOs
s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO4 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
 CO5 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO/PO & PSO 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Lentin Joseph, Jonathan Cacace, “Mastering ROS for Robotics Programming”, Second
Edition, Packt Publishing, 2018.

REFERENCES
1. Lentin Joseph, Aleena Johny, “Robot Operating System (ROS) for Absolute Beginners
Robotics Programming Made Easy”, Second Edition, Apress, 2022.
2. Lentin Joseph, “ROS Robotics Projects”, Packt publishing, 2017
CRA337 MEDICAL ROBOTICS LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Identify and describe different types of medical robots and their potential applications.
2. Know basic concepts in kinematics, Dynamics, and control relevant to Medical Robotics.
3. Develop the Analytical and Experimental skills necessary to Design and Implement robotic
assistance for both minimally invasive surgery and Image guided interventions.
4. Be familiar with the state of the art in applied medical robotics and medical robotics research.
5. Understand the various roles that robotics can play in healthcare.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Types of medical robots - Navigation - Motion Replication - Imaging - Rehabilitation and Prosthetics
– Stateof art of robotics in the field of healthcare-DICOM

UNIT – II LOCALIZATION AND TRACKING 9

Position sensors requirements - Tracking - Mechanical linkages - Optical – Sound based -
Electromagnetic - Impedance-based - In-bore MRI tracking-Video matching - Fiber optic tracking
systems - Hybrid systems.

UNIT – III DESIGN OF MEDICAL ROBOTS 9

Characterization of gestures to the design of robots - Design methodologies - Technological choices
- Security.

UNIT – IV SURGICAL ROBOTICS 9

Minimally invasive surgery and robotic integration - surgical robotic sub systems - synergistic control
- Control Modes - Radiosurgery - Orthopedic Surgery - Urologic Surgery and Robotic Imaging -
Cardiac Surgery – Neurosurgery - case studies

UNIT – V ROBOTS I REHABILITATION AND MEDICAL CARE 9

Rehabilitation for Limbs - Brain-Machine Interfaces - Steerable Needles - Assistive robots - Robots
in Physiotherapy - case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Identify various medical robots and their potential applications.
CO 2: Recognize the position tracking and hybrid systems.
CO 3: Apply Robotics and its concepts in Medical field
CO 4: Simulate a MIS procedure and be aware of the state of art in surgical and oncology robotics.
CO 5: Design a medical robotic system given the specific requirements for Rehabilitation and
Medical care.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos&PSOs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Achim Ernst Floris Schweikard, "Medical Robotics", Springer, 2016.
2. Paula Gomes, "Medical robotics Minimally invasive surgery", Woodhead, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Jaydev P Desai, Rajni V Patel, Antoine Ferreira; Sunil Kumar Agrawal, "The
2. Encyclopedia of Medical Robotics", World Scientific Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd, 2019.
3. Jocelyne Troccaz , "Medical Robotics", John Wiley & Sons Incorporated, 2013.
4. Vanja Bonzovic , "Medical Robotics", I-tech Education publishing, Austria, 2008.
5. Farid Gharagozloo "Robotic Surgery", Springer, 2022.

CRA338 HUMANOID ROBOTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To know the basic knowledge about Humanoid robots.
2. To impart knowledge in kinematics of humanoids.
3. To learn about the dynamics in humanoid robots.
4. To understand the basic in biped walking.
5. To know about the different walking patterns.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical development of Humanoids, Human Likeness of a Humanoid Robot, Trade-Offs in
Humanoid Robot Design, Human-Friendly Humanoid Robot Design, characteristics of humanoid
robots.

UNIT – II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic structure, forward and inverse kinematic problems, differential kinematics, Twist,
Spatial Velocity, and Spatial Transform, Inverse Differential Kinematic Relations. Differential
kinematics at singular configurations- Gait Analysis

UNIT – III ZMP AND DYNAMICS 9

ZMP Overview,2D Analysis,3D Analysis, Measurement of ZMP, General Discussion- ZMP of
Each Foot, ZMP for Both Feet Contact, Dynamics of Humanoid Robots, Humanoid Robot Motion
and Ground Reaction Force , Momentum, Angular Momentum, Angular Momentum and Inertia
Tensor of Rigid Body, Calculation of Robot’s Center of Mass, Link Speed and Angular Velocity,
Calculation of Robot’s Momentum and Angular Momentum

UNIT – IV BIPED WALKING 9

Two Dimensional Walking Pattern Generation, Two Dimensional Inverted Pendulum, Behavior
of Linear Inverted Pendulum, Orbital Energy, Support Leg Exchange, Planning a Simple Biped
Gait, Extension to a Walk on Uneven Terrain.

UNIT – V WALKING PATTERN GENERATION 9

ZMP Based Walking Pattern Generation, Cart-Table Model, Off-Line Walking Pattern
Generation,Stabilizer, Principles of Stabilizing Control, Stabilizing Control of Honda Humanoid
Robot, Advanced Stabilizers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Describe about the evolution of Humanoid robots
CO 2: Expose the basic knowledge in kinematics of humanoids.
CO 3: Calculate the Humanoid Robot Motion and Ground Reaction Force.
CO 4: Identify Two-Dimensional Walking pattern on different terrain.
CO 5: Create the Walking Pattern models.
CO PO MAPPING:
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos&PSOs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 1.6 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, “Humanoid Robots Modeling and Control”,
Butterworth Heinemann, 2019
2. Shuuji K, Hirohisa H, Kensuke H, Kazuhito, Springer-Verlag GmbH ”Introduction to
Humanoid Robotics”, Springer, London, 2014.
3. Goswami Ambarish, Vadakkepat Prahlad, "Humanoid Robotics: A Reference", Springer,
2019.
4. J. Craig, "Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control", Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2022

REFERNCES:
1. A. Goswami, P. Vadakkepat (Eds.), “Humanoid Robotics: A Reference”, Springer,
Netherlands, Dordrecht, 2018
2. J K. Harada, E. Yoshida, K. Yokoi (Eds.), “Motion Planning for Humanoid Robots”,
Springer, London, 2010.
3. Lorenzo Sciavicco and Bruno Siciliano, "Modelling and Control of Robot
Manipulators", second edition, Springer, 2000.
4. Jean-Claude Latombe, "Robot Motion Planning", Kluwer Academy Publishers, 2004.
CRA339 ROBOT AND MACHINE ELEMENTS DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Designing machine members subjected to static and variable loads.
2. Designing flexible elements like belts, ropes, and chain drives for engineering
applications.
3. Designing shafts and threaded fasteners for various applications.
4. Designing and selecting bearings and robot grippers.
5. Designing gears and gearbox for machine tools and applications.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS IN DESIGN 7

Introduction to Robots - factors influencing robot design, selection of materials based on
mechanical properties - Modes of failure -Factor of safety – stresses due to bending and torsion
moment - Eccentric loading, Design against fluctuating loads - theories of failures.

UNIT II DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS AND BEARINGS 9

Introduction to flexible elements, Design of belt drives – Flat, Vee, and Timing Belts, Design of
chain drives - Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings - Hydrodynamic journal bearings,
Somerfield Number, Raimondi & Boyd graphs - Selection of Rolling Contact bearings.

UNIT III DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND THREADED FASTENERS 9

Shafts and Axles - Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity, and critical
speed - Keys and splines, Threaded fasteners - Bolted joints – Simple and eccentrically loaded
bolted joints.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF GEARS AND GEAR BOXES 8

Design of Gears (Spur, Helical and Bevel) - Geometric progression - Standard step ratio - Ray
diagram, kinematic layout - Design of sliding mesh gear box - Design of multi speed gear box
for machine tool applications.

UNIT V DESIGN OF ROBOT GRIPPERS AND END EFFECTORS 12

Types of End Effectors and Gripper Mechanisms, Force analysis, Miniature Grippers and Micro
Grippers, Compliance, Selected case studies - Sheet metal handling, pretension of cuboid /
cylindrical / objects, coils, irregular surfaces and flexible objects, handling castings, and medical
applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize various parameters for belt, ropes, shafts, fasteners and chain drives and other
machine members
CO2: Analyze the belt, ropes, shafts, fasteners and chain drives and other machine members
subjected to static and dynamic loads.
CO3: Evaluatethe belt, ropes, shafts, fasteners and chain drives and other machine members
for various applications.
CO4: Create parameters for designing belt, ropes, shafts, fasteners and chain drives and other
machine members in manufacturing a robot.
CO5: Design various robot elements.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
Average 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari. V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 5th edition,
2020.
2. Joseph Edward Shigley, Charles R. Mischke, “Mechanical Engineering Design”,
McGraw Hill, 11th edition, 2020.
3. Gareth J.Monkman, Stefan Hesse, Ralf Steinmann, HenrikSchunk, “Robot Grippers”,
Wiley, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Sundararajamoorthy T. V, Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha Publications,
2015.
2. Robert L.Norton, “Machine Design – An Integrated Approach”, Prentice Hall
International Edition, 5th edition, 2018.
3. Sharma. C.S, Purohit. K.,”Design of Machine Elements”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2003.
4. Adam Morecki, JozeKnapczyk, “Basics of Robotics: Theory and Components of
Manipulators and Robots”, Springer, 1999.
5. Shimon Y. Nof, “Handbook of Industrial Robotics”, John Wiley & Sons, 1999.
6. “P.S.G.Design Data Hand Book”, PSG College of Tech Coimbatore.
7. Mikell P. Groover, "Industrial Robotics", McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2017.
CME341 DESIGN FOR X L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the economic process selection principles and general design principles
for manufacturability in the development and design of products for various engineering
applications. Also, apply design consideration principles of casting in the design of cast
products.
2 To learn the design consideration principles of forming in the design of extruded,
stamped, and forged products
3 To learn design consideration principles of machining in the design of turned, drilled,
milled, planed, shaped, slotted, and ground products.
4 To learn design consideration principles of welding in the design of welded products.
5 To learn design consideration principles in additive manufacturing

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
General design principles for manufacturability - strength and mechanical factors,
mechanisms selection, evaluation method, Process capability - Feature tolerances
GeometricTolerances - Assembly limits -Datum features - Tolerance stacks.
Design to minimize material usage – Design for disassembly – Design for recyclability – Design for
manufacture – Design for energy efficiency – Design to regulations and standards.

UNIT – II FACTORS INFLUENCING FORM DESIGN 9

Working principle, Material, Manufacture, Design- Possible solutions - Materials choice –Influence
of materials on form design - form design of welded members, forgings and castings.

UNIT – III COMPONENT DESIGN - MACHINING CONSIDERATION 9

Design features to facilitate machining - drills - milling cutters - keyways - Doweling procedures,
counter sunk screws - Reduction of machined area- simplification by separation - simplification by
amalgamation - Design for machinability - Design for economy - Design for clampability – Design
for accessibility - Design for assembly – Product design for manual assembly - Product design for
automatic assembly – Robotic assembly.

UNIT – IV COMPONENT DESIGN – CASTING CONSIDERATION 9

Redesign of castings based on Parting line considerations - Minimizing core requirements,
machined holes, redesign of cast members to obviate cores. Identification of uneconomical
design - Modifying the design - group technology - Computer Applications for DFMA

UNIT – V DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9

Introduction to AM, DFMA concepts and objectives, AM unique capabilities, exploring design
freedoms, Design tools for AM, Part Orientation, Removal of Supports, Hollowing out parts,
Inclusion of Undercuts and Other Manufacturing Constraining Features, Interlocking Features,
Reduction of Part Count in an Assembly, Identification of markings/ numbers.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Elaborate the design principles for manufacturability
2. discuss the factors influencing in form design
3. Apply the component design features of various machine.
4. Discuss the design consideration principles of welding in the design of welded
products.
5. Discuss the design consideration principles of additive manufacturing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. James G. Bralla, “Design for Manufacturability Handbook”, McGraw Hill Professional,
1998.
2. O. Molloy, E.A. Warman, S. Tilley, Design for Manufacturing and Assembly:
Concepts, Architectures and Implementation, Springer, 1998.
 REFERENCES:
1. CorradoPoli, Design for Manufacturing: A Structured Approach, Elsevier, 2001.
2. David M. Anderson, Design for Manufacturability & Concurrent Engineering: How to
Design for Low Cost, Design in High Quality, Design for Lean Manufacture, and Design
Quickly for Fast Production, CIM Press, 2004.
3. Erik Tempelman, Hugh Shercliff, Bruno Ninaber van Eyben, Manufacturing and Design:
Understanding the Principles of How Things Are Made, Elsevier, 2014.
4. Graedel T. Allen By. B, Design for the Environment Angle Wood Cliff, Prentice Hall.
Reason Pub., 1996.
5. Boothroyd, G, Heartz and Nike, Product Design for Manufacture, Marcel Dekker, 1994

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
4 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
5 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

CMR331 CNC MACHINE TOOLS AND PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Explain the mechanics of metal cutting and the factors affecting machinability
2. Explain the working of basic and advanced turning machines.
3. Teach the basics of machine tools with reciprocating and rotating motions and abrasive finishing
processes.
4. Explain the constructional features of CNC machine tools.
5. Explain the basics of CNC programming and the machine tools through planning, writing codes
and ,setting up CNC machine tools

UNIT I MECHANICS OF METAL CUTTING 9

Mechanics of chip formation, forces in machining, types of chip, cutting tools – Single point cutting
tool nomenclature, orthogonal and oblique metal cutting, thermal aspects, cutting tool materials, tool
wear, tool life, surface finish, cutting fluids and Machinability.

UNIT II TURNING MACHINES 9

Centre lathe, constructional features, specification, operations – taper turning methods, thread
cutting methods, special attachments, surface roughness in turning, machining time and power
estimation. Special lathes - Capstan and turret lathes - tool layout – automatic lathes: semi-
automatic – single spindle: Swiss type, automatic screw type – multi spindle

UNIT III RECIPROCATING MACHINE TOOLS 9

Reciprocating machine tools: shaper, planer, slotter: Types and operations- Hole making: Drilling,
reaming, boring, tapping, type of milling operations-attachments- types of milling cutters– machining
time calculation - Gear cutting, gear hobbing and gear shaping – gear finishing methods Abrasive
processes: grinding wheel – specifications and selection, types of grinding process – cylindrical
grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding, internal grinding - micro finishing methods

UNIT IV CNC MACHINES 9

Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tools, constructional details, special features – Drives,
Recirculating ball screws, tool changers; CNC Control systems – Open/closed, point-to-
point/continuous - Turning and machining centers - Work holding methods in Turning and machining
centers, Coolant systems, Safety features.
UNIT V PROGRAMMING OF CNC MACHINE TOOLS 9
Coordinates, axis and motion, Absolute vs Incremental, Interpolators, Polar coordinates, Program
planning, G and M codes, Manual part programming for CNC machining centers and Turning centers
– Fixed cycles, Loops and subroutines, Setting up a CNC machine for machining.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1 Analyse the mechanics of metal cutting process and to identify the factors involved in improving
machinability.
CO2 Understand the constructional features and working principles of basic and advanced turning
machines.
CO3 Evaluate and select suitable machining operation to manufacture a given component.
CO4 Understand the constructional features and working principles of CNC machine tools.
CO5 Program CNC machine tools through planning, writing codes and setting up CNC
machine tools to manufacture a given component.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO/PO & 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education 8th Edition,
2022.
2. Michael Fitzpatrick, “Machining and CNC Technology”, McGraw-Hill Education;4th edition, 2019.

REFERENCES:
1. Roy. A. Lindberg, “Processes and materials of manufacture”, Pearson India Education Services
Pvt. Ltd, 4th edition, 2015.
2. Geofrey Boothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools”, McGraw Hill, 1985.
3. Rao. P.N, “Manufacturing Technology Volume 2, Metal Cutting and Machine Tools”, McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 3rd edition, 2013.
4. Peter Smid, “CNC Programming Handbook”, Industrial Press Inc., 3rd edition, 2007.
5. A. B. Chattopadhyay, “Machining and Machine Tools”, Wiley, 2nd edition, 2017.
 ME3792 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To provide the overview of evolution of automation, CIM and its principles.
2 To learn the various Automation tools, include various material handling system.
3 To train students to apply group technology and FMS.
4 To familiarize the computer aided process planning in manufacturing.
5 To introduce to basics of data transaction, information integration and control of CIM.\

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to CAD, CAM, CAD/CAM and CIM - Evolution of CIM – CIM wheel and cycle –
Production concepts and mathematical models – Simple problems in production models – CIM
hardware and software – Major elements of CIM system – Three step process for implementation
of CIM – Computers in CIM – Computer networks for manufacturing – The future automated factory
– Management of CIM – safety aspects of CIM– advances in CIM

UNIT – II AUTOMATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 9

Automated production line – system configurations, work part transfer mechanisms – Fundamentals
of Automated assembly system – System configuration, Part delivery at workstations – Design for
automated assembly – Overview of material handling equipments – Consideration in material
handling system design – The 10 principles of Material handling. Conveyor systems – Types of
conveyors – Operations and features. Automated Guided Vehicle system – Types &applications –
Vehicle guidance technology – Vehicle management and safety. Storage system performance –
storage location strategies – Conventional storage methods and equipments – Automated
storage/Retrieval system and Carousel storage system Deadlocks in Automated manufacturing
systems – Petrinet models – Applications in Dead lock avoidance – smart manufacturing – Industry
4.0 - Digital manufacturing – Virtual manufacturing

UNIT – III GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND FMS 9

Part families – Visual – Parts classification and coding – Production flow analysis – Grouping of
parts and Machines by rank order clustering method – Benefits of GT – Case studies. FMS –
Components – workstations – FMS layout configurations – Computer control systems – FMS
planning and implementation issues – Architecture of FMS – flow chart showing various operations
in FMS – Machine cell design – Composite part concept, Holier method, Key machine concept –
Quantitative analysis of FMS – Bottleneck model – Simple and complicated problems – Extended
Bottleneck model - sizing the FMS ─ FMS applications, Benefits.

UNIT – IV PROCESS PLANNING 9

Process planning – Activities in process planning, Informations required. From design to process
planning – classification of manufacturing processes – Selection of primary manufacturing
processes – Sequencing of operations according to Anteriorities – various examples – forming of
Matrix of Anteriorities – case study. Typical process sheet – case studies in Manual process
planning. Computer Aided Process Planning – Process planning module and data base – Variant
process planning – Two stages in VPP – Generative process planning – Flow chart showing various
activities in generative PP – Semi generative process planning- Comparison of CAPP and Manual
PP.

UNIT – V PROCESS CONTROL AND DATA ANALYSIS 9

Introduction to process model formulation – linear feedback control systems – Optimal control –
Adaptive control –Sequence control and PLC& SCADA. Computer process control – Computer
process interface – Interface hardware – Computer process monitoring – Direct digital control and
Supervisory computer control - Overview of Automatic identification methods – Bar code technology
–Automatic data capture technologies.- Quality management (SPC) and automated inspection
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Discuss the basics of computer aided engineering.
 2. Choose appropriate automotive tools and material handling systems.
3. Discuss the overview of group technology, FMS and automation identification methods.
4. Design using computer aided process planning for manufacturing of various components
5. Acquire knowledge in computer process control techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shivanand H K, Benal M M and Koti V, Flexible Manufacturing System, New Age, 2016.
2. CIM: Computer Integrated Manufacturing: Computer Steered Industry Book by August-Wilhelm
Scheer

REFERENCES:
1. Alavudeen and Venkateshwaran, Computer Integrated Manufacturing‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2013.
2. Gideon Halevi and Ronald D. Weill, Principles of Process Planning‖, Chapman Hall, 1995.
3. James A. Retrg, Herry W. Kraebber, Computer Integrated Manufacturing‖, Pearson Education,
Asia,3rdEdition,2004.
4. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production system and Computer integrated Manufacturing,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 4thEdition, 2014.
5. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanian S and Raju V, CAD/CAM/CIM, New Age International
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2008.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
2 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
3 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
4 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
5 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
CMR332 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. The objective of this course is to teach the lean tools to attain optimum level in quality.
2. To enhance the ability to make decisions for new product development.
3. Aims to develop the students to conserve energy and natural resources, and to ensure that they
have minimal impact on the environment and society.
4. To give students an introduction to an advanced information process technique.
5. To learn about the various smart manufacturing techniques and applications.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO LEAN MANUFACTURING 9

Objectives of lean manufacturing-key principles and implications of lean manufacturing -traditional
Vs lean manufacturing- flow-continuous improvement/Kaizen –worker involvement- 5S principles
elements of JIT - uniform production rate - Kanban system - Lean implementation, Reconciling lean
with other systems - lean six sigma- lean and ERP - lean with ISO 9001:2000.

UNIT – II AGILE MANUFACTURING 9

Agile Manufacturing Vs Mass Manufacturing - Agile practice for product development -
Manufacturing agile practices - Implementing new technology - A checklist, technology applications
that enhance agility - agile technology make or buy decisions. - Costing for Agile Manufacturing
practices.

UNIT – III SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.

UNIT – IV INTELLIGENT MANUFACTURING 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.

UNIT – V SMART MANUFACTURING 9

Introduction to various Smart Manufacturing Techniques-Supply chain management-Block chain of
inventory management-Plant digitization-Predictive maintenance-Supply chain visibility-
Warehouse-Cost reduction-Waste management-Automated systems-Applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Demonstrate on basic lean manufacturing.
CO2: Integrate the knowledge on agile manufacturing.
CO3: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO4: Apply artificial intelligence (AI) and fuzzy techniques to improve the efficiency of
manufacturing systems.
CO5: Exposure to smart manufacturing and its various techniques.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - 2 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - 2 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - 2 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - 2 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
 CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - 2 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lonnie Wilson, “How to Implement Lean manufacturing”, McGraw-Hill Professional; 2nd
edition, 2015.
2. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016,
ISBN-13: 978-3319293042.
3. Kusiak, Andrew, “Intelligent Manufacturing Systems”, Prentice Hall, 1st edition, 1990.

REFERENCES:
1. Black .J.T. and Kohser R.A, “DeGarmo’s Materials and Processes in Manufacturing”,
Published by Wiley, 11th edition, 2011.
2. Christian N. Madu, “Handbook of environmentally conscious manufacturing”, Springer
US Publishers, 1st edition, 2001.
3. John Schey, “Introduction to Manufacturing Processes”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education ,3rd
edition,1999
4. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.
5. Rao R. V, “Advanced Modeling and Optimization of Manufacturing Processes”, 2nd
edition, 2006.
6. Ronald G. Askin and Jeffrey B. Goldberg, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production
Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
7. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United
States, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
CME339 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the development of Additive Manufacturing (AM), various business opportunities
and applications
 To familiarize various software tools, processes and techniques to create physical objects that
satisfy product development / prototyping requirements, using AM.
 To be acquainted with vat polymerization and direct energy deposition processes
 To be familiar with powder bed fusion and material extrusion processes.
 To gain knowledge on applications of binder jetting, material jetting and sheet lamination
processes

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain- ASTM/ISO
52900 Classification - Benefits. Applications: Building Printing - Bio Printing - Food Printing-
Electronics Printing. Business Opportunities and Future Directions – Case studies: Automobile,
Aerospace, Healthcare.

UNIT II DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING (DfAM) 6

Concepts and Objectives - AM Unique Capabilities - Part Consolidation – Topology Optimization-
Generative design - Lattice Structures - Multi-Material Parts and Graded Materials - Data
Processing: CAD Model Preparation - AM File formats: STL-Problems with STL- AMF Design for
Part Quality Improvement: Part Orientation - Support Structure - Slicing - Tool Path Generation –
Design rules for Extrusion based AM.

UNIT III VAT POLYMERIZATION AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 6

Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process – top down and
bottom up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) -
Process - Advantages - Applications. Continuous Liquid Interface Production (CLIP)Technology.
Directed Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS)- Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.

UNIT IV POWDER BED FUSION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 6

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials
- Process - Advantages and Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM)- Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.

UNIT V OTHER ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 6

Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits- Limitations -
Applications.
Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications.
Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding- Materials-Application and Limitation.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING LABORATORY
Experiments
1. Modelling and converting CAD models into STL file.
2. Manipulation and error fixing of STL file.
3. Design and fabrication of parts by varying part orientation and support structures.
4. Fabrication of parts with material extrusion AM process.
5. Fabrication of parts with vat polymerization AM process.
6. Design and fabrication of topology optimized parts.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
Equipment required - lab
1. Extrusion based AM machine
2. Resin based AM machine
3. Mechanical design software
4. Open-source AM software for STL editing, manipulation and slicing.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process of transforming a concept into the final product in AM
technology.
CO3: Elaborate the vat polymerization and direct energy deposition processes and its applications.
CO4: Acquire knowledge on process and applications of powder bed fusion and material extrusion.
CO5: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of binder jetting, material jetting and sheet
lamination processes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for Prototyping
and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-56990-582-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN :9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United States
,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.
CMR350 ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on wafer preparation and PCB fabrication
 To introduce Through Hole Technology (THT) and Surface Mount Technology (SMT) with
various types of electronic components
 To elaborate various steps in Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
 To be acquainted with various testing and inspection methods of populated PCBS
 To outline repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronic assemblies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING 9

History, definition, wafer preparation by growing, machining, and polishing, diffusion,
microlithography, etching and cleaning, Printed circuit board –fabrication, types, single sided,
double sided, multi-layer and flexible printed circuit board

UNIT II COMPONENTS AND PACKAGING 9

Introduction to packaging, types-Through hole technology(THT) and Surface mount technology
(SMT), Through hole components – axial, radial, multi leaded, odd form Surface-mount
components- active, passive. Interconnections - chip to lead interconnection, die bonding, wire
bonding, TAB, flip chip, chip on board, multi chip module, direct chip array module, leaded,
leadless, area array and embedded packaging, miniaturization and trends.

UNIT III SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY 9

SMT Process, SMT equipment and material handling systems, handling of components and
assemblies - moisture sensitivity and ESD, safety and precautions needed, IPC and other
standards, stencil printing process - solder paste material, storage and handling, stencils and
squeegees, process parameters, quality control. Component placement- equipment type, flexibility,
accuracy of placement, throughput, packaging of components for automated assembly, soldering-
wave soldering, reflow process, process parameters, profile generation and control, adhesive,
underfill and encapsulation process

UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING 9

Inspection techniques, equipment and principle- AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - stencil
printing process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, electrical testing of PCB
assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing, fixtures and jigs.

UNIT V REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS

ASSEMBLIES 9
Repair and rework of PCB- Coating removal, base board repair, conductor repair, thermo-
mechanical effects and thermal management, Reliability fundamentals, reliability testing, failure
analysis, design for manufacturability, assembly, reworkability, testing, reliability, and environment.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
 CO1: Perceive wafer preparation and PCB fabrication
 CO2: Recognize the importance of Through Hole Technology (THT) and Surface Mount
Technology (SMT)
 CO3: Demonstrate various steps in Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
 CO4: Identify various testing and inspection methods of populated PCBS
 CO5: Discuss various techniques in repair, rework, quality and reliability of electronics
Assemblies
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.6
2 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3
3 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
4 0.9 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
5 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Prasad R., “Surface Mount Technology – Principles and practice”,2nd Edition, Chapman and
Hall., New York, 1997, ISBN 0-41-12921-3.
2. Tummala R.R., “Fundamentals of microsystem packaging”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2001, ISBN 00-71-37169-9.

REFERENCES:
1. Harper C.A., “Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook” 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
Inc., New York, N.Y., 1997, ISBN 0-07-026694-8.
2. Lee N.C., “Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT, BGA, CSP and Flip Chip
Technologies”, Elsevier Science. United Kingdom, 2001.
3. Puligandla Viswanadham and Pratap Singh., “Failure Modes and Mechanisms in Electronic
Packages”, Chapman and Hall., New York, 1997, N.Y. ISBN 0-412-105591-8. Science and
Technology, United Kingdom, 1997, ISBN 0750698756.
4. Totta P., Puttlitz K. and Stalter K., “Area Array Interconnection Handbook”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, Norwell, MA, United States, 2001, ISBN 0-7923-7919-5.
5. Zarrow P. and Kopp D., “Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts”, Elsevier, 1997.
CMR333 COMPUTER AIDED INSPECTION AND TESTING LT PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To familiar the measurement standards and to know the instruments used and various errors in
measurements
2. To recognize the use of basic and advanced instruments for measurements.
3. To learn the applications of opto-electronics device for measurements.
4. To describe the various measurement techniques using laser metrology.
5. To gain knowledge on computer aided inspection and advances in metrology.

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS AND CONCEPTS IN METROLOGY 9

Standards of Measurement – Analog and Digital Measuring Instruments - Comparators – Limits, Fits
and Tolerances – Gauge Design –Surface Roughness – Form Errors and Measurements.

UNIT – II INSPECTION AND GENERAL MEASUREMENTS 9

Linear Measuring Instruments – Evolution – Types – Classification – Limit Gauges – Gauge Design
– Terminology – Procedure – Concepts of Interchange Ability and Selective Assembly – Angular
Measuring Instruments – Types – Bevel Protractor Clinometers Angle Gauges, Spirit Levels Sine
Bar – Angle Alignment Telescope – Autocollimator – Applications - Inspection of Gears And Threads
– Tool Makers’ Microscope – Universal Measuring Machine.

UNIT – III OPTO ELECTRONICS IN ENGINEERING INSPECTION 9

Use of Optoelectronics in Tool Wear Measurements – Microhole Measurement and Surface
Roughness – Applications in In-Process Measurement and On-Line Inspection.

UNIT – IV LASER METROLOGY 9

Precision instrument based on Laser - Use of Lasers - Principle –Interferometers, Interference
microscope -Optical flats - Laser Interferometer - Application in Linear and Angular measurements
- Testing of machine tools using Laser Interferometer. Use of Laser Interferometer in Machine Tool
Inspection – Uses of Laser in On-Line Inspection – Laser Micrometer – Laser Alignment Telescope.

UNIT – V COMPUTER AIDED INSPECTION AND ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 9

Co-ordinate Measuring Machines - Constructional features - Types - Applications of CMM - CNC
CMM applications - Measurement arms, Laser tracker - Fundamentals of Computer Aided
Inspection - Introduction to Nano metrology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Practice the standards in measurements and to avoid the various forms of errors in
measurements.
CO2: Use of basic and advanced metrology instruments for measurements.
CO3: Acquire the knowledge on non-contact opto-electronics device for measurements.
CO4: Describe various measurement techniques using laser metrology.
CO5: Recognize the computer aided inspection and advances in metrology.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
Average 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3

1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

 TEXT BOOKS
1. Anil. K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
2. Alan S. Morris, “The Essence of Measurement”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
3. Beckwith, Marangoni, Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education, 2014.

REFERENCES
1. Charles Reginald Shotbolt, “Metrology for Engineers”, Cengage Learning EMEA,5 th
edition, 1996.
2. Jain R.K., “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 2012.
3. Robert G. Seippel, “Opto-Electronics for Technology and Engineering”, Prentice Hall,
1989.
4. Robert J. Hocken, Paulo H. “Coordinate Measuring Machines and Systems”, CRC Press,
2nd edition, 2016.

CME380 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING LTPC

3 003

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To study the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile.
2 To study the practice for assembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmission system
3 To study various transmission systems of automobile.
4 To study about steering, brakes and suspension systems
5 To study alternative energy sources

UNIT – I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9

Types of automobiles vehicle construction and different layouts, chassis, frame and body, Vehicle
aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC engines – components-functions and
materials, variable valve timing (VVT).

UNIT – II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9

Electronically controlled gasoline injection system for SI engines, Electronically controlled diesel
injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type and common rail direct injection
system), Electronic ignition system (Transistorized coil ignition system, capacitive discharge ignition
system), Turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), Engine emission control by three way catalytic converter
system, Emission norms (Euro and BS).

UNIT – III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9

Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes- manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms,
Overdrive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints,
Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive.

UNIT – IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9

Steering geometry and types of steering gear box-Power Steering, Types of Front Axle, Types of
Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System
(ABS),electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control.

UNIT – V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Use of Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Bio-diesel, Bio-ethanol, Gasohol and Hydrogen in
Automobiles- Engine modifications required –Performance, Combustion and Emission
Characteristics of SI and CI engines with these alternate fuels - Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Fuel
Cell Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and Transmission
Systems should be given to the students.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Recognize the various parts of the automobile and their functions and materials.
2. Discuss the engine auxiliary systems and engine emission control.
3. Distinguish the working of different types of transmission systems.
4. Explain the Steering, Brakes and Suspension Systems.
5. Predict possible alternate sources of energy for IC Engines.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain K.K. and Asthana .R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Vol 1 & 2, Seventh Edition, Standard Publishers, New
Delhi, 13th Edition 2014.

REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA, 1998.
3. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Edition, East-West Press, 1999.
4. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The Good
heart - Will Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.
5. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers,1989.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
4 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
5 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of Electric
and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub system design and
hybrid vehicle control.

UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle. Various
Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric Vehicle
Recharging and Refuelling Systems.

UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick Charging
devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell. Ultra
capacitors. Battery Management System.

UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9

Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance
motors working principle, construction and characteristics.
UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9
Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC -
Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM
motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes

UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different configurations
of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation modes - Control
Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on specification of electric
and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
2. Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
3. Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
4. Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
5. Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.

REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

CMR334 AUTOMOTIVE MECHATRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. The intention and purpose of this course is to study the basics of electronics, emission
controls and its Importance in automobiles.
2. To study the Ignition and Injection system in Automobiles
3. To study the various sensors and actuators used in automobiles for improving fuel
economy and emission control.
4. To study the various blocks of mechatronic control units used for control of fuel, ignition
and exhaust systems.
5. To learn about different types of chassis and mechatronics safety systems in automobile

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 8
Evolution of electronics in automobiles – emission laws – introduction to Euro I, Euro II, Euro III,
Euro IV, Euro V standards – Equivalent Bharat Standards. Charging systems: Working and
design of charging circuit diagram – Alternators – Requirements of starting system - Starter
motors and starter circuits.
UNIT – II IGNITION AND INJECTION SYSTEMS 10
Ignition systems: Ignition fundamentals - Electronic ignition systems - Programmed Ignition –
Distribution less ignition - Direct ignition – Spark Plugs. Electronic fuel Control: Basics of
combustion – Engine fuelling and exhaust emissions – Electronic control of carburetion – Petrol
fuel injection – Diesel fuel injection.
UNIT – III SENSOR AND ACTUATORS IN AUTOMOTIVES 7
Working principle and characteristics of Airflow rate, Engine crankshaft angular position, Hall
effect, Throttle angle, temperature, exhaust gas oxygen sensors – study of fuel injector, exhaust
gas recirculation actuators, stepper motor actuator, and vacuum operated actuator.
UNIT – IV ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS 10
Control modes for fuel control-engine control subsystems – ignition control methodologies –
different ECU’s used in the engine management – block diagram of the engine management
system. In vehicle networks: CAN standard, format of CAN standard – diagnostics systems in
modern automobiles.
UNIT – V CHASSIS AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 10
Traction control system – Cruise control system – electronic control of automatic transmission –
antilock braking system – electronic suspension system – working of airbag and role of MEMS
in airbag systems – centralized door locking system – climate control of cars.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Know the importance of emission standards in automobiles.
CO2: Understand the electronic fuel injection/ignition components and their function.
CO3: Choose and use sensors and equipment for measuring mechanical quantities,
temperature and appropriate actuators.
CO4: Diagnose electronic engine control systems problems with appropriate diagnostic tools.
CO5: Analyze the chassis and vehicle safety system.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs POs PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics", 8th Edition, Elsevier, Indian Reprint,
2017.

REFERENCES
1. Barry Hollembeak, “Automotive Electricity, Electronics & Computer Controls”, Delmar
Publishers, 7th edition, 2019.
2. Richard K. Dupuy “Fuel System and Emission controls”, Check Chart Publication,4th
edition, 2000.
3. Ronald. K. Jurgon, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw-Hill, 1999.
4. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems”, Edward Arnold Publishers,
2000.
CMR335 AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEM MODELLING AND L T P C
SIMULATION 3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the various steps involved in the design of automotive components
2. To show their knowledge in designing engine components.
3. To complete design exercise and arrive at important dimensions of chassis components.
4. To learn the use of standard practices in design.
5. To determine the dimensions of front and rear axles

UNIT – I DESIGN OF CYLINDER, PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD 9

Choice of material for cylinder and piston, design of cylinder, design of piston, piston pin, piston
rings and piston assembly. Material for connecting rod, design of connecting rod assembly. Case
study on piston for car with Modelling and simulation.

UNIT – II DESIGN OF CRANK SHAFT AND VALVES 9

Material for crankshaft, design of crankshaft under bending and twisting. Design aspects of intake
& exhaust manifolds, inlet & exhaust valves, valve springs, tappets and valve train. Design of
cam& camshaft. Design of rocker arm. Cam profile generation. 3D Engine simulation:
Introduction to thermal and flow analysis in engine cylinder, modeling of cylinder and piston for
combustion analysis

UNIT – III DESIGN OF CLUTCHES AND GEARS 9

Design of single plate clutch, multiplate clutch and cone clutch assembly. Torque capacity of
clutch. Design of clutch components. Gear train calculations, layout of gearboxes. Calculation of
bearing loads and selection of bearings. Design of three speed and four speed gearboxes.
Modelling and simulation: braking system

UNIT – IV DESIGN OF VEHICLE FRAME AND SUSPENSION 9

Study of loads-moments and stresses on frame members. Design Of frame for passenger and
commercial vehicle - Design of leaf Springs-Coil springs and torsion bar springs. Case study on
development of frame for ATV. Modelling and simulation of suspension system

UNIT – V DESIGN OF FRONT AND REAR AXLE 9

Design of propeller shaft. Design details of final drive gearing. Design details of full floating, semi-
floating and three quarter floating rear shafts and rear axle housings. Analysis of loads-moments
and stresses at different sections of front axle. Determination of optimum dimensions and
proportions for steering linkages, Design of front axle beam.. Modelling and simulation of steering
system, transmission system
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Analyse the stress and strain imparted on automotive components.
CO2: Compute the design and find the dimension of the vehicle components.
CO3:Identify optimal design solutions to real-world problems in compliance with industry
standards.
CO4:Demonstrate the design skill by creating new design strategy with the application of the
knowledge
CO5:Interpret the modern system in vehicle and would help in developing the system with less
impact to the environment.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Giancarlo Genta, Lorenzo Morello, “The Automotive Chassis Volume 1, Components
Design”, Springer International Edition, 2nd edition,2020
2. Khurmi. R.S. & Gupta. J.K., "A text book of Machine Design", Eurasia Publishing House (Pvt)
Ltd, 25th edition, 2022.
3. Alec Stokes, “Manual gearbox design”, Butterworth-Heinemann 1992.

REFERENCES:
1. “Design Data Hand Book”, PSG College of Technology, 2013- Coimbatore.
2. Dean Averns, "Automobile Chassis Design", Il life Book Co., 2001.
3. Kolchin-Demidov , “Design of Automotive Engines”-Mir Publishers (1984)
4. Lukin P G G and Rodionov V, “Automobile Chassis Design and Calculations”, Mir Publishers,
Moscow, 1989.
5. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine component Design”, 6th
Edition, Wiley, 2017.
CMR336 VEHICLE DYNAMICS AND CONTROLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To Develop physical and mathematical models to predict the dynamic response of
vehicles
2. To Apply vehicle design performance criteria and how to use the criteria to evaluate
vehicle dynamic response
3. To Use dynamic analyses in the design of vehicles.
4. To understand the principle behind the lateral dynamics.
5. To Evaluate the longitudinal dynamics and control in an automobile

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
History of road and off road vehicle system dynamics - dynamics of the motor vehicle, coordinate
systems- vehicle fixed coordinates system, , details of vehicle systems, wheel angles, typical
data of vehicles. Fundamental approaches to vehicle dynamics modeling lumped mass, vehicle
fixed coordinate system, motion variables, earth fixed coordinate system, Definitions- modeling
and simulation of dynamic behavior of vehicle., motion analysis, force analysis, and energy
analysis.
UNIT – II LONGITUDINAL DYNAMICS 9
Introduction to longitudinal dynamics - Performance of road vehicles: forces and moments on
vehicle, equation of motion, tire forces, rolling resistance, weight distribution, tractive
effort/tractive resistance and power available from the engine/ power required for propulsion,
road performance curves- acceleration, grade ability, drawbar pull and the problems related to
these terms. Calculation of maximum acceleration braking torque, braking force, brake
proportioning, braking efficiency, stopping distance, load distribution (three wheeled and four
wheeled vehicles), calculation of acceleration, tractive effort and reactions for different drives,
Stability of a vehicle on slope, (Problems related to these). Steer-By-Wire Systems
UNIT – III LATERAL DYNAMICS 9
Introduction to lateral dynamics - Steering geometry, types of steering systems, fundamental
condition for true rolling, development of lateral forces. slip angle, cornering force, cornering
stiffness, pneumatic trail, self-aligning torque, power consumed by tire, tire stiffness, hysteresis
effect in tires, steady state handling characteristics. yaw velocity, lateral acceleration, curvature
response & directional stability. Stability of a vehicle on a curved track and a banked road.
Gyroscopic effects, weight transfer during acceleration, cornering and braking, stability of a rigid
vehicle and equations of motion of a rigid vehicle, cross wind handling, the problems related to
these terms.
UNIT – IV VERTICAL DYNAMICS 9
Introduction to vertical dynamics - Human response to vibrations, classification of vibration,
specification and vibration , sources of vibration, suspension systems, Modal Analysis, One DOF,
two DOF, free and forced vibration, damped vibration, magnification and transmissibility,
vibration absorber, functions of suspension system. body vibrations: bouncing and pitching.
Doubly conjugate points (only basic idea). body rolling. roll center and roll axis, roll axis and the
vehicle under the action of side forces, stability against body rolling. Vehicle dynamics and
suspension design for stability, choice of suspension spring rate, chassis springs and theory of
chassis springs, gas & hydraulic dampers and choice of damper, damper characteristics,
mechanics of an independent suspension system. Design and analysis of passive, semi-active
and active suspension using quarter car, half car and full car mode- Hydraulic Actuators for Active
Suspensions
UNIT – V VEHICLE AERODYNAMIC AND DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Road Loads: Air resistance-Mechanics of air flow around a vehicle, pressure distribution on a
vehicle, factors affecting rolling resistance, aerodynamic forces – aerodynamic drag, drag
components, dynamic Control, modelling of actuators, sensors for automobile control, sensors
for detecting vehicle environment, central tyre inflation system. Prediction of vehicle
performance. ABS, stability control, traction control. Dynamic Model for Simulation of a Parallel
Gas-Electric Hybrid Vehicle Dynamic Model for Simulation of a Power-Split Hybrid Vehicle
Background on Control Design Techniques for Energy Management – steer by wire controller
Design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Recognize the vehicle system dynamics
CO 2: Evaluate the driving/ braking resistances and their influences on vehicle dynamics
CO 3: Identify and analyze the dynamics systems such as suspension systems, body
vibrations, steering mechanisms.
CO 4: Analyze and solve engineering problems related to vehicle dynamics.
CO 5: Comparing and identifying the different types of control systems in automobiles

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Rajesh Rajamani, “Vehicle Dynamics and Control”, 2nd edition, Springer, 2021.
2. Singiresu S. Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2018.
3. Thomas D. Gillespie, “Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics”, Society of Automotive
Engineers Inc., 2021.
4. Wong. J. Y., “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, 5th Edition, Wiley-Interscience, 2022 .
5. N.K. Giri, “Automotive Mechanics”, Kanna Publishers, 2007.

REFERENCES
1. J. Y. Woung - John Willey & Sons “Theory of Ground Vehicles “, NY ,5th Edition,2022
2. J. G. Giles,” Steering, Suspension &Tyres”, Ilete Books Ltd., London,1968
3. W. Steed “Mechanics of Road Vehicles “, Ilete Books Ltd. London,1960
4. P. M. Heldt, “Automotive Chassis”, Chilton Co. NK
5. Gillespie.T.D., “Fundamental of vehicle dynamic society of Automotive Engineers “, USA,
2021 Revised Edition.
6. Rajesh Rajamani, “Vehicle dynamics and control”, Springer publication,2014
7. Reza N Jazar, “Vehicle Dynamics: Theory and Application”, Springer publication,3rd
Edition,2018
CMR337 AIRCRAFT MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts
2. To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data bases
3. To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems
4. To impart knowledge on aircraft materials.
5. To analyse the application of Mechatronics in aircraft.
UNIT – I AIRCRAFT AERODYNAMICS 9
Nomenclature used in Aerodynamics, different parts of airplane- Wing as lifting surface, Types
of wing plan forms, Aerodynamic features like Aerofoil pressure distribution- Aerodynamic forces
and moments Lift and Drag- Drag polar, L/D ratio, high lift devices, Airplane performance like
Thrust/Power available, climb and glide - maximum range and endurance, take off and landings.

UNIT – II AIRCRAFT PROPULSION 9

Requirement of power- various means of producing power - Brief description of thermo dynamics
of engines - Piston engines, Jet engines - Airplane Structure, Materials and Production -
Structural arrangement of earlier airplane- developments leading to all metal aircraft - Strength
to weight ratio choice of aircraft materials for different parts.

UNIT – III AIRCRAFT MATERIALS 9

Detailed description of wing - tail and fuselage joints - Stress-Strain diagrams, Plane and Space,
Mechanical properties of materials - Materials for different components - use of composites -
Aircraft production methods and equipment.

UNIT – IV PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS 9

Ailerons - Aileron Control System of a Commercial Aircraft - Elevators - Elevator control system
of a commercial aircraft – Rudders- Rudder Control System

UNIT – V APPLICATIONS OF MECHATRONICS IN AVIATION 9

Aileron-Flaps and Actuator drive unit-Pilot Static system-Fly by wire control system-Yaw damper-
Primary flight control system-Internal navigation system-Under carriage-Measurement of motor
rpm-Measurement of air flow velocity-Altitude measurement sensor-Air speed.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Recognize the Basics in aerodynamics, aircraft propulsion, materials and controls
CO 2: Know about the various concepts used in aerodynamics
CO 3: Apply the techniques to develop the aero system
CO 4: Design the aircraft with the use of concepts in aerodynamics, aircraft propulsion,
materials and controls
CO 5: Apply this aircraft system in various applications

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
CO3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
CO4 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
CO5 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
 CO/PO & PSO 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Flight; By Dr. O. P. Sharma and Lalit Gupta.2006
2. Albert Helfrick.D., "Principles of Avionics", Avionics Communications Inc., 2004

REFERENCES
1. Middleton, D.H., Ed., "Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical", Longman
Group UK Ltd., England, 1989.
2. Pallet. E.H.J., "Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems", Pearsons, Indian edition
2011.
3. Spitzer, C.R. "Digital Avionics Systems", Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,U.S.A.
1993.
4. Spitzer. C.R. "The Avionics Hand Book", CRC Press, 2000
CMR338 SMART MOBILITY AND INTELLIGENT VEHICLES LT PC
300 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of the course are:
1. To introduce students to the various technologies and systems used to implement smart mobility
and intelligent vehicles.
2. To learn Basics of Radar Technology and Systems, Ultrasonic Sonar Systems, LIDAR Sensor
Technology and Systems and other sensors for automobile vision system.
3. To learn Basic Control System Theory applied to Autonomous Automobiles.
4. To produce overall impact of automating like various driving functions, connecting the automobile
to sources of information that assist with a task
5. To allow the automobile to make autonomous intelligent decisions concerning future actions of
the vehicle that potentially impact the safety of the occupants through connected car &
autonomous vehicle technology.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATED, CONNECTED, AND INTELLIGENT

VEHICLES 9
Concept of Automotive Electronics, Electronics Overview, History & Evolution, Infotainment, Body,
Chassis, and Powertrain Electronics, Introduction to Automated, Connected, and Intelligent
Vehicles. Case studies: Automated, Connected, and Intelligent Vehicles

UNIT – II SENSOR TECHNOLOGY FOR SMART MOBILITY 9

Basics of Radar Technology and Systems, Ultrasonic Sonar Systems, Lidar Sensor Technology and
Systems, Camera Technology, Night Vision Technology, Other Sensors, Use of Sensor Data
Fusion, Integration of Sensor Data to On-Board Control Systems

UNIT – III CONNECTED AUTONOMOUS VEHICLE 9

Basic Control System Theory applied to Automobiles, Overview of the Operation of ECUs, Basic
Cyber-Physical System Theory and Autonomous Vehicles, Role of Surroundings Sensing Systems
and Autonomy, Role of Wireless Data Networks and Autonomy

UNIT – IV VEHICLE WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY & NETWORKING 9

Wireless System Block Diagram and Overview of Components, Transmission Systems –
Modulation/Encoding, Receiver System Concepts– Demodulation/Decoding, Wireless Networking
and Applications to Vehicle Autonomy, Basics of Computer Networking – the Internet of Things,
Wireless Networking Fundamentals, Integration of Wireless Networking and On-Board Vehicle
Networks

UNIT – V CONNECTED CAR & AUTONOMOUS VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY 9

Connectivity Fundamentals, Navigation and Other Applications, Vehicle-to-Vehicle Technology and
Applications, Vehicle-to-Roadside and Vehicle-to-Infrastructure Applications, Autonomous Vehicles
- Driverless Car Technology, Moral, Legal, Roadblock Issues, Technical Issues, Security Issues

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize the concept of cyber-physical control systems and their application to
collision avoidance and autonomous vehicles
CO2: Select the concept of remote sensing and the types of sensor technology needed to
implement remote sensing
CO3: Familiar with the concept of fully autonomous vehicles
CO4: Apply the basic concepts of wireless communications and wireless data networks
CO 5: Analyze the concept of the connected vehicle and its role in automated vehicles

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs POs PSOs
&PSOs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. “Intelligent Transportation Systems and Connected and Automated Vehicles”, 2016,
Transportation Research Board
2. Radovan Miucic, “Connected Vehicles: Intelligent Transportation Systems”, 2019,
Springer

REFERENCES
1. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic systems, Roult edge”, Taylor &
Francis Group, 5th Edition, 2018.
CMR339 ADVANCED DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of the course are:
1. To introduce students with various fundamentals related to advanced driver assistance
technologies
2. To impart knowledge on sensors, control and actuation methodologies and create impact
of automating vehicles
3. To acquire skills on vehicle prognostics and impaired driver technology
4. To learn about various commonly available Advanced Driver Assistance Systems.
5. To study about Center Console Technology and other display technology

UNIT – I AUTOMOTIVE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Power System-Running System-Comfort System– Engine Components – Drive train –
suspension system, ABS, Steering System

UNIT – II AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS 9

Knock sensors, oxygen sensors, crankshaft angular position sensor, temperature sensor, speed
sensor, Pressure sensor, Mass air flow sensor, Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors, crash
sensor, Coolant level sensors, Brake fluid level sensors – operation, types, characteristics,
advantage and their applications. Radar, Ultrasonic Sonar Systems, Lidar Sensor Technology
and Systems, Camera

UNIT – III OVERVIEW OF DRIVER ASSISTANCE TECHNOLOGY 9

Basics of Theory of Operation, Applications, Integration of ADAS Technology into Vehicle
Electronics, System Examples, Role of Sensor Data Fusion. Vehicle Prognostics Technology

UNIT – IV ADVANCED DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS 9

Advanced Driver Assistance Systems - Lane Departure (LDW), Active Cruise Control (ACC),
Blind Spot Detection, Parking Assist, Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB), Night Vision,
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR), Intelligent High beam Assistant (IHC), Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPMS), Front Collision Warning System (FCWS), Front Vehicle Departure Warning (FVDW),
Adaptive Lighting, Driver Drowsiness Detection, Hill Decent Control, Rear Cross Traffic

UNIT – V ADAS DISPLAY & IMPAIRED DRIVER TECHNOLOGY 9

Center Console Technology, Gauge Cluster Technology, Heads-Up Display Technology, and
Warning Technology – Driver Notification. Impaired Driver Technology -Driver Impairment
Sensor Technology, Sensor Technology for Driver Impairment Detection, Transfer of Control
Technology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize the rational for and evolution of automotive electronics
CO2: Know about the various automotive functions, sensors and
CO3: Familiar with the theory and operation of legacy, new, and emerging ADAS systems and
proposed autonomous vehicle systems
CO4: Fundamentals of sensor data fusion as it relates to ADAS
CO5: Apply possible evolution of vehicle prognostics and impaired driver technology

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic systems, Roultedge”, Taylor & Francis
Group, 5th Edition,2018.
2. William B Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronic: An Engineering Perspective”,
Elsevier Science,8th Edition,2017.

REFERENCES
1. “Intelligent Transportation Systems and Connected and Automated Vehicles”,
Transportation Research Board, 2016.
2. Radovan Miucic, “Connected Vehicles: Intelligent Transportation Systems”, Springer,
2019.
CRA340 APPLIED SIGNAL PROCESSING LTP C
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the characteristics of various types of signals.
2. To carry out the preprocessing of continuous time signals and systems
3. To learn DTFT, FFT and Z-Transform methods in signals processing.
4. To design digital IIR, FIR filters for signal processing
5. To learn about various signal processors and its applications of signals.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Elementary signals in continuous and discrete time - graphical and mathematical representation -
Elementary operations and classification of continuous and discrete time signals – CT systems and
DT systems - Properties of CT systems and DT systems Classification of systems

UNIT – II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

The continuous time Fourier series - Fourier Transform properties - Laplace transform and
properties - Impulse response - convolution integrals - Fourier and Laplace transforms in Analysis
of CT systems - Frequency response of systems characterized by differential Equations

UNIT – III ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT) Properties of DTFT - Discrete Fourier Transform
- Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) - Z Transform and Properties – Impulse response - Convolution sum
- System analysis from difference equation model - Stability of systems

UNIT – IV DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS 9

Review of design techniques for analog low pass filters - Frequency transformation – IIR filters -
Properties - Design of IIR digital filters using bilinear transformation - FIR filters - Characteristics of
FIR filters with linear phase - Design of FIR filters using Window functions

UNIT – V DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND APPLCATIONS 9

Architecture of TMS320C54xx DSP - Addressing Modes - Instructions and Programming -
Applications: Signal Compression - Sine wave generators - Noise generators – DTMF Tone
Detection - Echo cancellation - Speech enhancement and recognition
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand the characteristics of various types of signals.
CO2: Analyze continuous time signals and systems
CO3: Understand DTFT, FFT and Z-Transform methods in signals processing.
CO4: Design digital IIR, FIR filters for signal processing
CO5: Analyze and Apply various signal processors and its applications of signals.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
 CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alan V Oppenheim, Alan S Willsky, Hamid Nawab S , "Signals and Systems", 2nd edition,
Phi Learning, New Delhi, 2015.
2. John G. Proakis, Dimitris K Manolakis , "Digital Signal Processing, 5th edition, Hoboken,NJ :
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2021
REFERENCES:
1. Lonnie C Ludeman, "Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing", Wiley & Sons, New
Delhi, 2014.
2. Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jervis, "Digital Signal Processing", Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Haykin S, Barry Van Veen, "Signals and Systems", John Wiley and sons, New Delhi,
2016.
4. Vinay K Ingle, John G Proakis , "Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB", Cengage
Learning, New Delhi, 2012.
CRA341 APPLIED IMAGE PROCESSING LTP C
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce various image processing and preprocessing techniques.
2. To learn about feature detection and matching using Image processing
3. To learn about segmentation using Image processing techniques.
4. To learn about computational photography.
5. To learn about image recognition using Image processing techniques.

UNIT – I IMAGE FORMATION AND PROCESSING 9

Introduction - Geometric primitives and Transformations - Photometric Image formation - The digital
camera. Introduction to image processing - point - spatial - Fourier Transform - Pyramids and
wavelets - Geometric transformations - global optimization

UNIT – II FEATURE DETECTION AND MATCHING 9

Introduction - Points and patches - Feature detectors - Feature Descriptors - SIFT - PCA SIFT -
Gradient location orientation histogram

UNIT – III SEGMENTATION 9

Introduction - Active contours - Snakes - Scissors - Level sets - Split and merge - Watershed –
Region splitting - region merging - and graph based segmentation - mean shift and mode finding -
Normalized cuts – graph cuts and energy based methods – application

UNIT – IV COMPUTATIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY 9

Photometric calibration - Radiometric response function - Noise level estimation - Vignetting - Optical
blur - High dynamic range imaging - Super resolution and blur removal - Color image demos icing –
application

UNIT – V IMAGE RECOGNITION 9

Object detection - Face recognition - Instance recognition - category recognition - Bag of words -
Part based models - context and scene understanding- Application: Image search.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand various image processing and preprocessing techniques.
CO2: Design a feature detection algorithm for given application
CO3: Design a segmentation algorithm for given application.
CO4: Understand and recognize various computational photography techniques.
CO5: Design an image recognition for given application.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2
CO3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2
CO4 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2
CO5 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2
 CO/PO & 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 2
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Richard Szeliski, "Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications", Springer, 2010.
2. Hartley R, Zisserman A, "Multiple View Geometry in Computer Vision", Cambridge
University Press, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Forsyth D A, Ponce J, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”, 2nd Edition Bostan Pearson,
2015
2. Duda R O, Hart P E, Stork D G, "Pattern Classification", Wiley, 2001.
3. Richard Sc "Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications", Springer, 2010.
4. Simon J.D.Prince "Computer Vision: Models,Learning and Inference", Cambridge University
Press, New York, 2014.
CRA342 MACHINE LEARNING FOR INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS L T PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce basic machine learning techniques such as regression, classification
2 To learn about introduction of clustering, types and segmentation methods
3 To learn about fuzzy logic, fuzzification and defuzzification
4 To learn about basics of neural networks and neuro fuzzy networks.
5 To learn about Recurrent neural networks and Reinforcement learning.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING 9

Philosophy of learning in computers, Overview of different forms of learning, Classifications vs.
Regression, Evaluation metrics and loss functions in Classification, Evaluation metrics and loss
functions in Regression, Applications of AI in Robotics.

UNIT – II CLUSTERING AND SEGMENTATION METHODS 9

Introduction to clustering, Types of Clustering, Agglomerative clustering, K-means clustering, Mean
Shift clustering, K-means clustering application study, Introduction to recognition, K-nearest
neighbor algorithm, KNN Application case study, Principal component analysis (PCA), PCA
Application case study in Feature Selection for Robot Guidance.

UNIT – III FUZZY LOGIC 9

Introduction to Fuzzy Sets, Classical and Fuzzy Sets, Overview of Classical Sets, Membership
Function, Fuzzy rule generation, Fuzzy rule generation, Operations on Fuzzy Sets, Numerical
examples, Fuzzy Arithmetic, Numerical examples, Fuzzy Logic, Fuzzification, Fuzzy Sets,
Defuzzification, Application Case Study of Fuzzy Logic for Robotics Application

UNIT – IV NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Mathematical Models of Neurons, ANN architecture, Learning rules, Multi-layer Perceptrons, Back
propagation, Introduction of Neuro-Fuzzy Systems, Architecture of Neuro Fuzzy Networks,
Application Case Study of Neural Networks in Robotics

UNIT – V RNN AND REINFORCEMENT LEARNING 9

Unfolding Computational Graphs, Recurrent neural networks, Application Case Study of recurrent
networks in Robotics, Reinforcement learning, Examples for reinforcement learning, Markov
decision process, Major components of RL, Q-learning. Application Case Study of reinforcement
learning in Robotics
TOTAL:45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students would be able to

2. Understand basic machine learning techniques such as regression, classification
3. Understand about clustering and segmentation
4. Model a fuzzy logic system with fuzzification and defuzzification
5. Understand the concepts of neural networks and neuro fuzzy networks.
6. Gain knowledge on Reinforcement learning.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. MichealNegnevitsky, Artificial Intelligence: A Guide to Intelligent Systems, 3rd Edition,
Addision Wesley, England, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Bruno Siciliano, Oussama Khatib, “Handbook of Robotics”, 2016 2nd Edition, Springer
2. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks and Learning Machines: A Comprehensive Foundation”,
Third Edition, Pearson, delhi 2016.
3. Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, 4th Edition, Chichester,
2011, Sussex Wiley.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
2 3 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
3 3 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
4 3 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
5 3 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
CMR340 CONDITION MONITORING AND FAULT L T P C
DIAGNOSTICS 3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To Understand the basics of various condition monitoring methods.
2. To Identify the selection of condition monitoring sensors for various applications.
3. To study various signal processing for condition monitoring applications.
4. To Know about various failure analysis, maintenance and machine learning.
5. To provide a basic understanding with case studies on different fault diagnosis method.
UNIT – I CONDITION MONITORING TECHNIQUES AND MACHINE CONDITION 9
MONITORING
Condition Monitoring in manufacturing industries; Noise monitoring, Wear and debris Analysis,
Thermography, Cracks monitoring, Ultrasonic techniques - Case studies. Vibration, Acoustic
emission and vibro-acoustics signal analysis; intelligent fault detection system, Case studies.
UNIT – II SENSORS FOR FAULT DIAGNOSTICS 9
Introduction - Contaminant monitoring sensors- Corrosion monitoring sensors - Force monitoring
sensors - Gas leakage monitoring - sensors Air pollution monitoring sensors - Liquid
contamination monitoring sensors - Non-destructive testing techniques - Optical examination -
Temperature sensing
UNIT – III SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS 9
Study of periodic and random signals, probability distribution, statistical properties, auto and
cross correlation and power spectral density functions. Time domain and Frequency domain and
Time-frequency domain analysis.
UNIT – IV FAILURE ANALYSIS, MAINTENANCE AND MACHINE LEARNING 9
Maintenance Principles, Failure mode analysis - Equipment down time analysis – Breakdown
analysis - condition based maintenance, Vibration, Acoustic emission and vibrio-acoustics signal
analysis; intelligent fault detection system, Case studies.
UNIT – V MONITORING SYSTEMS CASE STUDEIS 9
Introduction - Marine monitoring systems - Marine turbine monitoring systems - Shipboard
vibration monitoring - Monitoring integrity verification - Aircraft condition monitoring - Condition
monitoring - generating plant - Automotive diagnostic equipment - Systematic fault monitor
selection
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
1. Understand the basics of various condition monitoring methods.
2. Select suitable condition monitoring sensors for various applications.
3. Recall various signals processing for condition monitoring applications.
4. Know about various failure analysis, maintenance and machine learning.
5. Apply different fault diagnosis method for various applications.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
 CO3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. “Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and condition monitoring” by R. A. Collacott, Chapman and Hall
London A Halstead Press Book John Wiley & Sons, New York

REFERENCE
1. “Condition Monitoring and Assessment of Power Transformers Using Computational
Intelligence”, W.H. Tang, Q.H. Wu, Springer-Verlag London
CMR341 SYSTEMS MODELING AND SIMULATION METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce the characteristics of system modelling and the importance of simulation.
2. To study the various approaches of modelling.
3. To model the solutions using queuing theory.
4. To teach the generation of data for simulation.
5. To study the various system models and familiarize the simulation tools
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION 9
System definition - Types and characteristics - Need for modelling and simulation -Types of
Simulation - Introduction to discrete event simulation - Single server – Multi server Exercises –
System modelling - Simple Petrinets

UNIT – II MODELLING APPROACHES 9

Modelling concurrent systems - Analysis of Petrinets - Finite state Automata and Regular
Expressions - Relationship - FSA with silent transitions - Pumping lemma for regular sets –
Analysis using DFS and model checking.

UNIT – III QUEUING MODELS 9

Characteristics of queuing systems - Notations - Types of Queues - Markovian model – non-
Markovian model - Queuing Networks - Applications of queuing systems.

UNIT – IV SIMULATION DATA 9

Methods for generating random numbers - Testing of random numbers - Methods of generating
random variants - Problem formulation - input modelling -Verification and Validation - Output1ZX
Analysis.

UNIT – V CASE STUDY 9

NS2 - Simulation of Computer Systems - Simulation of Computer Networks - Simulation of Mobile
Networks -Simulation of Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems
TOTAL HOURS: 45
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course students able to
CO1: Understand the characteristics of system modelling and the importance of simulation.
CO2: Design system model using various approaches.
CO3: Apply queuing theory to various systems.
CO4: Generate data for simulation.
CO5: Model and analyze a given system using simulation tools.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO2 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jerry Banks “Discrete-event system simulation”, 5th edition Pearson Education, Harlow,
2009.
2. Fitzgerald, John, Larsen, PeterGorm, “Modeling Systems; Practical Tools and Techniques
in software development”, Cambridge University Press, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Hopcroft, John E, Motwani, Rajeev, Ullman, Seffrey D, “Introduction to automata theory,
languages and computation”,3rd edition, Pearson/Dorling Kindersley, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research an Introduction”, 9th edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall,
New jersey, 2007.
3. Donald Gross and Carl M. Harris, “Fundamentals of Queuing theory”, 5th Edition, John
Wiley and Sons, New York 2018
CMR342 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To understand the concept in operation research
2. To learn about the linear programing
3. To understand the various methods in one dimensional and multi-dimensional
4. To obtain the knowledge in constrained and unconstrained problems
5. To understand the various methods in evolutionary programming

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH 9

Introduction to Operations Research – assumptions of linear programming problems -
Formulations of linear programming problem – Graphical method

UNIT – II LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Solutions to LPP using simplex algorithm- Revised simplex method - primal dual relationships –
Dual simplex algorithm - Sensitivity analysis - Computer programming linear methods

UNIT – III ONE DIMENSIONAL AND MULTI-DIMENSIONAL 9

Introduction to descent methods – global convergence of decent algorithms – speed
convergence –Fibonacci method – golden section search method – steepest descent – newton’s
method –polynomial approximation method- computer programming in one dimensional and
multi-dimensional methods

UNIT – IV UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION FOR CONSTRAINED PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange method – inequality constraints – KKT conditions – quadratic programming – geometric
programming – separable linear programming – sequential linear programming – feasible
direction method

UNIT – V EVOLUTIONARY PROGRAMMING 9

Genetic Engineering – Genetic Operators – Reproduction – Crossover – Mutation – Selection –
Genetic Local Search – Simulated Annealing – Ant Colony Optimization – Particle Swarm
Optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course students able to
CO1: Knowledge on the concept in operation research
CO2: Recognize about the linear programing
CO3: Analyze the various methods in one dimensional and multi-dimensional
CO4: Knowledge in constrained and unconstrained problems
 CO5: Apply the various methods in evolutionary programming

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO5 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO/PO & 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harvey M Wagner, Principles of Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010
2. Hitler Libermann, Operations Research: McGraw Hill Pub. 2009
3. Pant J C, Introduction to Optimisation: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, Delhi, 2008

REFERENCES:
1. Pannerselvam, Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010.
2. Taha H A, Operations Research, An Introduction, PHI, 2008
3. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, Wiley, 4th Edition,
2013.
4. David G.Luenberger, “Linear and Nonlinear Programming”, Springer Publications, 3rd
Edition, 2008.
5. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research – An Introduction”, Pearson, 10th Edition, 2018.
6. Stephen Boyd, Lieven Vandenberghe, “Convex Optimization”, Cambridge, 2016.
7. Bertsekas, Dimitri P. “Nonlinear Programming”. 3rd Edition. Athena Scientific Press,
Belmont, Massachusetts 2016
CMR343 IMMERSIVE TECHNOLOGIES AND HAPTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To identify the terminologies of haptic devices.
2. To understand the structure of haptic system and to aware the tele-operation for various
applications.
3. To acquire the knowledge on modelling for haptic system development relevant to the
human.
4. To emphasize the significance of knowledge in virtual and augmented reality.
5. To know the concepts and hardware of mixed reality.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO HAPTICS 8

Definition - Importance of Touch - Tactile Proprioception - Tactual Stereo Genesis - Kinesthetic
Interfaces - Tactile Interfaces - Human Haptics - Overview of Existing applications - Basics of
Force Feedback Devices - Kinesthetic Vs. Tactile Haptic Devices - Configurations of Kinesthetic
Devices -Types of Kinesthetic Devices

UNIT – II KINESTHETIC HAPTIC DEVICES AND TELEOPERATION 10

Mechatronics in Haptics System - Haptic Kinematics - Haptic Dynamics - Existing Kinesthetic
Devices - Haptic Device Static Rendering - Haptic Device Dynamic Rendering - Control of Haptic
Devices - Stability Analysis of Haptic Devices - Stability Analysis of the Rendered Model -
Passivity of the Rendered Model. Types of Sensors - Measurement of Haptic Parameters - Types
of Actuators - Types of Transmission - Admittance Type Kinesthetic Device - Admittance Control
- Comparison of Impedance and Admittance Type Devices - Genesis of Tele-Operation - Tele-
Operation Controllers -Tele-Operator Transparency - Stability Analysis of Tele-operator -
Tracking and Transparency - Surface Haptic - Exogenous Force Inputs.

UNIT – III HUMAN HAPTICS ITS PLATFORM 9

Introduction - Types of Haptic Sensing - Active vs. Passive Touch - Mechanoreception-
Mechanoreceptive Afferents - Kinesthetic Sensing - Force Sensing and Proprioception-
Introduction to Psychophysics - Measurement Thresholds - Laws of Psychophysics - Weber's
Law - Fechner's Law - Fitt's Law - Psychophysical Methods of Limit, Constant Stimuli and
Adjustment - Introduction to Virtual Reality Modelling Language (VRML) – Open Haptic Platform
- OpenGL- Virtual Environment Manager - Modelling of Simple Haptic System.

UNIT – IV VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY 9

The Reality – Virtuality Continuum - Virtual Reality Definitions - Software, Hardware, Sensation
and Perception - Multi-Modal Interaction Challenges - System Architecture of Virtual Reality.
Aspects of Geometrical Modelling and Environmental Modelling General Solution for Calculating
Geometric & Illumination Consistency in the Augmented Environment. Usability Guidelines -
Design and Implementation of an Immersive User Experience - Case Study for VR and AR.

UNIT – V MIXED REALITY 9

System Architecture of a Mixed Reality System - Common Interaction Techniques for Mixed
Reality Environments - Common Navigation Techniques - Common Interface for MR - Menu
Design Directions - Haptic Control Panel - Performance of an Interaction Techniques, Advanced
Interaction Techniques, Design and Implementation of an Immersive User Experience - Case
Study for MR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Recognize the haptic technology and its concepts in various haptic systems.
CO2: Classify the elements of haptics system and tele-operation in detail.
CO3: Design and use the devices in human haptic applications.
CO4: Combine and build the virtual and augmented reality based models.
CO5: Develop the design and model the hardware of mixed reality.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO3 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO4 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO5 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO/PO & PSO 2 1 1.2 1 2 2 3 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Burdea, G. C. and P. Coffet. “Virtual Reality Technology”, 3rd edition, Wiley-Interscience,
Hoboken New Jersey, 2012.
2. Eckehard Steinbach et al, “Haptic Communications”, Vol. 100, 4:937-956, 2012
3. Hannaford B and Okamura A. M “Haptics: Handbook of Robotics”, Springer, pp. 718735,
2008.

REFERENCES
1. Kenneth Salisbury, Francois Conti and Federico Barbagli, “Haptic Rendering: IEEE
Computer Graphics and Applications, v24 n2 (200403): 24-32, 2004.
2. Jean-Pierre Bresciani, Knut Drewing and Marc O. Ernst. “Human Haptic Perception and
the Design of Haptic-Enhanced Virtual Environments: The Sense of Touch and Its
Rendering”,STAR 45, pp. 61–106, 2008.
3. MacLean K. E, “Haptic Interaction Design for Everyday Interfaces: Reviews of Human
Factors and Ergonomics”, 4:149194, 2008.
4. Weir D. W and Colgate J. E “Stability of Haptic Display: Haptic Rendering: Foundations,
Algorithms, and Applications”. AK Peters, 2008.
5. Sherman, William R. and Alan B. Craig. “Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface,
Application, and Design” 2nd edition, Morgan Kaufmann, Cambridge U.S 2019.
6. Yuichi Ohta, Hideyuki Tamura, “Mixed Reality: Merging Real and Virtual Worlds”,
Springer Verlag, Berlin, 2014.
CMR344 COMPUTER VISION AND DEEP LEARNING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To familiar the fundamentals of image processing and functioning of camera.
2. To appreciate 3 dimensional structure and motions.
3. To learn the visual servicing for robotic applications
4. To understand the fundamentals of Neural network
5. To appreciate and develop the deep learning networks for image processing

UNIT – I IMAGE FORMATION AND CAMERA CALIBRATION 9

Basics: Sampling Theorem – Numerical Differentiation – Singular Value Decomposition
Introduction to Vision, Terminologies of Fields, Comparison of Biological and Computer Vision,
Projective Geometry Basics, Modelling of Geometric Image Formation, Modelling of Camera
Distortion, Camera Calibration, Methods of Camera Calibration, Estimation of Projection Matrix,
Experimental Performance Assessment in Computer Vision.

UNIT – II 3-D STRUCTURE AND MOTION 9

Computational Stereopsis – Geometry, Parameters – Correspondence Problem, Epipolar
Geometry, Essential Matrix and Fundamental Matrix, Eight Point Algorithm – Reconstruction by
Triangulation, Visual Motion – Motion Field of Rigid Objects – Optical Flow – Estimation of Motion
Field – 3D Structure and Motion from Sparse and Dense Motion Fields – Motion Based
Segmentation – Image Processing.

UNIT – III ACTIVE AND ROBOT VISION 8

LIDAR - Construction, Working Principle, Specifications and Selection Criteria. Point Cloud Data
Processing. Visual Tracking – Kalman Filtering – Visual SLAM, Solutions, Visual Servoing, Types
and Architecture.

UNIT – IV INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS 8

Introduction to Neural Networks, Philosophy and Types of Networks, Back propagation,
Numerical Problems for Back Propagation, Multi-Layer Perceptrons, Numerical Problems Based
on Perceptron, Conventional Neural Networks vs. Deep Learning in the Context of Computer
Vision, Loss Function, Optimization, Higher-Level Representations, Image Features, Stochastic
Gradient Descent

UNIT – V DEEP LEARNING 10

Convolutional Neural Networks - Convolution, Pooling, Activation Functions, Initialization,
Dropout, Batch Normalization, Deep Learning Hardware - CPU, GPU and TPU -Tuning Neural
Networks, Best Practices, Training Neural Networks, Update Rules, Ensembles, Data
Augmentation, Transfer Learning, Popular CNN Architectures for Image Classification – Alexnet,
VGG, Resnet, , Inception, CNN Architectures for Object Detection – RCNN and Types – Yolo -
Semantic Segmentation - FCN, Instance Segmentation - Mask RCNN – Deep Learning
frameworks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Process and practice the basic images.
CO2: Develop the 3-Dimensional structures and motions.
CO3: Model the visual serving for robotic applications
CO4: Acquire and practice the basic neural networks.
CO5: Develop and train the deep learning networks for image processing.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO3 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO4 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO5 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO/PO & 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Boguslaw Cyganek, J. Paul Siebert, “An Introduction to 3D Computer Vision Techniques
and Algorithms”, 2nd edition, John Willey, 2017.
2. Davies E.R, “Computer and Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithm, Practicalities”, 4th edition
Academic Press, Elsevier, Waltham 2012.
3. Emanuele Trucco, Alessandro Verri, “Introductory Techniques for 3D Computer Vision”,
Prentice Hall, South Asia, 2006.

REFERENCES
1. Rafael C. Gonzales, Richard.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd edition, Gatesmark
Publishing, Tenessee 2020.
2. Emanuele Trucco, Alessandro Verri, “Introductory Techniques for 3D Computer Vision”,
Prentice Hall, 1998.
3. Ian Goodfellow and YoshuaBengio and Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, First Edition,
MIT Press, 2018.
4. Forsyth and Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”, 2nd edition Pearson, Harlow
Uk 2015.
CMR345 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics in OOPS and control structures
2. To Know about the various functions in C++
3. To obtain the knowledge in Constructors and Deconstructors
4. To understand the concepts in pointers, virtual functions and polymorphism
5. To aware of the modelling and abstraction models

UNIT – I PRINCIPLES OF OOPS AND CONTROL STRUCTURES 10

Object Oriented Programming Paradigm, Basic Concepts of Object Oriented Programming,
Benefits of Object Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Languages, Applications of Object
Oriented Programming, Beginning with C++,Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers and Constants, Data
Types, Type Compatibility, Variables, Operators in C++,Implicit Conversions, Operator
Overloading, Operator Precedence, Control Structures.

UNIT – II FUNCTIONS IN C++, CLASSES AND OBJECTS 9

The Main Function, Function Prototyping, Call by Reference, Return by Reference, Inline
Functions, Function Overloading, Friend and Virtual Functions. Specifying a class, Member
Functions, Arrays within a class, Static Member Functions, Arrays of Objects, Friendly Functions.

UNIT – III CONSTRUCTORS AND DESTRUCTORS, OPERATORS 9

BOVERLOADING
Constructors, Parameterized Constructors, Copy Constructors, Dynamic Constuctors,
Destructors, Defining Operator Overloading, Overloading Operators, Rules for Overloading
Operators, Type Conversions

UNIT – IV POINTERS, VIRTUAL FUNCTIONS AND POLYMORPHISM 9

Pointers, Pointers to Objects, this pointer, Pointer to Derived Classes, Virtual Functions, Classes
for File Stream Operations, Opening and Closing a File, File Modes, File Pointers, Input Output
Operations, Updating a File.

UNIT – V 9
Object Orientation O Development O Themes, Modelling, Abstraction Models.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Master the fundamental principles of OO programming, Master key principles in OO
analysis, design, and development.
CO 2: Be familiar with the application of the Unified Modeling Language (UML) towards
analysis and design
CO 3: Master common patterns in OO design and implement them
CO 4: Be familiar with alternative development processes and be familiar with group/team
projects and presentations.
CO 5: Be exposed to technical writing and oral presentations.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO/PO & 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

REFERENCES
1. James Rumbaugh ,”Object Oriented Modelling and Design” , Pearson publication,1991
2. Robert Lafore ,“Object-oriented programming in Turbo C++”, Galgotia Publication,2004.
3. by E.Balagurusamy , “Object-oriented programming with C++”, 8th Edition, TMH.,2021
EE3591 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the various applications of power electronic devices for conversion, control
and conditioning of the electrical power and to get an overview of different types of power
semiconductor devices and their dynamic characteristics.
 To understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled
rectifiers
 To study the operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching
regulators.
 To learn the different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to
understand harmonic reduction methods.
 To study the operation of AC voltage controller and various configurations of AC voltage
controller.

UNIT I SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES 9

MOSFET dynamic behavior - driver and snubber circuits - low power high switching frequency
switching Power supplies, buck, boost, buck-boost converters – Isolated topologies – resonant
converters - switching loss calculations and thermal design.

UNIT II INVERTERS 9
IGBT: Static and dynamic behavior - single phase half bridge and full bridge inverters - VSI
:(1phase and three phase inverters square wave operation) - Voltage control of inverters single,
multi pulse, sinusoidal, space vector modulation techniques– various harmonic elimination
techniques-CSI

UNIT III UNCONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 9

Power Diode – half wave rectifier – mid-point secondary transformer based full wave rectifier –
bridge rectifier – voltage doubler circuit – distortion factor – capacitor filter for low power rectifiers
– LC filters – Concern for power quality – three phase diode bridge.

UNIT IV CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 9

SCR-Two transistor analogy based turn- ON – turn ON losses – thermal protection – controlled
converters (1 pulse, 2 pulse, 3 pulse, 6 pulse) - displacement factor – ripple and harmonic factor
- power factor mitigation, performance parameters – effect of source inductance - inverter angle
limit.

UNIT V AC PHASE CONTROLLERS 9

TRIAC triggering concept with positive and negative gate pulse triggering, TRIAC based phase
controllers - various configurations for SCR based single and three phase controllers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the operation of semiconductor devices and dynamic characteristics and to
design &analyze the low power SMPS
CO2: Analyze the various uncontrolled rectifiers and design suitable filter circuits
CO3: Analyze the operation of the n-pulse converters and evaluate the performance
parameters
CO4: Understand various PWM techniques and apply voltage control and harmonic elimination
methods to inverter circuits.
CO5: Understand the operation of AC voltage controllers and its applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ned Mohan, T.M.Undeland, W.P.Robbins, ”Power Electronics: Converters, applications and
design”, John Wiley and Sons, 3rd Edition (reprint), 2009
2. Rashid M.H., Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications, Prentice Hall India, 3rd
Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Cyril. W.Lander, Power Electronics, McGraw Hill International, Third Edition, 1993.
2. P.S.Bimbhra, Power Electronics, Khanna Publishers, Third Edition 2003
3. Philip T.Krein, Elements of Power Electronics, Oxford University Press, 2013.
4. P.C.Sen, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, 30th reprint, 2008.
MAPPING OF CO’S WITH PO’S AND PSO’S

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12PSO1PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 3 3 3 1.5 1 2.25 3 3 3 3
CMR358 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce the relevance of this course to the existing technology through demonstrations,
case studies, simulations, contributions of scientist, national/international policies with a
futuristic vision along with socio-economic impact and issues
2. To study the general purpose architecture for computer system.
3. To study the design of data path unit and control unit for ALU operation.
4. Understanding the concept of various memories.
5. To introduce the concept of interfacing and organization of multiple processors

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Computing and Computers, Evolution of Computers, VLSI Era, System Design- Register Level,
Processor Level, CPU Organization, Data Representation, Fixed – Point Numbers, Floating Point
Numbers, Instruction Formats, Instruction Types. Addressing modes.

UNIT – II DATA PATH DESIGN 9

Fixed Point Arithmetic, Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division, Combinational and
Sequential ALUs, Carry look ahead adder, Robertson algorithm, booth‘s algorithm, nonrestoring
division algorithm, Floating Point Arithmetic, Coprocessor, Pipeline Processing, Pipeline Design,
Modified booth‘s Algorithm.

UNIT – III CONTROL DESIGN 9

Hardwired Control, Micro programmed Control, Multiplier Control Unit, CPU Control Unit, Pipeline
Control, Instruction Pipelines, Pipeline Performance, Superscalar Processing, Nano Programming.

UNIT – IV MEMORY ORGANIZATION 9

Random Access Memories, Serial - Access Memories, RAM Interfaces, Magnetic Surface Recording,
Optical Memories, multilevel memories, Cache & Virtual Memory, Memory Allocation, Associative
Memory.

UNIT – V SYSTEM ORGANIZATION 9

Communication methods, Buses, Bus Control, Bus Interfacing, Bus arbitration, IO and system control,
IO interface circuits, Handshaking, DMA and interrupts, vectored interrupts, PCI interrupts, pipeline
interrupts, IOP organization, operation systems, multiprocessors, fault tolerance, RISC and CISC
processors, Superscalar and vector processor

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course students able to
CO1: Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present contemporary
world
CO2: Describe data representation, instruction formats and the operation of a digital computer.
CO3: Illustrate the data path unit and control unit for ALU operation.
CO4: Discuss about implementation schemes of control unit and pipeline performance.
CO5: Explain the concept of various memories, interfacing and organization of multiple processors
and Discuss about the interrupts, I/Os and other components of the system.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO2 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John P. Hayes,, “Computer architecture and Organization”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3 rd Edition,
1998.
2. V. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko G. Varanesic and Safat G. Zaky, “Computer Organisation”, 5th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Inc, 1996.

REFERENCES:
1. Morris Mano, “Computer System Architecture”, Prentice-Hall ofIndia, 2000.
2. Behrooz Paraami, “Computer Architecture, From Microprocessor to Supercomputers”, Oxford
University Press, Sixth impression, 2010.
3. P. PalChaudhuri, “Computer organization and design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2 nd Edition,
2007.
4. Miles J. Murdocca and Vincent P. Heuring, “Principles of Computer Architecture”, Prentice
Hall, 2000.
5. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture, Designing for Performance”,
Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2010.
CMR359 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce virtual instrumentation concepts and applications.
2. To train to program virtual instrumentation software for biomedical applications
3. To understand the data acquisition and control in VI
4. To obtain the knowledge in instrument interfaces
5. To analyze the applications of VI in Bio Medical Engineering

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
History of Virtual Instrumentation (VI), advantages, block diagram and architecture of a virtual
instrument, Programming paradigms – Virtual Instrumentation – Lab VIEW software – Lab VIEW
basics – Lab VIEW environment.

UNIT – II VI USING LABVIEW 9

Creating, Editing and debugging a VI in Lab VIEW – Creating a sub VI – Loops and charts –
Case and sequence structures – File I/O – VI customization.

UNIT – III DATA ACQUISITION AND CONTROL IN VI 9

Plug-in DAQ boards – Organization of the DAQ VI System – Performing analog input and analog
output – Scanning multiple analog channels – Driving the digital I/Os – Buffered data acquisition
– Simple problems

UNIT – IV INSTRUMENT INTERFACES 9

Current loop, RS 232C/RS 485, GPIB, System basics, Interface basics: USB, PCMCIA,
networking basics for office & industrial application VISA & IVI, image acquisition & processing,
Motion Control. ADC, DAC, DIO, DMM, waveform generator.

UNIT – V APPLICATION OF VI IN BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING 9

Design of virtual applications for Electrocardiography (ECG), Electromyography (EMG), Air Flow
and Lung Volume, Heart Rate variability analysis, Noninvasive Blood Pressure Measurement,
Biofeedback, Virtual Reality & 3D graphical modeling, Virtual Prototyping.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course students able to
CO1: To comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world.
CO2: Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument.
CO3: Understand the use of VI for data acquisition.
CO4: Experiment, analyze and document different types of interfaces.
CO5: Apply the virtual instrumentation technologies for medical applications

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gary Johnson, “LABVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw Hill, 4th edition,2006..
2. Lisa K. Wells and Jeffrey Travis, “LABVIEW for Everyone”, PHI, 1997.
3. Skolkoff, “Basic concepts of LABVIEW 4”, PHI, 1998.
4. Jerome, Jovitha, “Virtual Instrumentation and LABVIEW”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 1st Edition,
2010.
5. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW”, Tata Mc Graw –
Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1.Kevin James, “PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Techniques for Measurement,
Instrumentation and Control”, Newnes, 2003.
2. S. Gupta, J.P. Gupta, “PC Interfacing for Data Acquisition and Process Control”, ISA, 2nd
Edition, 1994.
3. Technical Manuals for DAS Modules of Advantech and National Instruments.
4. Jon B. Olansen, Eric Rosow, “Virtual Bio-Instrumentation: Biomedical, Clinical, and Healthcare
Applications in Lab VIEW” Pearson Education, 2001.
CMR346 INDUSTRIAL NETWORK PROTOCOLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To study the various types wired protocols for electronic system.
2. To know the various types wireless protocols for electronic system.
3. To aware the various industrial wired protocols in automation.
4. To study the various types wireless protocols for industrial automation.
5. To develop the wired and wireless functions of various protocols.

UNIT – I WIRED BUSES AND PROTOCOLS 9

Wireless - Wired Networks Comparison - Serial Communication Protocols - RS232-UART-
SPI - I2C –UNI/O Bus -1 Wire -Camera Link - Parallel Communication -PPI - Wishbone Bus –
AMBA – JTAG - Fireware IEEE 1394 Bus - Ethernet Overview - RS485

UNIT – II WIRELESS PROTOCOLS 9

Antenna Technology- Network Topologies - Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) - Wireless
Personal Area Networks (WPAN) - Wimedia – Wimax - RF – Bluetooth- Wi-Fi – Zigbee – Wireless
Industrial Automation Protocols.

UNIT – III INDUSTRIAL AND AUTONOMOUS SYSTEMS WIRED NETWORKS 9

Overview of Industrial Wired Networks – Terminal Bus- Modbus - HART Network -Mechatrolink-
II – EtherCAT- Sercos II/III – CAN- Canopen - Modbus IDA-PROFINET-PROFIBUS-Ethernet/IP-
Ethernet Powerlink- AG Automation and Drives (AS-I) - Device Net

UNIT – IV INDUSTRIAL WIRELESS NETWORKS 9

Overview of Industrial Wireless Networks - IWLAN - ISA100 Standards – Remote Networks-
Controller-Based Networks - Wireless HART Technology - 3G/4G for Automation – RFID Data
Tags.
UNIT – V APPLICATION OF COMMUNICATION PROTOCALS 9
Wired Machine Networking of Sub-elements and Machines - Wireless Machine Networking of
Sub-elements and Machines – Networking of Industry - Communication Network Layout Design
- Networking for TIA- Cloud Computing – IOT - Case Studies in Automation Applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Design wired protocols for electronic system.
CO2: Use wireless protocols for electronic system.
CO3: Practice industrial wired protocols in automation.
CO4: Select wireless protocols for industrial automation.
CO5: Demonstrate the wired and wireless functions of various protocols in application
development.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS
1. Borko Furht, “Encyclopaedia of Wireless and Mobile Communications - Three Volume
Set”, CRC Press, 2012.
2. Dick Caro, “Wireless Networks for Industrial Automation”, 2014.

REFERENCES
1. MMC-SD SERCOS Drive, “G&L Motion Control”, Hardware Manual, 2005.
2. Olaf Pfeiffer, Andrew Ayre and Christian Keydel, “Embedded Networking with CAN and
CANopen”, Copperhill Technologies Corporation, 2016.
3. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communication Technology”, CRC Press, 2017.
4. Siemens IK, “Industrial Ethernet: IEEE 802.3”, 2005.
5. Wolfram Behardt and Jorg Wollert, “The wireless B: Evolution and Communication”,
Stetue Germany, 2016.
CMR347 MOTION CONTROL SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basics in motion control system
2. To knowledge about on architecture of motion control system
3. To understand the features and specifications in motion control drives
4. To learn about intelligent motors and integrated drive
5. To ability to know about the programming of motion controller

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION MOTION CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Motion Control System - Dynamic System Modeling - Control System Design
Fundamentals – Parameters in Control – Actuators and Measurement in Motion Control Systems
-Multi-Body Dynamics – Need for Motion Controller – Specification of Motion Control

UNIT – II ARCHITECTURE OF MOTION CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Introduction to Motion Controller – Programmable Automation Controllers – Features &
Specification of Motion Controllers – Digital I/O – Analog I/O – Standards in I/O – I/O Specific to
Sensors – Modular and Expansion Concepts - Drives

UNIT – III MOTION CONTROL DRIVES 9

Programmable Automation Controllers – Features & Specification of Motion Controllers – Digital
I/O – Analog I/O – Standards in I/O – I/O Specific to Sensors – Modular and Expansion Concepts
- Drives

UNIT – IV INTELLIGENT MOTORS WITH INTEGRATED DRIVE 9

Intelligent motors – intelligent drives – features of drives – programmable I/Os- communication
protocols – features – Software - Programming – current, position and speed loops – Application
in robots and portable systems

UNIT – V PROGRAMMING OF MOTION CONTROLLER 9

IEC 61131 standards and Its Programming Languages overview- CoDeSys Platform - status
Diagram – PLC Open - Motion Planer - PID - Servo Tuning – Position- velocity, Acceleration
and Torque Profiling – CAM Profiling – Multi- Axis Motion Controllers – CNC Machines – Robot
case study
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Know about the basics in motion control system
CO 2: Obtain the knowledge on architecture of motion control system
CO 3: Analyze the features and specifications in motion control drives
CO 4: Obtain the concepts about on intelligent motors and integrated drive
CO 5: Understand the knowledge about the programming of motion controller

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO & PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Nakamura .S. Gata & N. Kyura, Mechatronic Servo System Control, Springer, 2004.
2. Sabanovic Asif, Motion Control Systems, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2011

REFERENCES
1. Model 4000 indexer user Guide, Parker Hannifin Corporation, 1994.
2. 2-Axis Motion Controller User Guide, Parker Hannifin Corporation, 1995.
3. Operating instructions Compax3 T30 Programmable motion control according to
IEC61131-3, Parker Hannifin Corporation, 2008.
4. Programming with Easy Motion Studio – User's Manual, online, technosoftmotion.com.
5. Technical Reference, IPOS4808 BX-CAT-STO Intelligent Servo Drive for Step, DC,
Brushless DC and AC Motors, Techno soft, 2022.
CMR348 TOTAL INTEGRATED AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To gain knowledge in automation in industries.
2. To gain knowledge in various electrical and electronic programmable automations and
their applications.
3. To know about the basic in SCADA and DCS systems.
4. To gain knowledge in communication protocols in an integrated system
5. To know about the advanced in automation industries

UNIT – I TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 9

Need, components of TIA systems, advantages, Programmable Automation Controllers (PAC),
Vertical Integration structure.

UNIT – II HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) 9

Necessity and Role in Industrial Automation, Need for HMI systems. Types of HMI- Text display
- operator panels - Touch panels - Panel PCs - Integrated displays (PLC & HMI).

UNIT – III SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) 9

Overview – Developer and runtime packages – architecture – Tools – Tag – Internal &External
graphics, Alarm logging – Tag logging – structured tags– Trends – history– Report generation,
VB & C Scripts for SCADA application.

UNIT – IV COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS OF SCADA 9

Proprietary and open Protocols – OLE/OPC- UPC UA/DA – DDE – Server/Client Configuration
– Messaging – Recipe – User administration – Interfacing of SCADA with PLC, drive, and other
field device

UNIT – V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS (DCS) 9

DCS – architecture – local control unit- programming language – communication facilities –
operator interface – engineering interfaces. APPLICATIONS OF PLC & DCS: Case studies of
Machine automation, Process automation, Introduction to SCADA Comparison between SCADA
and DCS.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Knowledge of PLC & PAC automation
CO 2: Knowledge in HMI systems and to integrate it with other systems.
CO 3: Ability to apply SCADA and usage of C programming for report generation
CO 4: Acquiring information’s on communication protocols in automation systems
CO 5: Ability to design and develop automatic control system using distributed control
systems.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John. W. Webb& Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable logic controllers: Principles and
Applications”, Prentice Hall India, 2009.
2. Michael P. Lukas, “Distributed Control systems”, “Van Nostrand Reinfold Company”1995 .

REFERENCES:
1. Win C C Software Manual, Siemens, 2003
2. RS VIEW 32 Software Manual, Allen Bradly, 2005
3. CIMPLICITY SCADA Packages Manual, Fanuc India Ltd, 2004
CMR349 DIGITAL TWIN AND INDUSTRY 5.0 L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics concepts in digital twin
2. To Introduce the concepts in digital twin in a discrete Industry
3. To Introduce the concepts in digital twin in a process Industry
4. To obtain the knowledge in industry 5.0
5. To know about the advantages in industry 5.0

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Digital twin – Definition, types of Industry and its key requirements, Importance, Application of
Digital Twin in process, product, service industries, History of Digital Twin, DTT role in industry
innovation, Technologies/tools enabling Digital Twin – Virtual CAD Models – control Parameters-
Real time systems – control Parameters – Handshaking Through Internet – cyber physical
systems

UNIT – II DIGITAL TWIN IN A DISCRETE INDUSTRY 9

Basics of Discrete Industry, Trends in the discrete industry, control system requirements in a
discrete industry, Digital Twin of a Product, Digital Thread in Discrete Industry, Data collection &
analysis for product & production improvements, Automation simulation, Digital Enterprise

UNIT – III DIGITAL TWIN IN A PROCESS INDUSTRY 9

Basics of Process Industry, Trends in the process industry, control system requirements in a
process industry, Digital Twin of a plant, Digital Thread in process Industry, Data collection and
analysis for process improvements, process safety, Automation simulation, Digital Enterprise

UNIT – IV INDUSTRY 5.0 9

Industrial Revolutions, Industry 5.0 – Definition, principles, Application of Industry 5.0 in process
& discrete industries, Benefits of Industry 5.0, challenges in Industry 5.0, Smart manufacturing,
Internet of Things 5.0, Industrial Gateways, Basics of Communication requirements – cognitive
systems 5.0

UNIT – V ADVANTAGES OF DIGITAL TWIN 9

Improvement in product quality, production process, process Safety, identify bottlenecks and
improve efficiency, achieve flexibility in production, continuous prediction and tuning of
production process through Simulation, reducing the time to market.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Analyze the basics concepts in digital twin
CO 2: Recognize the concepts in digital twin in a discrete Industry
CO 3: Recognize the concepts in digital twin in a process Industry
CO 4: Obtain the knowledge in industry 5.0
CO 5: Apply the advantages in industry 5.0 with various applications

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1
CO2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1
CO3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1
CO4 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1
CO5 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1
CO/PO & PSO 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1
Average

1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alp Ustundag and Emre Cevikcan, “Industry 4.0: Managing The Digital Transformation”,
Springer Series in Advanced Manufacturing., Switzerland, 2018
2. Andrew Yeh Chris Nee, Fei Tao, and Meng Zhang, “Digital Twin Driven Smart
Manufacturing”, Elsevier Science., United States, 2019
REFERENCES:
1. Uthayan Elangovan, Industry 5.0: The Future of the Industrial Economy, CRC Press,
2022.
2. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, Apress., United States
,2015.
3. Christoph Jan Bartodziej, “The Concept Industry 4.0 an Empirical Analysis of
Technologies and Applications in Production Logistics”, Springer Gambler., Germany,
2017.
4. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises, Concepts, analyses and
assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer., Switzerland, 2016.
5. Ronald R. Yager and Jordan Pascual Espada, “New Advances in the Internet of Things”,
Springer., Switzerland, 2018
6. Ulrich Sendler, “The Internet of Things, Industries 4.0 Unleashed”, Springer., Germany,
2018
CAE347 AVIONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts
2. To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data buses
3. To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems
4. To understand the concepts of navigation systems.
5. To gain knowledge on auto pilot system

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS 9

Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – integrated avionics and weapon
systems – typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to digital computer and
memories.

UNIT II DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE 9

Avionics system architecture – data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 420 – ARINC – 629.

UNIT III FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS 9

Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen – Direct
voice input (DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9

Radio navigation – ADF, DME, VOR, LORAN, DECCA, OMEGA, ILS, MLS – Inertial Navigation
Systems (INS) – Inertial sensors, INS block diagram – Satellite navigation systems – GPS.

UNIT V AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT 9

Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach Number, Total air temperature, Mach
warning, Altitude warning – Auto pilot – Basic principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Built Digital avionics architecture.
CO2 Design Navigation system.
CO3 Integrate avionics systems using data buses.
CO4 Analyze the performance of various cockpit display technologies.
CO5Design autopilot for small aircrafts using MATLAB.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Albert Helfrick.D., "Principles of Avionics", Avionics Communications Inc., 2004
2. Collinson.R.P.G. "Introduction to Avionics", Chapman and Hall, 1996.

REFERENCES:
1. Middleton, D.H., Ed., "Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical", Longman Group
UK Ltd., England, 1989.
2. Pallet.E.H.J., "Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems", Pearsons, Indian edition 2011.
3. Spitzer, C.R. "Digital Avionics Systems", Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,U.S.A. 1993.
4. Spitzer. C.R. "The Avionics Hand Book", CRC Press, 2000
 MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
2 3 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 3 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - 2 - -
4 3 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - 2 - -
5 3 - 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 -
AVg. 3 - 2 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 1 -
-
CAE348 CONTROL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the mathematical modeling of systems, open loop and closed loop
systems and analyses in time domain and frequency domain.
2. To impart the knowledge on the concept of stability and various methods to analyze
stability in both time and frequency domain.
3. To introduce sampled data control system.
4. To explain the concept of stability.
5. To understand about digital controllers.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical review, Simple pneumatic, hydraulic and thermal systems, Series and parallel system,
Analogies, mechanical and electrical components, Development of flight control systems.

UNIT II OPEN AND CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 9

Feedback control systems – Control system components - Block diagram representation of control
systems, Reduction of block diagrams, Signal flow graphs, Output to input ratios.

UNIT III CHARACTERISTIC EQUATION AND FUNCTIONS 9

Laplace transformation, Response of systems to different inputs viz., Step impulse, pulse, parabolic
and sinusoidal inputs, Time response of first and second order systems, steady state errors and
error constants of unity feedback circuit.

UNIT IV CONCEPT OF STABILITY 9

Necessary and sufficient conditions, Routh-Hurwitz criteria of stability, Root locus and Bode
techniques, Concept and construction, frequency response.

UNIT V SAMPLED DATA SYSTEMS 9

Z-Transforms Introduction to digital control system, Digital Controllers and Digital PID controllers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Apply mathematical knowledge to model the systems and analyse the frequency domain.
CO2 Check the stability of the both time and frequency domain.
CO3 Solve simple pneumatic, hydraulic and thermal systems, Mechanical and electrical component
analogies-based problems.
CO4 Solve the Block diagram representation of control systems, Reduction of block diagrams,
Signal flow graph and problems based on it.
CO5Explain the digital control system, Digital Controllers and Digital PID Controllers.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Azzo, J.J.D. and C.H. Houpis Feedback control system analysis and synthesis, McGraw-Hill
international 3rs Edition, 1998.
2. OGATO, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.

REFERENCES:
1. Houpis, C.H. and Lamont, G.B. "Digital control Systems", McGraw Hill Book co., New York,
U.S.A. 1995.
2. Kuo, B.C. "Automatic control systems", Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
3. Naresh K Sinha, "Control Systems", New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 1998.
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
3 3 1 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 - -
4 3 1 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 - -
5 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
AVg. 3 1 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 - -
 L T P C
CAE349 GUIDANCE AND CONTROL
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn about the aircraft equations of motion and method of linearization.
2. To learn about the operating principle of guidance law.
3. To study about the augmentation systems.
4. To study longitudinal stability and to design the longitudinal autopilot.
5. To study lateral stability and to design the lateral autopilot.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Introduction to Guidance and control - Definition, Historical background – Coordinate Frame -
Equations of motion – Lineraization..

UNIT II AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS 9

Need for automatic flight control systems, Stability augmentation systems, control augmentation
systems, Design of Limited authority and Full Authority Augmentation systems - Gain scheduling
concepts.

UNIT III LONGITUDINAL AUTOPILOT 9

Displacement Autopilot -Pitch Orientation Control system, Acceleration Control System, Glide Slope
Coupler and Automatic Flare Control and Flight path stabilization, Longitudinal control law design
using back stepping algorithm.

UNIT IV LATERAL AUTOPILOT 9

Damping of the Dutch Roll, Methods of Obtaining Coordination, Yaw Orientation Control system,
turn compensation, Automatic lateral Beam Guidance. Introduction to Fly-by-wire flight control
systems, Lateral control law design using back stepping algorithm.

UNIT V MISSILE AND LAUNCH VEHICLE GUIDANCE 9

Operating principles and design of guidance laws, homing guidance laws- short range, Medium
range and BVR missiles, Launch Vehicle- Introduction, Mission requirements, Implicit guidance
schemes, Explicit guidance, Q guidance schemes
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Explain the equations governing the aircraft dynamics and the process of
linearizing them.
CO2 Define the various guidance schemes and requirements for aircrafts and
missiles.
CO3 Apply the principle of stability and control augmentation systems.
CO4 Analyse the oscillatory modes and methods of suppressing them
CO5 Design the controller for lateral, longitudinal and directional control of aircrafts.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Blakelock, J. H., “Automatic Control of Aircraft and Missiles”, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1990.
2. Collinson R.P.G, ‘Introduction to Avionics’, Chapman and Hall, India, 1996.
3. Garnel. P. & East. D. J, ‘Guided Weapon control systems’, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1977.

REFERENCES:
1. Michael V. Cook ‘Flight Dynamics Principles: A Linear Systems Approach to Aircraft Stability
and Control’, Elsevier, 2010.
2. Nelson R.C, ‘Flight stability & Automatic Control’, McGraw Hill, 1989.
3. Pierre T. Kabamba, Anouck R. Girard. ‘Fundamentals of Aerospace Navigation and
Guidance’, Cambridge university press, 2014.
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
3 3 1 - 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
4 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 2 - -
5 3 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 - -
AVg. 3 1 1.5 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CAE350 NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM L T PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce various types of navigation systems.
2. To understand the dead reckoning navigation system and its error correction.
3. To know satellite navigation and hybrid navigation system integration
4. To learn the concepts of radio transmitters and receivers
5. To acquire knowledge about weather radar systems and DME

UNIT I INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to navigation – Types -INS components- transfer function and errors - Earth in inertial
space - Coriolis Effect – INS Mechanization. Platform and Strap down – Navigation algorithms - INS
system block diagram, Different co-ordinate systems – Transformation Techniques - Schuler Tuning
– compensation errors - Gimbal lock - Initial calibration and Alignment Algorithms

UNIT II RADIO NAVIATION & SATELLITE NAVIGATION 9

Different types of radio navigation- ADF, VOR, DME - Doppler – Hyperbolic Navigations -LORAN,
DECCA and Omega – TACAN. Introduction to GPS -system description -basic principles -position
and velocity determination signal Structure -DGPS, Introduction to Kalman filtering-Estimation and
mixed mode navigation Integration of GPS and INS-utilization of navigation systems in aircraft.

UNIT II RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9

Functions of a Radio transmitter, Microphones, types, Block diagram explanation of a Radio
transmitter, Modulation and its types and Antenna, Antenna couplers, Qualities of a good Radio
receiver, Block diagram of a simple radio receiver and super heterodyne receiver.

UNIT IV AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9

Basics of aircraft communication system, types Very High Frequency Communication system,
Description, Principle, Operation of VHF Communication system and its layout on aircraft, High
Frequency communication system, Description, Principle and operation of High Frequency
communication system and its layout on aircraft. Satellite communication system, Description,
Operation and its layout on aircraft.

UNIT V WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM AND DME 9

Introduction, Description and types of Radar, Primary and Secondary Radar, Weather Radar
Description, Analog radar Principal units of Analog radar system. Aircraft weather radar,
transmitter-receiver, Indicator, Control panel, Antenna, Radome and wave guide. Radome
maintenance and radar safety.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1. Students will understand the advanced concepts of Aircraft Navigation
CO2. To provide the necessary mathematical knowledge those are needed in modeling the
navigation process and methods.
CO3. The students will have an exposure on various Navigation systems such as Inertial
Measurement systems, Radio Navigation Systems, Satellite Navigation – GPS.
CO4. Landing aids and will be able to deploy these skills effectively in the analysis and
understanding of navigation systems in an aircraft.
CO5. Learn and apply the principles of Radar and its related components.

REFERENCES
1. Aircraft Electricity and electronics by Thomas K Eismin (Fifth edition-1994, McGraw- Hill Book
Co)
2. Aircraft Radio system by James Powell, Sterling book house, Mumbai, Indian edition - 2006.
3. Aircraft Communications and Navigation systems – Mike Tooley and David Wyatt, Reed
Elsevier, India, Noida, Edition – 2007)
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO/PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

1 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 3 1 2 3 1 1
2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1
3 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 1
4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 3 1 1
5 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1
2.8 2.6 2.6 2.4 2.2 1.7 1.6 1.2 1.6 2.6 1.6 1.4 3 1 1
CAE351 DESIGN OF UAV SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To expose students to concepts needed in modelling and analysing an
unmanned system.
2. To expose students to the design and development of UAV.
3. To expose students to the type of payloads used in UAV.
4. To study path planning
5. To understand the avionics hardware used in the UAV

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO UAV 9

History of UAV –classification – Introduction to Unmanned Aircraft Systems--models and prototypes
– System Composition-applications

UNIT II THE DESIGN OF UAV SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Design and Selection of the System- Aerodynamics and Airframe Configurations-
Characteristics of Aircraft Types- Design Standards and Regulatory Aspects-UK,USA and Europe-
Design for Stealth--control surfaces-specifications.

UNIT III AVIONICS HARDWARE 9

Autopilot – AGL-pressure sensors-servos-accelerometer –gyros-actuators- power supply-
processor, integration, installation, configuration, and testing

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION PAYLOADS AND CONTROLS 9

Payloads-Telemetry-tracking-Aerial photography-controls-PID feedback-radio control frequency
range –modems-memory system-simulation-ground test-analysis-trouble shooting

UNIT V THE DEVELOPMENT OF UAV SYSTEMS 9

Waypoints navigation-ground control software- System Ground Testing- System In-flight Testing-
Future Prospects and Challenges-Case Studies – Mini and Micro UAVs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design UAV system
CO2 Prepare preliminary design requirements for an unmanned aerial vehicle.
CO3 Identify different hardware for UAV
CO4 Perform system testing for unmanned aerial vehicles.
CO5 Design micro aerial vehicle systems by considering practical limitations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paul G Fahlstrom, Thomas J Gleason, “Introduction to UAV Systems”, UAV Systems, Inc, 1998
2. Reg Austin “Unmanned Aircraft Systems UAV design, development and deployment”, Wiley,
2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Dr. Armand J. Chaput, “Design of Unmanned Air Vehicle Systems”, Lockheed Martin
Aeronautics Company, 2001
2. Kimon P. Valavanis, “Advances in Unmanned Aerial Vehicles: State of the Art and the Road to
Autonomy”, Springer, 2007
3. Robert C. Nelson, Flight Stability and Automatic Control, McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1998.
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
2 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 - -
3 2 3 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 1 1 -
4 3 2 - - - 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
5 2 - 1 1 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2 1 1.5 3 0.6 1 - 1 - - 1 1.2 1 -
 L T P C
CAE352 AERODYNAMICS OF DRONES
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce students to the basic concepts of payloads in UAV.
2. To understand the various sensor system of an UAV.
3. To introduce with the concepts of data algorithms and architectures.
4. To introduce the concepts of artificial neural networks.
5. To expose students to the concept of fuzzy logic.

UNIT-I PAYLOAD FOR UAV 9

Introduction – Types – Non-dispensable Payloads - Electro-optic Payload Systems - Electro-optic
Systems Integration - Radar Imaging Payloads - Other Non-dispensable Payloads - Dispensable
Payloads - Payload Development.

UNIT-II SENSOR 9
Data fusion applications to multiple sensor systems - Selection of sensors - Benefits of multiple
sensor systems - Influence of wavelength on atmospheric attenuation - Fog characterization -
Effects of operating frequency on MMW sensor performance - Absorption of MMW energy in rain
and fog - Backscatter of MMW energy from rain - Effects of operating wavelength on IR sensor
performance - Visibility metrics - Atmospheric and sensor system computer simulation models

UNIT-III DATA FUSION ALGORITHMS AND ARCHITECTURES 9

Definition of data fusion - Level 1 processing - Detection, classification, and identification algorithms
for data fusion - State estimation and tracking algorithms for data fusion - Level 2, 3, and 4
processing - Data fusion processor functions - Definition of an architecture - Data fusion
architectures - Sensor-level fusion - Central-level fusion - Hybrid fusion

UNIT-IV ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Applications of artificial neural networks - Adaptive linear combiner - Linear classifiers - Capacity of
linear classifiers - Nonlinear classifiers - Madaline - Feedforward network - Capacity of nonlinear
classifiers - Supervised and unsupervised learning - Supervised learning rules - Voting Logic Fusion

UNIT-V FUZZY LOGIC AND FUZZY NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Conditions under which fuzzy logic provides an appropriate solution - Illustration of fuzzy logic in an
automobile antilock braking system - Basic elements of a fuzzy system - Fuzzy logic processing -
Fuzzy centroid calculation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
CO1 Calculate the payloads in UAV.
CO2 Explain the concepts sensor systems.
CO3 Predict the data fusion algorithms and architectures.
CO4 Learn the basics neural network systems
CO5 Design various network schemes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reg Austin Aeronautical Consultant, AJohn “Unmanned aircraft systems UAVs design,
development and deployment” Wiley and Sons, Ltd., Publication,2010
2. David L. Hall, Sonya A. H. McMullen “Mathematical Techniques in Multi-sensor Data Fusion”, by
Artech, 2004
3 Martin Liggins II David Hall, James “Handbook of Multisensor Data Fusion: Theory and Practice”,
Second Edition (Electrical Engineering & Applied Signal Processing Series), 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Lawrence A. Klein, “Sensor and Data Fusion: A Tool for Information Assessment and Decision
Making”, Second Edition, SPIE Press, 2013.
2. Jitendra R. Raol, “Multi-Sensor Data Fusion with MATLAB”, CRC Press, 2010.

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
2 3 1 2 - - - - - 1 - - 1 1 2 -
3 3 1 - 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 -
4 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - 2 -
5 3 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 - -
AVg. 3 1 1.6 1 1 - - - 1 - - 1 1.7 2 -
CMR351 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L TPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits
2. To learn the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers
3. To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers and PLL
4. To learn the theory of ADC and DAC
5. To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce some special function ICs

UNIT – I BASICS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Current mirror and current sources, Current sources as active loads, Voltage sources, Voltage
References, BJT Differential amplifier with active loads, Basic information about op-amps – Ideal
Operational Amplifier – General operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit diagrams of IC 741,
DC and AC performance characteristics, slew rate, Open and closed loop configurations –JFET
Operational Amplifiers – LF155 and TL082.

UNIT – II APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Sign Changer, Scale Changer, Phase Shift Circuits, Voltage Follower, V-to-I and I-to-V converters,
adder, subtractor, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Differentiator, Logarithmic amplifier,
Antilogarithmic amplifier, Comparators, Schmitt trigger, Precision rectifier, peak detector, clipper and
clamper, Low-pass, high-pass and band-pass Butterworth filters.

UNIT – III ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL 9

Analog Multiplier using Emitter Coupled Transistor Pair – Gilbert Multiplier cell – Variable
transconductance technique, analog multiplier ICs and their applications, Operation of the basi PLL,
Closed loop analysis, Voltage controlled oscillator, Monolithic PLL IC 565, application of PL for AM
detection, FM detection, FSK modulation and demodulation and Frequency synthesizing and clock
synchronization

UNIT – IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL AND DIGITAL TO ANALOG

CONVERTERS 9
Analog and Digital Data Conversions, D/A converter – specifications – weighted resistor type, R-2
Ladder type, Voltage Mode and Current-Mode R – 2R Ladder types – switches for D/A
converters high speed sample-and-hold circuits, A/D Converters – specifications – Flash type –
Successive Approximation type – Single Slope type – Dual Slope type – A/D Converter using
Voltage-to-Time Conversion – Over-sampling A/D Converters, Sigma – Delta converters.

UNIT – V WAVEFORM GENERATORS AND SPECIAL FUNCTION ICS 9

Sine-wave generators, Multivibrators and Triangular wave generator, Saw-tooth wave
generator,ICL8038 function generator, Timer IC 555, IC Voltage regulators – Three terminal fixed
and adjustable voltage regulators – IC 723 general purpose regulator – Monolithic switching
regulator, Low Drop – Out(LDO) Regulators – Switched capacitor filter IC MF10, Frequency to
Voltage and Voltage to Frequency converters, Audio Power amplifier, Video Amplifier, Isolation
Amplifier, Optocouplers and fibre optic IC.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Design linear and nonlinear applications of OP – AMPS
CO 2: Design applications using analog multiplier and PLL
CO 3: Design ADC and DAC using OP – AMPS
CO 4: Generate waveforms using OP – AMP Circuits
CO 5: Analyze special function ICs
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO/PO & 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, ―Linear Integrated Circuits‖, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 2018, Fifth Edition. (Unit I – V)
2. Sergio Franco, ―Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits‖, 4th
Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2016 (Unit I – V)
REFERENCES:
1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, ―OP-AMP and Linear ICs‖, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall /
Pearson Education, 2015.
2. Robert F.Coughlin, Frederick F.Driscoll, ―Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated
Circuits‖, Sixth Edition, PHI, 2014.
3. B.S.Sonde, ―System design using Integrated Circuits‖ , 2nd Edition, New Age Pub,
2001.
4. Gray and Meyer, ― Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits‖, Wiley
International, 5th Edition, 2011.
CMR352 SINGLE BOARD COMPUTERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To know the architecture Single board computers
2. To understand the function and uses of Real time operating system
3. To familiar the python programming
4. To develop the embedded based python programming
5. To experiment the application development in SBC using python programming.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO SINGLE BOARD COMPUTERS 9

On-Board System Architecture - Processor- Architecture – Features - SPI-I2C- UART- USB -
Ethernet- CAN Protocol - Wi-Fi – Bluetooth - HDMI- GPIO- Memory- Input Devices – Camera
Interfacing.

UNIT – II REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM 8

Operating System Architecture – File Systems- Resource Management – Process Scheduling –
Applications.

UNIT – III PYTHON PROGRAMMING 10

Python Language – Using the Interpreter – Python Data Types And Functions – Working With
Data – List, Dictionary And Set – Processing Primitives – List Comprehensions – File Handling
– Object Model Including Variables, Reference Counting, Copying, and Type Checking – Error
Handling Iterative Statement- Conditional Statement – Operators – Arrays Libraries- Library -
GUI Development.

UNIT – IV EMBEDDED PYTHON PROGRAMMING 9

GPIO Programming – Numerical Library- Communication Library- Image Processing – Machine
Learning.

UNIT – V APPLICATIONS 9
Automotive – Mobile Robotics - IOT- Factory Automation - Home Automation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Select the Single board computers for mechatronics system development
CO2: Access the library and functions for Real time operating system
CO3: Write the python programming for various applications
CO4: Use the GPIO and peripherals using embedded based python programming
CO5: Develop the application in SBC using python programming.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

REFERENCES:
1. David Beazley and Brian K. Jones, “Python Cookbook”, O'Reilly Media, 2014
2. Gabriele Manduchi and Ivan CibrarioBertolotti, “Real-Time Embedded Systems: Open-
Source Operating Systems”, CRC Press, 2017.
3. Guttag, John. “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, MIT Press,
2021.
4. NinadSathaye, “Learning Python Application Development”, Packt Publishing, 2016
5. Sai Yamanoor, Srihari Yamanoor, “Raspberry-Pi Mechatronics Projects”, Packt Publishing,
2016.
6. Warren Gay, “Mastering the Raspberry Pi”, A press, 2017.
CMR353 RELIABILITY AND MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T PC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To impart knowledge about basic concepts of reliability
2. To learn about various models of reliability
3. To know about maintenance functions and objectives, maintenance planning and
scheduling, maintenance organization.
4. To impart knowledge about Principles of CBM, pillars of condition monitoring, CBM
implementation and benefits
5. To learn about reliability centered maintenance, TPM and FMECA

UNIT – I BASIC CONCEPTS OF RELIABILITY 9

Probability distributions used in maintenance engineering- Binomial, Poisson, Exponential, Normal,
Log-normal, Gamma and Weibull distribution; failure rate, hazard rate, failure modes, MTTR, MTBF,
MTTF

UNIT – II SYSTEM RELIABILITY MODELS 9

System reliability–n-component series systems, m-component parallel systems and combined
system; standby systems; K-out-of-m systems; redundancy techniques
in system design; event space, decomposition (Key Stone), cut and tie sets, Markov analysis,
reliability and quality, unreliability, maintainability, availability

UNIT – III MAINTENANCE CONCEPTS AND STRATEGIES 9

Introduction, maintenance functions and objectives, maintenance planning and scheduling,
maintenance organization. General Introduction to Maintenance Types: Breakdown, emergency,
corrective, predictive, and preventive; maintenance prevention; design-out maintenance, productive
maintenance, shutdown maintenance and scheduled maintenance.

UNIT – IV CONDITION BASED MAINTENANCE 9

Principles of CBM, pillars of condition monitoring, CBM implementation and benefits; condition
monitoring techniques- visual monitoring, vibration monitoring, wear debris monitoring, corrosion
monitoring, performance monitoring

UNIT – V RELIABILITY CENTERED MAINTENANCE (RCM) 9

Concept, methodology, benefits; Total Productive Maintenance: Evolution of TPM, TPM objectives,
concept, pillars of TPM. Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA)/ Failure Modes, Effects and
Criticality Analysis (FMECA): Overview, elements of FMECA, applications and benefits, risk
evaluation, risk priority numbers, criticality analysis, process FMEA, qualitative and quantitative
approach to FMECA; design FMEA and steps for carrying out design FMEA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the students can able to
CO1: Recognize about basic concepts of reliability
CO2: Know about the various models of reliability
CO3: Apply the various maintenance functions and objectives, maintenance planning and
scheduling, maintenance organization.
CO4: Demonstrate Principles of CBM, pillars of condition monitoring, CBM implementation
CO5: Apply the reliability centered maintenance, TPM and FMECA
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ebeling CE; An Introduction To Reliability & Maintainability Engg McGraw Hill Education;
12th edition , 2017
2. Srinath L.S; Reliability Engineering; East West Press, 2005

REFERENCES:
1. Naikan, V.N.A., Reliability engineering and life testing; PHI,2008
2. Kapur KC and Lamberson LR; Reliability in Engineering Design; Wiley India 1997
3. Telang AD and Telang A; Comprehensive Maintenance Management; PHI
4. Mishra R.C; Reliability and Maintenance Engineering; New age International publisher
2006.
5. Balaguruswamy,E., Reliability Engg; TMH,2017
6. Dhillon; Engg Maintainability- How to design for Reliability and easy maintenance; PHI,
1999.
7. Davidson John; The Reliability of mechanical system; Institution of Mech. Engineers,
London 1994
8. Patrick D.T and O.’Connor; Practical Reliability Engineering; John Wiley and Sons,1991
9. Terje Aven; Reliability and Risk Analysis, Springer Netherlands, 2000
CMR354 INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
2. To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
3. To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
4. To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive
at the optimum system specification and characteristics
5. To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-Economic
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies- Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.

UNIT – II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -traceability
Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -Introduction to
System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System design - Interface
Design.

UNIT – III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines – Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –Mechanical,
Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program -
Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and
Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing -
System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation

UNIT – IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EOL – Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EOL Disposal

UNIT – V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Define, formulate and analyze a problem.
CO 2: Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
CO 3: Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
context
CO 4: Work independently as well as in teams
CO 5: Manage a project from start to finish

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs POs PSOs
& PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO/PO & PSO 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2020.
2. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill, Eleventh
Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 20131. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy –
Managing the Business”, Author House, 2015.
5. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2016.
6. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
7. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013.
CMR355 MEDICAL MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand how to measure biochemical parameters and various physiological
information.
2. To study the need and technique of electrical safety in Hospitals.
3. To study the use of radiation for diagnostic and therapy.
4. To study about recorders and advanced equipment in medicine

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Cell structure – electrode – electrolyte interface, electrode potential, resting and action potential
– electrodes for their measurement, ECG, EEG, EMG – machine description – methods of
measurement – three equipment failures and trouble shooting

UNIT – II TRANSDUCERS FOR BIO-MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 9

Basic transducer principles Types – source of bioelectric potentials – resistive, inductive,
capacitive, fiber-optic, photoelectric and chemical transducers – their description and feature
applicable for biomedical instrumentation – Bio & Nano sensors & application

UNIT – III SIGNAL CONDITIONING, RECORDING AND DISPLAY 9

Input isolation, DC amplifier, power amplifier, and differential amplifier – feedback, op-Amp-
Electrometer amplifier, carrier Amplifier – instrument power supply. Oscillographic –
galvanometric - X-Y, magnetic recorder, storage oscilloscopes – electron microscope – PMMC
writing systems –Telemetry principles – Bio telemetry

UNIT – IV MEDICAL SUPPORT 9

Electrocardiograph measurements – blood pressure measurement: by ultrasonic method –
Plethysmography – blood flow measurement by electromagnetic flow meter cardiac output
measurement by dilution method – phonocardiography – vector cardiography Heart lung
machine – artificial ventilator – Anesthetic machine – Basic ideas of CT scanner – MRI and
ultrasonic scanner – Bio-telemetry – laser equipment and application – cardiac pacemaker –
DC– defibrillator patient safety - electrical shock hazards. Centralized patent monitoring system.

UNIT – V BIO-MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTATION 9

Introduction – computers in medicine – basis of signal conversion and digital filtering data
Reduction technique – time and frequency domain technique – ECG Analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Explain different measurement techniques used in physiological parameters
measurement.
CO2: Describe the sensors and signal conditioning circuits used in biomedical engineering.
CO3: Understand about various amplifiers, recording and display devices.
CO4: Differentiate the working of recorders and explain the advanced systems used in medicine
CO5: Understand about various Bio- medical diagnostics instrumentation.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1
CO2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 1 3 2 1 2 1 1
CO4 1 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 3 1 1 2 1 1
 CO/PO & 1 3 1.8 1 1.6 1 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam M., “Bio Medical Instrumentation”, Anuradha agencies Pub., 2003
2. Cromwell, Weibell and Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, 2nd
Edition, Printice Hall of india , 2014.
3. Siamak Najarian“ Mechatronics in Medicine – A Bio medical engg approach" , McGraw
– Hill Education , 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. Geddes L.A., and Baker, L.E., “Principles of Applied Bio-medical Instrumentation”, 3rd
Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2010
2. Khandpur, R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, TMH, 2009.
3. Tompkins W.J., “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 1998

CMR356 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS
devices.
2. To educate on the rudiments of Micro fabrication techniques.
3. To introduce various sensors and actuators
4. To introduce different materials used for MEMS
5. To educate on the applications of MEMS to disciplines beyond Electrical and
Mechanical engineering.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION 9
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers- Sensors and
Actuators –Introduction to Micro fabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes – New Materials
– Review of Electrical and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices –
Polymers in MEMS– Polyamide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA –
Parylene – Fluorocarbon.

UNIT – II SENSORS 9
Characteristics of sensors - Electrostatic sensors – Parallel plate capacitors – Piezoresistive
sensors – Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stress and strain analysis – Flexural beam
bending - Torsional deflection– Applications to Inertia, Pressure, Tactile and Flow sensors –
Piezoelectric sensors and actuators – piezoelectric effects – piezoelectric materials

UNIT – III ACTUATORS 9

Applications – Interdigitated Finger capacitor – Comb drive devices – Micro Grippers – Micro
Motors - Thermal Sensing and Actuation – Thermal expansion – Thermal couples – Thermal
resistors – Thermal Bimorph - Applications –Magnetic Actuators – Micromagnetic
components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators -Actuation using Shape Memory
Alloys
UNIT – IV MICROMACHINING 9
Silicon Anisotropic Etching – Anisotropic Wet Etching – Dry Etching of Silicon – Plasma
Etching– Deep Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching – Gas Phase Etchants –
Case studies - Basic surface micro machining processes – Structural and Sacrificial Materials
– Acceleration of sacrificial Etch – Striction and Antirestriction methods – LIGA Process -
Assembly of 3D MEMS – Foundry process

UNIT – V APPLICATIONS OF MEMS INERTIAL SENSORS 9

Application to Acceleration, Inertia, Acoustic, Tactile, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors-
Optical MEMS –Lenses and Mirrors -Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.– RF MEMS and
Microfluidics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Recognize MEMS Energy Domains and Transducers, Sensors and Actuators.
CO 2: Select the Various MEMS sensors and its Stress and strain
CO 3: Apply various MEMS actuators in Real time system.
CO4: Demonstrate various micro machining processes, Structural and Sacrificial Materials
CO5: Analyze the various MEMS inertial, tactile, pressure and flow sensors in real time
system
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs POs PSOs
& PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO/PO & 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, "Foundations of MEMS", Pearson Education Inc., 2014, 2ndedition .
2. Stephen D Senturia, "Microsystem Design", Springer Publication, 2001.
3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2008.

REFERENCES:
1. James J.Allen, "Micro Electro Mechanical System Design", CRC Press Publisher, 2010
2. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, "Micro Sensors MEMS and
Smart Devices", John Wiley & Son LTD,2002
3. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000
4. Nadim Maluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House,
2000.
5.Thomas M.Adams and Richard A.Layton, “Introduction MEMS, Fabrication and
Application,” Springer 201
CME396 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T PC
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the process planning concepts to make cost estimation for various products
after process planning
2 To Learn the various Process Planning Activities
3 To provide the knowledge of importance of costing and estimation.
4 To provide the knowledge of estimation of production costing.
5 To learn the knowledge of various Machining time calculations

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS PLANNING 9

Introduction- methods of process planning-Drawing Interpretation-Material evaluation – steps in
process selection-. Production equipment and tooling selection

UNIT – II PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 9

Process parameters calculation for various production processes-Selection jigs and fixture selection
of quality assurance methods - Set of documents for process planning-Economics of process
planning- case studies

UNIT – III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9

Importance of costing and estimation –methods of costing-elements of cost estimation –Types of
estimates – Estimating procedure- Estimation labor cost, material cost- allocation of overhead
charges- Calculation of depreciation cost

UNIT – IV PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 9

Estimation of Different Types of Jobs - Estimation of Forging Shop, Estimation of Welding
Shop,Estimation of Foundry Shop

UNIT – V MACHINING TIME CALCULATION 9

Estimation of Machining Time - Importance of Machine Time Calculation- Calculation of Machining
Time for Different Lathe Operations, Drilling and Boring - Machining Time Calculation for
Milling,Shaping and Planning -Machining Time Calculation for Grinding.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students would be able to
Discus select the process, equipment and tools for various industrial products.
Explain the prepare process planning activity chart.
Explain the concept of cost estimation.
Compute the job order cost for different type of shop floor.
Calculate the machining time for various machining operations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter scalon, “Process planning, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Books, Dec 2002.
2. Sinha B.P, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing co, 1995.

REFERENCES:
1. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2002.
2. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9th Edition, John
Wiley,1998.
3. Russell R.S and Tailor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2003.
4. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production, Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Pearson Education 2001.
5. K.C. Jain & L.N. Aggarwal, “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,
Khanna Publishers 1990.
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
5 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)
 CMR357 VLSI AND FPGA L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the features of programmable logic devices
 To learn the features of various FPGAs and FPAA
 To understand the concepts of synchronous and asynchronous FSMs
 To provide the system design experience with FSMs using PLDs
 To introduce pulse mode approach to asynchronous FSM

UNIT – I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 9

Logic implementation options - Technology trends - Design with Field Programmable devices -
ROM, PLA, PAL - CPLD - XC9500 family - Erasable Programmable Logic Devices - MAX5000,
MAX7000 families.

UNIT – II FPGA AND FPAA 9

Programming Technology, Logic blocks, routing architectures of SRAM-Programmable FPGA
Architectures - XC2000, XC3000, XC4000 – Anti-fuse Programmed FPGAs - Routing Architecture
of the Actel FPGAs - ProASIC plus - Design Applications - Current FPGA Technologies - FPAA
architecture and its reconfiguration.

UNIT – III SYNCHRONOUS FSM DESIGN 9

Choice of Components to be Considered - Architecture Centered around Nonregistered PLDs -
State Machine Designs - Centered around a Shift Register, Centered around a Parallel Loadable
Up/Down Counter - One hot design method - Use of Algorithmic State Machine, Application of one
hot design to serial 2's complementer, parallel to serial adder/subtractor controller- System-level
design: controller, data path, and functional partition.

UNIT – IV ASYNCHRONOUS STATE MACHINE DESIGN 9

Features and need for Asynchronous FSMs - Lumped path delay models for asynchronous FSMs -
Excitation table, state diagrams, K-maps, and state tables - Design of the basic cells by using the
LPD model - design examples - Hazards in Asynchronous FSMs - One-hot design of asynchronous
state machines - Design of fundamental mode FSMs by using PLDs.

UNIT – V PULSE MODE APPROACH TO ASYNCHRONOUS FSM DESIGN 9

Pulse Mode Models and System Requirements - Choice of Memory Elements - Other
Characteristics of Pulse Mode FSMs - Design Examples - Analysis of Pulse Mode FSMs - One-Hot
Programmable Asynchronous Sequencers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Implement the digital designs with programmable logic devices
CO2: Analyze the architectural features of FPGA and FPAA
CO3: Make the system level designs using synchronous and asynchronous FSMs
CO4: Design the fundamental mode FSMs using PLDs
CO5: Apply pulse mode approach to FSM Design
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen M. Trimberger, Edr.,“Field Programmable Gate Array Technology”, Springer Science
Business media, LLC, 2012.
2. Richard F. Tinder, “Engineering Digital Design, Revised Second Edition”, Academic Press,
2000.

REFERENCES:
1. Roger Woods, John McAllister, Gaye Light body and Ying Yi, “FPGA-based implementation of
Signal Processing Systems”, A John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., Publication, 2008.
2. John V. Oldfield, Richard C.Dorf, “Field Programmable Gate Arrays - Reconfigurable logic for
rapid prototyping and implementation of digital systems”, John Wiley & Sons, Reprint, 2008.
3. P. K .Chan& S. Mourad, “Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate Array”, Prentice Hall,
1994.
4. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education Ltd., 8th Edition, 2008.
GE3751 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Sketch the Evolution of Management.
 Extract the functions and principles of management.
 Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
 Study the various HR related activities.
 Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers-
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning
and management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership
– Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control
and performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th
Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Kreitner and MamataMohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 1
2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 1 - 2 - - 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 2
4 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 1 1
5 1 - - 1 1 - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1
AVg. 1.66 1 1 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1.5 1 1.25
GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT PC
3 0 03

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality gurus, TQM
framework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply Techniques
like QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief introduction)
-- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment,
Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal-- Continuous process
improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability-
Bench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark,
Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using the
findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages: Design
FMEA and Process FMEA.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific Standards
- AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-Documentation-
Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Introduction—ISO
14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools, Benchmarking and
FMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
 CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3

TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Bester field,MaryB.Sacre,
HemantUrdhwareshe and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson
Education Asia, RevisedThird Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression,2013.

REFERENCES:
1 Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2 Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3 Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition,2003.
4 Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd.,2006 .
GE3753 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the concept of Engineering Economics.
 Implement various micro economics concept in real life.
 Gaining knowledge in the field of macro economics to enable the students to have
better
 Understanding of various components of macro economics.
 Understanding the different procedures of pricing.
 Learn the various cost related concepts in micro economics.

UNIT I DEMAND & SUPPLY ANALYSIS 9

Managerial Economics - Relationship with other disciplines - Firms: Types, objectives and goals -
Managerial decisions - Decision analysis.Demand - Types of demand - Determinants of demand -
Demand function – Demand elasticity - Demand forecasting - Supply - Determinants of supply -
Supply function -Supply elasticity.

UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9

Production function - Returns to scale - Production optimization - Least cost input -
Isoquants - Managerial uses of production function. Cost Concepts - Cost function - Determinants
of cost - Short run and Long run cost curves - Cost Output Decision - Estimation of Cost.

UNIT III PRICING 9

Determinants of Price - Pricing under different objectives and different market structures
- Price discrimination - Pricing methods in practice.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - Financial
Ratio Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis - Comparative
financial statements - Analysis & Interpretation of financial statements.

UNIT V CAPITAL BUDGETING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Investments - Risks and return evaluation of investment decision - Average rate of return
- Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will acquire the skills to apply the
basics of economics and cost analysis to engineering and take economically sound
decisions
CO2: Evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies
CO3: Understand the market structures and integration concepts
CO4: Understand the measures of national income, the functions of banks and concepts of
globalization
CO5: Apply the concepts of financial management for project appraisal

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,2001.
2. Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases - P. L. Mehta, Edition, 13. Publisher,
Sultan Chand, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.
Press, Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New
York, 2011.
4. Zahid A khan: Engineering Economy, "Engineering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
5. Dr. S. N. Maheswari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari: Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2009

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 3
2 3 2 2
3 2
4 2 3 3 2 2 3
5 3 3 3 2 2 2
AVg. 2.5 2.4 3 2 2 1.8 2.6 2
GE3754 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to training
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to performance
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to compensation
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to human factors
consideration and compliance with human resource requirements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9

The importance of human resources – Objective of Human Resource Management - Human
resource policies - Role of human resource manager.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Internal and External sources of Human Resources -
Recruitment - Selection – Socialization.

UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of training and Executive development methods – purpose – benefits.

UNIT IV EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Career Development - Mentor – Protege relationships.

UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Performance evaluation – Feedback - The control process – Importance – Methods – grievances
–Causes – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Students would have gained knowledge on the various aspects of HRM
CO2: Students will gain knowledge needed for success as a human resources professional.
CO3: Students will develop the skills needed for a successful HR manager.
CO4: Students would be prepared to implement the concepts learned in
the workplace.
CO5: Students would be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, "Human Resource Management", 8th Edition, Wiley, 2007.
2. John Bernardin. H., "Human Resource Management – An Experimental Approach", 5th
Edition,Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. Luis R,. Gomez-Mejia, DavidB. Balkin and Robert L. Cardy, “Managing Human Resources", 7th
Edition, PHI, 2012.
2. Dessler, "Human Resource Management", Pearson Education Limited, 2007.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 2.8 2.8 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.4 1 1.4 1 1 1.4 1
GE3755 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 Learn the Evolution of Knowledge management.
 Be familiar with tools.
 Be exposed to Applications.
 Be familiar with some case studies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: An Introduction to Knowledge Management - The foundations of knowled
ge management- including cultural issues- technology applications organizational concepts and
processes- management aspects- and decision support systems. The Evolution of Knowledge
management: From Information Management to Knowledge Management - Key Challenges Facing
the Evolution of Knowledge Management - Ethics for Knowledge Management.

UNIT II CREATING THE CULTURE OF LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE

SHARING 9
Organization and Knowledge Management - Building the Learning Organization. Knowledge
Markets: Cooperation among Distributed Technical Specialists – Tacit Knowledge and Quality
Assurance.

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT-THE TOOLS 9

Telecommunications and Networks in Knowledge Management - Internet Search Engines and
Knowledge Management - Information Technology in Support of Knowledge Management -
Knowledge Management and Vocabulary Control - Information Mapping in Information Retrieval -
Information Coding in the Internet Environment - Repackaging Information.

UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION 9

Components of a Knowledge Strategy - Case Studies (From Library to Knowledge Center,
Knowledge Management in the Health Sciences, Knowledge Management in Developing
Countries).

UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced topics and case studies in knowledge management - Development of a knowledge
management map/plan that is integrated with an organization's strategic and business plan - A case
study on Corporate Memories for supporting various aspects in the process life -cycles of an
organization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Understand the process of acquiry knowledge from experts
CO2: Understand the learning organization.
CO3: Use the knowledge management tools.
CO4: Develop knowledge management Applications.
CO5: Design and develop enterprise applications.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1
2 2 1
3 2 2
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
AVg. 1 1.4 1 1 1.33
TEXT BOOK:
1. Srikantaiah, T.K., Koenig, M., “Knowledge Management for the Information Professional”
Information Today, Inc., 2000.

REFERENCE:
1. Nonaka, I., Takeuchi, H., “The Knowledge-Creating Company: How Japanese Companies
Create the Dynamics of Innovation”, Oxford University Press, 1995.
GE3792 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To study the basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors
to management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function
in professional organizations.
2 To study the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in
3 professional organization.
4 To study the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
5 To learn the organizational theory in professional organization.
6 To learn the principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9

Management: Introduction; Definition and Functions – Approaches to the study of Management –
Mintzberg’s Ten Managerial Roles – Principles of Taylor; Fayol; Weber; Parker – Forms of
Organization: Sole Proprietorship; Partnership; Company (Private and Public); Cooperative –
Public Sector Vs Private Sector Organization – Business Environment: Economic; Social; Political;
Legal – Trade Union: Definition; Functions; Merits & Demerits.
UNIT – II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT – I 9
Planning: Characteristics; Nature; Importance; Steps; Limitation; Planning Premises; Strategic
Planning; Vision & Mission statement in Planning– Organizing: Organizing Theory; Principles;
Types; Departmentalization; Centralization and Decentralization; Authority & Responsibility –
Staffing: Systems Approach; Recruiting and Selection Process; Human Resource Development
(HRD) Concept and Design.

UNIT – III FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT – II 9

Directing (Leading): Leadership Traits; Style; Morale; Managerial Grids (Blake-Mounton, Reddin)
– Communication: Purpose; Model; Barriers – Controlling: Process; Types; Levels; Guidelines;
Audit (External, Internal, Merits); Preventive Control – Decision Making: Elements; Characteristics;
Nature; Process; Classifications.

UNIT – IV ORGANIZATION THEORY 9

Organizational Conflict: Positive Aspects; Individual; Role; Interpersonal; Intra Group; Inter
Group; Conflict Management – Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory; Herzberg’s motivation-
hygiene theory; McClelland’s three needs motivation theory; Vroom’s valence-expectancy theory
– Change Management: Concept of Change; Lewin’s Process of Change Model; Sources of
Resistance; Overcoming Resistance; Guidelines to managing Conflict.

UNIT – V PRODUCTIVITY AND MODERN TOPICS 9

Productivity: Concept; Measurements; Affecting Factors; Methods to Improve – Modern Topics
(concept, feature/characteristics, procedure, merits and demerits): Business Process
Reengineering (BPR); Benchmarking; SWOT/SWOC Analysis; Total Productive Maintenance;
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP); Management of Information Systems (MIS).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Explain basic concepts of management; approaches to management; contributors to
management studies; various forms of business organization and trade unions function in
professional organizations.
CO2 Discuss the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
CO3 Apply the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in professional
organization.
CO4 Discuss the organizational theory in professional organization.
CO5 Apply principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Govindarajan and S. Natarajan, “Principles of Management”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
2009.
2. Koontz. H. and Weihrich. H., “Essentials of Management: An International Perspective”, 8th
Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Joseph J, Massie, “Essentials of Management”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 1987.
2. Saxena, P. K., “Principles of Management: A Modern Approach”, Global India Publications,
2009.
3. S.Chandran, “Organizational Behaviours”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
4. Richard L. Daft, “Organization Theory and Design”, South Western College Publishing, 11th
Edition, 2012.
5. S. TrevisCerto, “Modern Management Concepts and Skills”, Pearson Education, 2018.

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO PSO
C
1 1 1
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3
0 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
 MANDATORY COURSES I

MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000

COURSE OUTLINE

UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.

UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.

UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America. Women’s Movement in India.

UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender. Gender and narratives.

UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.

Gender and Representation in Alternative Media. Gender and social

media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC

3 000

OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence through an art
form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature as suitable modes of
expressing human experience.
1. COURSE CONTENTS
Introduction to Elements of Literature

1. Relevance of literature
a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.
b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.
c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.
d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.

2. Elements of fiction
a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.
b) Fictional modes and patterns.
c) Plot character and perspective.

3. Elements of poetry
a) Emotions and imaginations.
b) Figurative language.
 c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).
d) Personification and animation.
e) Rhetoric and trend.

4. Elements of drama
a) Drama as representational art.
b) Content mode and elements.
c) Theatrical performance.
d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.
e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.

3. READINGS:
1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.
2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.
3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv Press,
1991.
4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.
5. The Elements of Drama, J.L.Styan, Literary Licensing, 2011.

3.1 Textbook:
1.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual
student so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.

4. OTHER SESSION:
4.1*Tutorials:
4.2*Laboratory:
4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular
piece of literature

5.*ASSESSMENT:
5.1HA:
5.2Quizzes-HA:
5.3Periodical Examination: one
5.4Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of
poetry, fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given
context; sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.
5.5Final Exam:
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:

 Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and appreciate
its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.
MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LTPC
3 000
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of film
as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over a
century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances of
a film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.
Theme - A: The Component of Films
A-1: The material and equipment
A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film

Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language

B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.
B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies
Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation
C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation
Theme – D: Development of Films
D-1: Representative Soviet films
D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system
Theme - E: Indian Films
E-1: The early era
E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India

READING:
A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.
MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC
300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction, disaster
management
 To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response

UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc – Technological
disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts including social,
Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster vulnerability profile of India
and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics, Complex emergencies, -
-, Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable development Goals

UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9

Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural
measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local
Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories
from Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and Local
resources.

UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation, rehabilitation
and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management – Compensation
and Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related policies, plans,
programmers and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and Central Level-
(NDMA –SDMA-DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)

UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role of
GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response and
Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for disaster
Management

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9

Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press

COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment
prevention and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
Disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity

CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
 MANDATORY COURSES II

MX3085 WELL-BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA L T P C

SIDDHA 3 0 00

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health also
 To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
 To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
 To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
 To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health disorders
UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4
Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than
treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health - Financial
health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health - Environmental
health - Occupational/Professional heath.

Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases -
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer –
diabetes - chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of
physical activities.

Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.

Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care
of health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time

Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet
according to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) - Maintaining
BMI-Importance and actions to be taken

UNIT II DIET 4+6

Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day - nutrients
one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent diet-related
illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy weight - helps to
reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis – hypertension – PCOD –
infertility – ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart diseases - keeps the teeth and
bones strong.
Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.

Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions

Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM

Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method

UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH as
a soft therapy.
Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation and
healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.

Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory -

Pancheekarana Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-
Dosha Theory) - Udal Thathukkal

Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine

Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the rate
of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary Prevention - To
decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.

UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4

Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health -
Role of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading
a healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.

Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life -
Identifying the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training,
professional help) - Complications of stress mismanagement.

Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.
Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity

UNIT V YOGA 2+12

Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for individuals
according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and prevention of
health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your Body,
by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California

REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard
D.Roberts
2. A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England
The Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D, Published
by The Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh Avenue, Suite 1200,
New York, NY 10001

1. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC4799645/
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/diet-nutrition/changing-habits-better-
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20to%20c
ook.
3. Read more: https://www.legit.ng/1163909-classes-food-examples-functions.html
4. https://www.yaclass.in/p/science-state-board/class-9/nutrition-and-health-5926
 5. Benefits of healthy eating https://www.cdc.gov/nutrition/resources-publications/benefits-
of-healthy-eating.html
6. Food additives https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/food-
additives
7. BMI https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/healthy-weight/
https://www.who.int/europe/news-room/fact-sheets/item/a-healthy-lifestyle---who-
recommendations
8. Yoga https://www.healthifyme.com/blog/types-of-yoga/
https://yogamedicine.com/guide-types-yoga-styles/
Ayurveda : https://vikaspedia.in/health/ayush/ayurveda-1/concept-of-healthy-living-in-
ayurveda
9. Siddha : http://www.tkdl.res.in/tkdl/langdefault/Siddha/Sid_Siddha_Concepts.asp
10. CAM : https://www.hindawi.com/journals/ecam/2013/376327/
11. Preventive herbs : https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3847409/

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
 Learn the importance of different components of health
 Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
 Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
 Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health
MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC
3 0 00

UNIT- I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES

Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation
verses evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.

UNIT- II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S. Irfan
Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.

UNIT- III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times
Science and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.

UNIT-IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest

UNIT-V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA

Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions

UNIT-VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA

Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology
Science and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC
3 0 00

Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)

OBJECTIVES:
 This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how different
political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end with a critique of
different systems and their implementations in the past, with possible future directions.

COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self,
harmony in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)

(Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)

Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)
(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)

Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)

Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.

(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)

Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)

Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)

(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)

Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)

(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)

Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)

Conclusion (2 lectures)

Total lectures: 39

Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books

Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be
provided.

GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy, political
and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires with some case
studies of how different attempts have been made in the past and how they have fared.
MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC
3 0 00
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its main
organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing
contours in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students
with the main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in
India, reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the Constitution
of India and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and issues
concerning national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the contemporary
context with the aim of developing a future vision for a better India.

TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.

Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.

Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.

1857 and the national awakening.

1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its

legacies. Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy.
Why a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.

Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future
scenario. What can we do?

OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:

It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building in
India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in correct
perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the system
with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who is often
left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of dissatisfaction and
difficulties for the system.

SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy,
Picador India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY LT PC
3 0 00
OBJECTIVES
 To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
 To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
 To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
 To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
 To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.

UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES

Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) -
Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and
chronic Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety
Policy-Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS

UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006

UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES

Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action
Plan- Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment

UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY

Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety-
Toxic gas Release

UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES

Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk Assessment-
Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification and Risk
Assessment
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

Course outcomes on completion of this course the student will be able:

 Understand the basic concept of safety.
 Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
 Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
 Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
 Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.
TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education
REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process Industries.Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA

ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization https://www.iso.org/standard/63787.html
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.14489.1998.pdf
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.15656.2006.pdf

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Understand the
CO1 basic concept of 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
safety.
Obtain knowledge
CO2 of Statutory
2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Regulations and
standards.
Know about the
CO3 safety Activities of 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
the Working Place.
Analyze on the
CO4 impact of
Occupational 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and
their Remedies
Obtain knowledge
CO5 of Risk
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Assessment
Techniques.
Industrial safety 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
 OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

OCS351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING FUNDAMENTALS L T P C

202 3
OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
1. Understand the importance, principles, and search methods of AI
2. Provide knowledge on predicate logic and Prolog.
3. Introduce machine learning fundamentals
4. Study of supervised learning algorithms.
5. Study about unsupervised learning algorithms.

UNIT I INTELLIGENT AGENT AND UNINFORMED SEARCH 6

Introduction - Foundations of AI - History of AI - The state of the art - Risks and Benefits of AI -
Intelligent Agents - Nature of Environment - Structure of Agent - Problem Solving Agents -
Formulating Problems - Uninformed Search - Breadth First Search - Dijkstra's algorithm or uniform-
cost search - Depth First Search - Depth Limited Search

UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING WITH SEARCH TECHNIQUES 6

Informed Search - Greedy Best First - A* algorithm - Adversarial Game and Search - Game theory
- Optimal decisions in game - Min Max Search algorithm - Alpha-beta pruning - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems (CSP) - Examples - Map Coloring - Job Scheduling - Backtracking Search
for CSP
UNIT III LEARNING 6
Machine Learning: Definitions – Classification - Regression - approaches of machine learning
models - Types of learning - Probability - Basics - Linear Algebra – Hypothesis space and inductive
bias, Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross validation, Concept of over fitting, under fitting, Bias
and Variance - Regression: Linear Regression - Logistic Regression

UNIT IV SUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Neural Network: Introduction, Perceptron Networks – Adaline - Back propagation networks -
Decision Tree: Entropy – Information gain - Gini Impurity - classification algorithm - Rule based
Classification - Naïve Bayesian classification - Support Vector Machines (SVM)

UNIT V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Unsupervised Learning – Principle Component Analysis - Neural Network: Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets - Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps – Clustering: Definition - Types of
Clustering – Hierarchical clustering algorithms – k-means algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Programs for Problem solving with Search
1. Implement breadth first search
2. Implement depth first search
3. Analysis of breadth first and depth first search in terms of time and space
4. Implement and compare Greedy and A* algorithms.
Supervised learning
5. Implement the non-parametric locally weighted regression algorithm in order to fit data points.
Select appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs
6. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based algorithm.
7. Build an artificial neural network by implementing the back propagation algorithm and test the
same using appropriate data sets.
8. Write a program to implement the naïve Bayesian classifier.
Unsupervised learning
9. Implementing neural network using self-organizing maps
10. Implementing k-Means algorithm to cluster a set of data.
11. Implementing hierarchical clustering algorithm.
Note:
 Installation of gnu-prolog, Study of Prolog (gnu-prolog).
 The programs can be implemented in using C++/JAVA/ Python or appropriate tools can be
used by designing good user interface
 Data sets can be taken from standard repositories
(https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets.html) or constructed by the students.

OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the foundations of AI and the structure of Intelligent Agents
CO2: Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
CO3: Study of learning methods
CO4: Solving problem using Supervised learning
CO5: Solving problem using Unsupervised learning
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Fourth
Edition, 2021
2. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing-Wiley India.3 rd ed,

REFERENCES
1. Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.
2. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
3. C. Muller & Sarah Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.

OCS352 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS LTPC

2 023
OBJECTIVES:
 To apprise students with basic knowledge of IoT that paves a platform to understand physical
and logical design of IOT
 To teach a student how to analyse requirements of various communication models and
protocols for cost-effective design of IoT applications on different IoT platforms.
 To introduce the technologies behind Internet of Things(IoT).
 To explain the students how to code for an IoT application using Arduino/Raspberry Pi open
platform.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Evolution of Internet of Things – Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT Models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack – Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT

UNIT II COMPONENTS IN INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Functional Blocks of an IoT Ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects – Control Units -
Communication modules (Bluetooth, Zigbee,Wifi, GPS, GSM Modules)

UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES BEHIND IOT 6

IOT Protocols - IPv6, 6LoWPAN, MQTT, CoAP - RFID, Wireless Sensor Networks, BigData
Analytics, Cloud Computing, Embedded Systems.
UNIT IV OPEN PLATFORMS AND PROGRAMMING 7
IOT deployment for Raspberry Pi /Arduino platform-Architecture –Programming – Interfacing –
Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting to the Cloud.

UNIT V IOT APPLICATIONS 7

Business models for the internet of things, Smart city, Smart mobility and transport, Industrial IoT,
Smart health, Environment monitoring and surveillance – Home Automation – Smart Agriculture
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
2. Interfacing Arduino to Zigbee module
3. Interfacing Arduino to GSM module
4. Interfacing Arduino to Bluetooth Module
5 Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
6. Interfacing sensors to Raspberry PI
7. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
8. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
9. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
10.Design an IOT based system
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO 1:Explain the concept of IoT.
CO 2:Understand the communication models and various protocols for IoT.
CO 3:Design portable IoT using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform
CO 4:Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
CO 5:Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”,
CISCO Press, 2017
2. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, 2015

REFERENCES
1. Perry Lea, “Internet of things for architects”, Packt, 2018
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
3. IOT (Internet of Things) Programming: A Simple and Fast Way of Learning, IOT Kindle Edition.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015
6. https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet

OCS353 DATA SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS LTPC

2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Familiarize students with the data science process.
● Understand the data manipulation functions in Numpy and Pandas.
● Explore different types of machine learning approaches.
● Understand and practice visualization techniques using tools.
● Learn to handle large volumes of data with case studies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model –
presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic statistical
descriptions of Data

UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION 9

Python Shell - Jupyter Notebook - IPython Magic Commands - NumPy Arrays-Universal Functions
– Aggregations – Computation on Arrays – Fancy Indexing – Sorting arrays – Structured data – Data
manipulation with Pandas – Data Indexing and Selection – Handling missing data – Hierarchical
indexing – Combining datasets – Aggregation and Grouping – String operations – Working with time
series – High performance

UNIT III MACHINE LEARNING 5

The modeling process - Types of machine learning - Supervised learning - Unsupervised learning -
Semi-supervised learning- Classification, regression - Clustering – Outliers and Outlier Analysis

UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION 5

Importing Matplotlib – Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and
contour plots – Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization –
three dimensional plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn

UNIT V HANDLING LARGE DATA 5

Problems - techniques for handling large volumes of data - programming tips for dealing with large
data sets- Case studies: Predicting malicious URLs, Building a recommender system - Tools and
techniques needed - Research question - Data preparation - Model building – Presentation and
automation.
30 PERIODS

PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS

LAB EXERCISES
1. Download, install and explore the features of Python for data analytics.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Basic plots using Matplotlib
5. Statistical and Probability measures
a) Frequency distributions
b) Mean, Mode, Standard Deviation
c) Variability
d) Normal curves
e) Correlation and scatter plots
f) Correlation coefficient
g) Regression

6. Use the standard benchmark data set for performing the following:
a) Univariate Analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b) Bivariate Analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling.
7. Apply supervised learning algorithms and unsupervised learning algorithms on any data set.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on any data set.

Note: Example data sets like: UCI, Iris, Pima Indians Diabetes etc.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on data science process.
CO2: Perform data manipulation functions using Numpy and Pandas.
CO3 Understand different types of machine learning approaches.
CO4: Perform data visualization using tools.
CO5: Handle large volumes of data in practical scenarios.

TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”,
Manning Publications, 2016.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016.

REFERENCES
1. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea
Press,2014.

CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
 To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the
development of AR/VR enabled applications.
 To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
 To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
 To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human Auditory
System.

UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface
Deformation – Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model
Management.
UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6
VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D
UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications
– Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in Robotics
– Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.
UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5
Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS

PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS

1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures over
them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full haptic
interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2: Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3: Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4: Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5: Develop AR/VR applications in different domains

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003

OPEN ELCTIVE III

OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE DESCRIPTION:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these
examinations.

Objectives:
 To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
 To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills
to tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
 To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
 To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
 To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication

UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal
reasoning - Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage – Synonyms-
antonyms – Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly confused words
– Spellings – Word expansion – New words in use.

UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences –
Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement –
Voice – Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.

UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.

UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types of
essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose –
Structure, Content and Style.

UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and
intonation - Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases – Interactive
communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions – Giving an
oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself - Utterance –
Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 Expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range
of texts with the emphasis required
 Identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
 Understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
 Communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
 Write topic based essays with precision and accuracy

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using
multimedia.

Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%

TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.

REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2008.

Websites
http://www.examenglish.com/, http://www.ets.org/ , http://www.bankxams.com/
http://civilservicesmentor.com/, http://www.educationobserver.com
http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/

OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 . to understand the importance of sustainable development
 to acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control and
environmental management
 to comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development

UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9

Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects of
Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes

UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development,
Non-renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability,
Nuclear resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development:
Programme and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators
UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9
Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies

UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution, Environmental
Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal Protection of
Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing environmental laws,
Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining
sustainable development
CO2 Have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO 3 Present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO 4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO 5 understand the environmental legislations

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in
international environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient
BlackSwan, India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.

OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT-I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local
Governance

UNIT-II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,

UNIT-III (9)
Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers
Associations, etc.

UNIT- IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors, E‐
governance
UNIT-V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. J.Dreze and A.Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.

CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
2 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
3 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
4 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
5 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.

UNIT – I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy status-
Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy consumption
- Future energy plans

UNIT – II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems
– Solar PV applications.

UNIT – III WIND ENERGY 9

Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine – Wind
turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues - Applications.

UNIT – IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical conversion-
mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration –-
Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol production -
Applications.

UNIT – V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants – Applications
- Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
 Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
 Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 Explain the various wind energy technologies.
 Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy | Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-10 :
9390385636
2. Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707

REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha
Science Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
 development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
 use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
 Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
 Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems
UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9
Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies
UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9
Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user,
User persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and
field visit
UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9
Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design
UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9
Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution concept;
explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and feasibility.
Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution concepts

UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
● Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
● Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
● Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario

TEXT BOOKS
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos, (2014),
Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.

REFERENCES
1. https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking#process
2. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-
49f253ca86 24
3. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
5. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85

MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
 Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate 3D
model

UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9

Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering -
Surface and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.
UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9
.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength –
Hardness –Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally Induced
Failure Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis - Manufacturing
Process Verification.

UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis –
Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.

UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques for
Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by step
procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry. Case
studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.Legality: Patent – Copyrights –Trade
Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system compatibility
in reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Analyze the various legal aspect
 Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.

OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING L TP C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
 To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
 To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
 To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
 To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.

UNIT – I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability

UNIT – II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9

Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental issues
pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce costs -
Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability

UNIT – III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9

Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of
sustainable practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of
sustainability indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –
Cost and time model.

UNIT – IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.

UNIT – V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016,
ISBN-13: 978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN:
978-1-848-21212-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United
States, ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United
States, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
 3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub system
design and hybrid vehicle control.

UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle. Various
Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric Vehicle
Recharging and Refuelling Systems.

UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick Charging
devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell. Ultra
capacitors. Battery Management System.

UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9

Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors
working principle, construction and characteristics.

UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC -
Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM
motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes

UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different configurations
of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation modes - Control
Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on specification of electric
and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
2. Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
3. Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
4. Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
5. Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.

REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
 Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
 Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
 Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
 Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.

UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6

History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.

UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity profile
- Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and geometry -
Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.

UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9

Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.

UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10

Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.
UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10
History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital
elements - Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John Wiley,
NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective " American
Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.

REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.

OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
 To understand the approaches to the study of Management
 To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
 To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
 To know about the Supply Chain Management’

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of
Directors - Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade
Union

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9

Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises - Decision
Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and staff -
Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement - Performance
appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing human factor -
Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling techniques,
productivity and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.

UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9

Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception -
Organizational Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories -
Process Theories - Job Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and
approaches.
UNIT IV GROUPDYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process - Barriers
to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal characteristics –
Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role in Group Decision,
Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations and conflict,
Organization centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal - Organizational Structures
Organizational Change and Development -Change Process – Resistance to Change - Culture and
Ethics.

UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9

Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4 : Analyze the learning curves
CO5 : Understand the placement and performance appraisal

REFERENCES:
1. Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6

OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
 Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its techniques.
 Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
 Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
 Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function

UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control
charts for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and
application.
UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9
Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart,
Xchart with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and exponentially
weighted moving average control charts.

UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
chart.Gauge capability studies,setting specification limits.

UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1
5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1

OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1:To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
2:To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for non-
combustibility & fire resistance
3:To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
4:To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to fire
damage.
5:To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic and
quality-based study programmes

UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the
properties of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural
materials on fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.
UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9
Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence
of fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-
standard heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.

UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local barriers;
Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low combustible,
Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight sealing of
doors;

UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9

Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire
protection of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged structures-
Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair techniques- repair
methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel structural members,
Repair to masonry structures.

UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9

Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs -
Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1:Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2:Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating
of a building.
CO3:To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4:To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and
their repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5:Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford, UK,2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
2. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New York,
U.S.A.1983.
3. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010. 4.
Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth Edition ,1999
4. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -

OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.
 Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes and
standards.
 Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
 Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
 Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given application

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9

Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical testing,
Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental factors, visual
perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and fibroscopes – light
sources and special lighting.

UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers
and cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.

UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9

Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes,
EMAT. Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of
scanning and displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique,
Thickness determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations, calibration.
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages
& Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9
Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and
screens, Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real Time,
CT scan). Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure charts,
Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.
2. Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
3. Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
4. Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for
better evaluation.
5. Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the influence
of various parameters on the testing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.
2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata McGraw-
Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.

PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3

OMR351 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
2. Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also interpret and
develop programs.
3. Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with microprocessor.
4. Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
5. Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9
Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of
Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges –
Eddy Current Sensor – Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.

UNIT – II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085.

UNIT – III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9

Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and
DAC Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.

UNIT – IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9

Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters
and Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.

UNIT – V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics, Stages
of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design
Concepts with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot –
Engine Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2: Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also
interpret and develop programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with
microprocessor.
CO 4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO 5: Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with
the 8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
 2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
 To learn the different component systems and functions
 To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
 To learn the basics of different structures & construction
 To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts

UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8

Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.

UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.

UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9

Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.

UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.

UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9

Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust production-
Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
 Illustrate the history of aircraft & developments over the years
 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. . E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.

REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS
Kataraia & sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989

OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements of
data interpretation

UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s
Boltzmann law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities

UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for
vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.

UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9

Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital perturbations
and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne platforms and Space
borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and Geosynchronous satellites –
Lagrange Orbit.

UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites

UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9

Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -
Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image classification

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO 1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO 2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
CO 3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO 4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO 5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, AmericanSociety
of Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van
Zyl, 2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011

CO-PO MAPPING

PO Graduate Attribute Course Outcome

CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions

OAI351 URBAN AGRICULTURE LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students the principles of agricultural crop production and the production
practices of crops in modern ways.
 To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production practices.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Benefits of urban agriculture- economic benefits, environmental benefits, social and cultural benefits,
educational, skill-building and job training benefits, health, nutrition and food accessibility benefits.
UNIT II VERTICAL FARMING 9
Vertical farming- types, green facade, living/green wall-modular green wall , vegetated mat wall-
Structures and components for green wall system: plant selection, growing media, irrigation and
plant nutrition: Design, light, benefits of vertical gardening. Roof garden and its types. Kitchen
garden, hanging baskets: The house plants/ indoor plants
UNIT III SOIL LESS CULTIVATION 9
Hydroponics, aeroponics, aquaponics: merits and limitations, costs and Challenges, backyard
gardens- tactical gardens- street landscaping- forest gardening, greenhouses, urban
beekeeping
UNIT IV MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Growth of plants in vertical pipes in terraces and inside buildings, micro irrigation concepts suitable
for roof top gardening, rain hose system, Green house, polyhouse and shade net system of crop
production on roof tops
UNIT V WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Concept, scope and maintenance of waste management- recycle of organic waste, garden
wastes- solid waste management-scope, microbiology of waste, other ingredients like insecticide,
pesticides and fungicides residues, waste utilization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES

1. Demonstrate the principles behind crop production and various parameters that influences the
crop growth on roof tops
2. Explain different methods of crop production on roof tops
3. Explain nutrient and pest management for crop production on roof tops
4. Illustrate crop water requirement and irrigation water management on roof tops
5. Explain the concept of waste management on roof tops

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martellozzo F and J S Landry. 2020. Urban Agriculture. Scitus Academics Llc.
2. Rob Roggema. 2016. Sustainable Urban Agriculture and Food Planning. Routledge Taylor and
Francis Group.
3. Akrong M O. 2012. Urban Agriculture. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing.

REFERENCES:
1. Agha Rokh A. 2008. Evaluation of ornamental flowers and fishes breeding in Bushehr urban
wastewater using a pilot-scale aquaponic system. Water and Wastewater, 19 (65): 47–53.
2. Agrawal M, Singh B, Rajput M, Marshall F and Bell J. N. B. 2003. Effect of air pollution on peri-
urban agriculture: A case study. Environmental Pollution, 126 (3): 323–329.
https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0269749103002458#aep-section-id24.
3. Jac Smit and Joe Nasr. 1992. Urban agriculture for sustainable cities: using wastes and idle land
and water bodies as resources. Environment and Urbanization, 4 (2):141-152.

CO-PO MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 1 1 3 2
 PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 2 1 1
Complex Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 2 1
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 2 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 2 1 2
linkage.

OEN351 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT LTPC

3 003

OBJECTIVE:
 To equip the students with the principles and design of water treatment units and
distribution system.

UNIT I SOURCES OF WATER 9

Public water supply system – Planning, Objectives, Design period, Population forecasting; Water
demand – Sources of water and their characteristics, Surface and Groundwater – Impounding
Reservoir – Development and selection of source – Source Water quality – Characterization –
Significance – Drinking Water quality standards.

UNIT II ONVEYANCE FROM THE SOURCE 9

Water supply – intake structures – Functions; Pipes and conduits for water – Pipe materials –
Hydraulics of flow in pipes – Transmission main design – Laying, jointing and testing of pipes –
appurtenances – Types and capacity of pumps – Selection of pumps and pipe materials.

UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9

Objectives – Unit operations and processes – Principles, functions, and design of water treatment
plant units, aerators of flash mixers, Coagulation and flocculation –- sand filters - Disinfection -–
Construction, Operation and Maintenance aspects.

UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9

Water softening – Desalination- R.O. Plant – demineralization – Adsorption - Ion exchange–
Membrane Systems - Iron and Manganese removal - Defluoridation - Construction and Operation
and Maintenance aspects
UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY 9
Requirements of water distribution – Components – Selection of pipe material – Service reservoirs -
Functions – Network design – Economics - Computer applications – Appurtenances – Leak
detection - Principles of design of water supply in buildings – House service connection –
Fixtures and fittings, systems of plumbing and types of plumbing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO1: An understanding of water quality criteria and standards, and their relation to public
health
CO2: The ability to design the water conveyance system
CO3: The knowledge in various unit operations and processes in water treatment
CO4: An ability to understand the various systems for advanced water treatment
CO5: An insight into the structure of drinking water distribution system

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Garg. S.K., "Water Supply Engineering", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, September 2008.
2. Punmia B.C, Arun K.Jain, Ashok K.Jain, “ Water supply Engineering” Lakshmi publication private
limited, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Rangwala "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", February 2022
4. Birdie.G.S., "Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering", Dhanpat Rai and sons, 2018.

REFERENCES :
1. Fair. G.M., Geyer.J.C., "Water Supply and Wastewater Disposal", John Wiley and Sons,
1954.
2. Babbit.H.E, and Donald.J.J, "Water Supply Engineering" , McGraw Hill book Co, 1984.
3. Steel. E.W.et al., "Water Supply Engineering" , Mc Graw Hill International book Co, 1984.
4. Duggal. K.N., “Elememts of public Health Engineering”, S.Chand and Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 1998.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 1 2 3 1
Avg. 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
 To understand the basics of power converters
 To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
 To understand the architecture and power train components.
 To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical vehicles
(HEVs)
 UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9
Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC
and AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of
special machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.

UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled
rectifiers, controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three phase
inverters, Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.

UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9

Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction motor
and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives

UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN

COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal Combustion
Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) – Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches, Transmission and
Brakes.

UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF

VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory control
- Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode - regeneration mode -
series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric
vehicles.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3

REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition,
10th Impression 2021.
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY, 2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition, Wiley,
2012

OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
2. Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
3. Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
4. Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
5. Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9

Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC
Types.

UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function
Block functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.

UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing,
registers basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison
functions, data handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions,
sequencer instructions

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: - Hardware
and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
 CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Applications,
PHI publication

REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
2. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
3. https://www.etf.ues.rs.ba/~slubura/Procesni%20racunari/Programmable%20Logic%20Contr
ollers%20Programming%20Methods.pdf
4. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9

OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T PC

3 0 03

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical, optical and
magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and applications.
Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of nanomaterials- Nano
catalysis.

UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8

Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods – sol gel
technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase condensation, magnetron
sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation, sputtering.
UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10
Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of composites-
metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and elastomer based-
influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.

UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10

Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice- clusters
of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques, Diffraction methods,
thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9

Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics – Nanobots-
Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications- Practice of
nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 Able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 Describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 Understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 Develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “ Nano
Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial
College Press, 2004
3. William A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition, CRC
Taylor and Francis group 2012.

REFERENCES
1. R.H.J.Hannink & A.J.Hill, Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing Ltd.,Cambridge,
2006.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis,
Properties and Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl & Co
3. Ivor Brodie and Julius J.Muray,’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer
International Edition,2010

COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 understand the basic 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
properties such as
structural, physical,
chemical properties of
nanomaterials and
their applications
CO2 acquire knowledge 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
about the different
types of nano material
synthesis
 CO3 describes about the 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
shape, size,structure
of composite nano
materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
different
characterization
techniques for
nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
knowledge in the
application of
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 3 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1

OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer electronics

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the functions,
Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials, Functional Diversity of
Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal Impact.

UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9

Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few Case
Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly, Directed Assembly-
Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological Applications of SAMs.

UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9

Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet, Synovial fluid,
‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs, Biomineralization- En
route to Nanotechnology.

UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9

Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart Gels
and Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical Limitations
and Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube composities.

UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9

Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs, Illustrated
Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design Considerations, Polymer
FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering Aspects of Flat Panel Displays,
Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs.
Polymer-based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select
appropriate material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and potential of
functional material.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).

REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.

OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and patterns in
India with focus on traditional foods.

UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9

Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and
pastoralization, origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance,
food as religious and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture -
variability, diversity, from basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions on
food habits, heterogeneity within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive
occasions, specific religious festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and
other fasts.
UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9
Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter
and ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency,
yield, shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation –
sundrying, osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.

UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9

Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of India.Regional foods that have gone
Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and preserves,
beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods

UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9

Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and garlic
pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.

UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9

Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes:
East West Books, 2001.

OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This course
will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the producer,
manufacturer and consumer.

UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods, sea
weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives; need
and significance of processing these foods.

UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of raw
and processed foods.

UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and curing
with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion cooking,
snack foods.

UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting
and installing necessary equipment.

UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.

TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.

OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property
Rights in national and international level.
 To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
 This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.

UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.

UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL

INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL).
Geographical Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.

UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9

Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.

UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World Trade
Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related Aspects of
Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law, Practice
and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T. CIPRA,
NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech open
access, Croatia, 2017.

COURSE OUTCOME
The student will be able to
C1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
C2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
C3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
C4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
C5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
C6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on
International Society

CO – PO MAPPING
IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY
PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO11 PO
3 0 12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2

OTT351 BASICS OF TEXTILE FINISHING LT PC

3 00 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics and different types of finishes required for
textile materials and machines used for finishing.

UNIT I RESIN FINISHING 9

Importance of finishing and its classification. Resin finishing: Mechanism of creasing, Types of
Resins .Anti crease, wash and wear, durable press resin finishing. Study about eco friendly method
of anti crease finishing.

UNIT II FLAME PROOF & WATERPROOF 9

Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy. Flame retardant finishes for cotton, Concept of
waterproof and water repellent Finishes, Durable & Semi durable and Temporary finishes, Concept
of Antimicrobial finish.

UNIT III SOIL RELEASE AND ANTISTATIC FINISHES 9

Soil Release Finishing: Mechanism of soil retention & soil release. Anti pilling Finishing: chemical
and mechanical methods to produce anti pilling. Concept of UV Protection finishes- Concept of
antistatic finishes.

UNIT IV MECHANICAL FINISHES 9

Mechanical finishing of textile materials - calendaring, compacting, Sanforising, Peach finishing.
Object of Heat setting. Various methods of heat setting and mechanism of heat setting.
UNIT V STIFFENING AND SOFTENING 9
Concept of stiffening and softening of textile materials. Mechanism in the weight reduction of PET
.Concept of Micro encapsulation techniques in finishing process, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment
and Bio finishing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO: 1 Basics of Resin Finishing Process.
CO: 2 Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy, waterproof and water repellent, Antimicrobial
finishes.
CO: 3 Concept of Soil Release, Anti Pilling, UV Protection and Antistatic finishes.
CO: 4 Concept of Mechanical finishing.
CO: 5 Basics of Micro encapsulation techniques, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.A.Shennai, "Technology of Finishing", Vol X, Sevak Publications, Mumbai
2. Perkins, W.S., “Textile colouration and finishing”, Carolina Academic Press., U.K, ISBN:
0890898855.2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Microencapsulation in finishing, Review of progress of Colouration, SDC, 2001 62
2. Chakraborty, J.N, Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles, Woodhead
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. W. D. Schindler and P. J. Hauser "Chemical finishing of textiles", Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge England,2004.

OTT352 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering and different tools of
industrial engineering and its application in apparel industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Scope of industrial engineering in apparel Industry, role of industrial engineers.
Productivity: Definition - Productivity, Productivity measures .Reduction of work content due to
the product and process, Reduction of ineffective time due to the management, due to the
worker. Causes for low productivity in apparel industry and measures for improvement.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Definition, Purpose, Basic procedure and techniques of work-study.
Work environment – Lighting, Ventilation, Climatic condition on productivity.
Temperature control, humidity control, noise control measures. Safety and ergonomics on
work station and work environment
Material Handling – Objectives, Classification and characteristics of material handling
equipments, Specialized material handling equipments.

UNIT III METHOD STUDY 9

Definition, Objectives, Procedure, Process charts and symbols. Various charts – Charts
indicating process sequence: Outline process chart, flow process chart (man type, material type
and equipment type); Charts using time scale – multiple activity chart. Diagrams indicating
movement – flow diagram, string diagram, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph, travel chart
MOTION STUDY: Principle of motion economy, Two handed process chart, micro motion analysis
– therbligs, SIMO chart.

UNIT IV WORK MEASUREMENT 9

Definition, purpose, procedure, equipments, techniques. Time study - Definition, basics of
time study- equipments. Time study forms, Stop watch procedure. Predetermined motion time
standards (PMTS). Time Study rating, calculation of standard time, Performance rating –
relaxation and other allowances. Calculation of SAM for different garments, GSD.

UNIT V WORK STUDY APPLICATION 9

Application of work study techniques in cutting, stitching and packing in garment industry. Workaids
in sewing, Pitch diagram, Line balancing, Capacity planning, scientific method of training.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Fundamental concepts of industrial Engineering and productivity
CO2: Method study
CO3: Motion analysis
CO4: Work measurement and SAM
CO5: Ergonomics and its application to garment industry
TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study “, ILO, Geneva, 1996, ISBN: 9221071081
|ISBN-13: 9789221071082
2. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989, ISBN:
0898740444 | ISBN-13: 9780898740448
3. Khanna O. P., and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, 2010, ISBN: 818992835X / ISBN: 978-8189928353
REFERENCES
1. Norberd Lloyd Enrick., “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley Eastern (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 1988, ISBN: 0882756311 | ISBN-13: 9780882756318
2. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Wiley-Black well Science,
U.S. A., 1995, ISBN: 0632039396 | ISBN-13: 9780632039395
3. GordanaColovic., “Ergonomics in the garment industry”, Wood publishing India Pvt. Ltd.,
India, 2014, ISBN: 0857098225 | ISBN-13: 9780857098221
4. Rajesh Bheda, “Managing Productivity in Apparel Industry “CBS Publishers & Distributors,
2008
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Program Outcome
Outcom Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO’ PO’ PO PO’ PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9' 10 11 12 O1 O 2 O3
CO1 Fundamental
concepts of
industrial 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
Engineering and
productivity
CO2 Method study 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO3 Motion analysis 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
CO4 Work
measurement and 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
SAM
CO5 Ergonomics and
itsapplication to 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
garment industry
Overall CO 1.2 3 3 2 1
2 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively
OTT353 BASICS OF TEXTILE MANUFACTURE LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about the basics of fibre forming, yarn production, fabric formation,
coloration of fabrics and garment manufacturing

UNIT I NATURAL FIBRES 9

Introduction: Definition of staple fibre, filament; Classification of natural and man-made fibres,
essential and desirable properties of fibres. Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cultivation
of cotton, production of silk (sericulture), wool and jute – physical and chemical structure of these
fibres..

UNIT II REGENERATED AND SYNTHETIC FIBRES 9

Production sequence of regenerated and modified cellulosic fibres: viscose rayon, Acetate Rayon,
high wet modulus and high tenacity fibres; synthetic fibres – chemical structure, fibre forming
polymers, production principles.

UNIT III BASICS OF SPINNING 9

Spinning – principle of yarn formation, sequence of machines for yarn production with short staple
fibres and blends, principles of opening and cleaning machines; yarn numbering - calculations

UNIT IV BASICS OF WEAVING 9

Woven fabric – warp, weft, weaving, path of warp; looms – classification, handloom and its parts,
powerloom, automatic looms, shuttleless looms, special type of looms; preparatory machines for
weaving process and their objectives; basic weaving mechanism - primary, secondary and auxiliary
mechanisms,

UNIT V BASICS OF KNITTING AND NONWOVEN 9

Knitting – classification, principle, types of fabrics; nonwoven process –classification, principle, types
of fabrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students shall have the basic knowledge on
CO1: Classification of fibres and production of natural fibres
CO2: Regenerated and synthetic fibres
CO3: Yarn spinning
CO4: Weaving
CO5: Knitting and nonwoven
TEXTBOOKS
1. Mishra S. P. , “A Text Book of Fibre Science and Technology”, New Age Publishers, 2000,
ISBN: 8122412505
2. Marks R., and Robinson. T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1989, ISBN: 0 900739 258.
3. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN:
185573 333 1.

REFERENCES:
1. Hornberer M., Eberle H., Kilgus R., Ring W. and Hermeling H., “Clothing Technology: From
Fibre to Fabric”, Europa LehrmittelVerlag, 2008, ISBN: 3808562250 / ISBN: 978-
3808562253.
2. Wynne A., “Motivate Series-Textiles”, Maxmillan Publications, London, 1997.
3. Carr H. and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell Science, U.K.,
1994, ISBN: 0632037482 / ISBN:13: 9780632037483.Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of
Spinning, Vol.1”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-1-4 /
ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-1-0.
 4. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.2”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur,
2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-2-2 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-2-7.
5. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1-3”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur,
2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-3-0 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-3-4.
6. Talukdar. M.K., Sriramulu. P.K., and Ajgaonkar. D.B., “Weaving: Machines, Mechanisms,
Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-85401-16-0.
7. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
8. Gohl E. P. G., “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers and distributors, 1987, ISBN 0582685958

OPE351 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM REFINING AND

PETROCHEMICALS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
Gain knowledge about petroleum refining process and production of petrochemical products.

UNIT I ORIGIN, FORMATION AND REFINING OF CRUDE OIL 9

Origin, Formation and Evaluation of Crude Oil. Testing of Petroleum Products. Refining of Petroleum
- Atmospheric and Vacuum Distillation.

UNIT II CRACKING 9
Cracking, Thermal Cracking, Vis-breaking, Catalytic Cracking (FCC), Hydro Cracking, Coking and
Air Blowing of Bitumen

UNIT III REFORMING AND HYDROTREATING 9

Catalytic Reforming of Petroleum Feed Stocks. Lube oil processing- Solvent Treatment Processes,
Dewaxing, Clay Treatment and Hydrofining. Treatment Techniques: Removal of Sulphur
Compounds in all Petroleum Fractions to improve performance.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO PETROCHEMICALS 9

Petrochemicals - Cracking of Naphtha and Feed stock gas for the production of Ethylene, Propylene,
Isobutylene and Butadiene. Production of Acetylene from Methane, and Extraction of Aromatics.

UNIT V PRODUCTION OF PETROCHEMICALS 9

Production of Petrochemicals like Dimethyl Terephathalate(DMT), Ethylene Glycol, Synthetic
glycerine, Linear Alkyl Benzene (LAB), Acrylonitrile, Methyl Methacrylate (MMA), Vinyl Acetate
Monomer, Phthalic Anhydride, Maleic Anhydride, Phenol, Acetone, Methanol, Formaldehyde,
Acetaldehyde, Pentaerythritol and production of Carbon Black.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the classification, composition and testing methods of crude petroleum and its
products. Learn the mechanism of refining process.
CO2: Understand the insights of primary treatment processes to produce the precursors.
CO3: Study the secondary treatment processes cracking, vis-breaking and coking to produce more
petroleum products.
CO4: Appreciate the need of treatment techniques for the removal of sulphur and other impurities
from petroleum products.
CO5: Understand the societal impact of petrochemicals and learn their manufacturing processes.
CO6: Learn the importance of optimization of process parameters for the high yield of petroleum
products.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nelson, W. L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, 4th Edition. McGraw Hill, New
York,1985.
2. Wiseman. P., "Petrochemicals", UMIST Series in Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons,1986.

REFERENCES:
1. Bhaskara Rao, B. K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and
IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Bhaskara Rao, B. K. “A Text on Petrochemicals”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers

CPE334 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
 understand and analyse the energy data of industries
 carryout energy accounting and balancing
 conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings and
 utilise the available resources in optimal ways

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need, Types,
Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy auditing.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of Capacitors,
Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency Computation, Energy
Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting, Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of
Encon in Illumination.

UNIT III THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation and encon
measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery, Flash Steam
Utilization, Insulators & Refractories

UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems –
Cooling Towers – D.G. sets

UNIT V ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present Value,
Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to analyze the energy data of industries.
CO1: Remember the knowledge for Basic combustion and furnace design and
selection of thermal and mechanical energy equipment.
CO2: Study the Importance of Stoichiometry relations, Theoretical air required for
complete combustion.
CO3: Skills on combustion thermodynamics and kinetics.
CO4: Apply calculation and design tube still heaters.
CO5: Studied different heat treatment furnace.
CO6: Practical and theoretical knowledge burner design.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at
www.energymanagertraining.com. a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency
(BEE), a statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford, 1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987

OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships between
material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so on
 To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
 Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and casting)
 To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
 To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products
manufactured by various processing techniques

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs. metals
and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular weight, viscosity
and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset processing. Additives for
plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light stabilizers, UV stabilizers, lubricants,
impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, stabilizers and plasticizers. Compounding:
plastic compounding techniques, plasticization, pelletization.

UNIT II EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws, drive
mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow mechanism:
process variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt fracture, shark skin,
bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of films: blown and cast films.
Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw extruder and its applications.
Applications of extrusion and new developments.

UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9

Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle
mechanisms. Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected area -
Shot weight Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing - Interaction of moulding
process aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types. Reciprocating vs. plunger type
injection moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection moulding. Injection moulding vs. other
plastic processing techniques. State-of-the art injection moulding techniques - Introduction to trouble
shooting
UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9
Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of terms-
Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process cycle, Inter
relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure requirements.
Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of compression mould-
positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their correction- Finishing of
mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press capacity-Integral moulds and
auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot transfer, plunger transfer and screw
transfer moulding techniques, advantages over compression moulding

UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9

Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow moulding.
Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance. Thermoforming: principle,
vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting: working principle, types and
applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
 Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection, blow,
compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
 Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for the
same
 Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various plastic
processing techniques.
 Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product

REFERENCES:
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad Reinhold
Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic Processing
Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS Publishers and
Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley (1973).
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry Inc.,
Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).

OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals,
Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals -
Classification of systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant& Time-
invariant,Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9

Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties

UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace transforms in
Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9

Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties of DTFT
- Z Transform & Properties

UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:Determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: Determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3:Characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4:Characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5:Compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002

REFERENCES:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and MATLAB”,
McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
C 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
O
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS Of ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with
discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital
integrated circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
 To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
 To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator

UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model – Analysis
of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain
and frequency response- High frequency analysis.

UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.

UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback Amplifiers
– positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and
Crystal oscillators.

UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power amplifier
using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and
design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th Edition,
2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 10th
Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 7 th
Edition, 2014.
 REFERENCES:
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd
Edition, 2010.
2. D.Schilling and C.Belove, "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989
3. Muhammad H.Rashid, "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1

CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at
the optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer

UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle –
Product Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability
Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction
to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design -
Interface Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical,
Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program
- Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and
Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing
- System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
 Work independently as well as in teams
 Manage a project from start to finish

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata
McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier],
Oxford, 2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and
Design", McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.
CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
 To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
 To know the developments in assistive technology
UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9
Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra
aortic balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle,
prosthetic heart valves, cardiac pacemaker.

UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis,
portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.
UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9
Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking
techniques, SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based
hearing aids.
UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9
Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis,
feedback in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart
functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three
Volume Set, CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match
Project, Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition,
2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-
323-662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-
Blackwell April 2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1
 CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg.

OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
 Determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
 Study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques
to solve them.
 Acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer
programming problems.
 Acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic
programming problems.
 Determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.

UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M
Method – Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.

UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .

UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch
and bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation
model – Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of
L.P.P by dynamic programming .

UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker
Conditions – Quadratic programming.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
 Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to
develop a linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex
method for solving linear programming problems.
 Analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation
and assignment problems.
  Solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
 Conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and
computational procedure of dynamic programming.
 Determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand
& Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth
Edition , New Delhi, 2012.

REFERENCES :
1. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India
Ltd , Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s
Outlines – TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University
Press, New Delhi , 2012.
4. J.P.Singh and N.P.Singh , " Operations Research , Ane Books Pvt.L.td, New Delhi
, 2014.
5. F.S.Hillier and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata
McGraw Hill, Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -

OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY LT P C

3 00 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.

UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.
UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9
Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of
polynomials over finite fields.

UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite
numbers – GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.

UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications :
Divisibility tests - Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.

UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau
and Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
 Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
 Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
 The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial
problems related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the,
statements proven by the text

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier
Publications , New Delhi , 2002.

REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers”
, John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2 nd Edition ,
2006.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -

OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
 To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
 To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
 To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
 To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix
decomposition.

UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss
elimination method - Gauss Jordan method.

UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear
independence and dependence - Basis and dimension.

UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9

Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem–
Matrix representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear
transformation – Diagonalization.

UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9

Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.

UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9

Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition
– QR decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
1. Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
2. Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
3. Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
4. Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
5. Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix
decomposition.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th
Edition,2019.

REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New
Delhi, 8th Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi,
4th Edition, 2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -

OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and
their pro and cons for living organisms.

UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9

Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types
of microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.

UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9

Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation
methods, fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.

UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9

Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu,
Malaria, Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.

UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9

Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food
Microbiology, Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.

UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9

Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products
– Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Microbes and their types
2. Cultivation of microbes
3. Pathogens and control measures for safety
4. Microbes in different industry for economy.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi,
India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers,
1996.
OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse
background in life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of
various biomolecules and their metabolism.

UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects
of monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and
polysaccharide (Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.

UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9

Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction,
Nomenclature and classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.

UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to
protein, classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide
bond– Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein.
Introduction to lipoprotein, glycoprotein and nucleoprotein.Biological function of protein.

UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of
DNA & amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature·
DNA double helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.

UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9

Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related
diseases. Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of
steroid hormones, epinephrine, glucagons and insulin.Role of vitamins and hormones in
metabolism; Hormonal disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.

OUTCOMES:
Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to
know the importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox
W.H.Freeman and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books &
Allied (P) Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2003.
4. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
5. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y
Doi.pp 693. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.
 REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.

OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
 To understand the signalling mechanisms.
 Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate
growth,
 division and development.

UNIT-I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.

UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9

Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi
apparatus, plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome,
Nucleus and nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.

UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes,
asymmetrical organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s
law, simple diffusion, passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary,
group translocation, transport ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals.
Transportmechanism- mobile carriers and pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation,
endocytosis, exocytosis, cell respiration.

UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation
of cell cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell
junction, cell cycle checkpoints.

UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional
DNA replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA
synthesis: Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic
code- Steps in translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
 Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
 Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2018
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J.
Molecular Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.

OPEN ELECTIVE IV

OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
 Understand the essentials of project writing.
 Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
 Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
 Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
 Learn the structure of a technical and project report.
UNITI 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech,
Concord, Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs.
General Writing.
UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience –
Plagiarism – Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.

UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement –
Funding Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the
research question - Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the
feasibility – Theoretical Framework.
UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of
Data Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations
-Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.
UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format –
Font – Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally –
Techniques.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
 Write effective project reports.
 Use statistical tools with confidence.
 Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
 Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
 Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation
matrix.
REFERENCES:
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition,
Prentice Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project
Finance (2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016)
Penwell
Publishers.

OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9

System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of
linear equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen
value problems: Given's method - Householder's method.

UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for
continuous data (upto 3rd degree).
UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS 9
Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -
Corrector Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value
problems - Orthogonal Collocation method.

UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9

Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes
- Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in
polar coordinates : Finite difference schemes .

UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average
approximation - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations -
Method of characteristics - Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit
scheme – Stability of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications,
Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers,
2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.

REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and
Science", Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th
Edition, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning,
2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES LT P C
3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random
variables with applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in
communication networks.
 To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time
scenario.
 To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.

UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.

UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions -
Stationary Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.

UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.

UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density
– Cross spectral density – Properties.

UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs
– Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
 Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
 Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
 Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian
Reprint, Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis",
Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to
Signal Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd., Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -

OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING LT P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop
probabilistic models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
 To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
 To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up
new avenues for research.

UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.

UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models
– Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.

UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series
queues – Open Jackson networks.

UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9

Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution
– Time - dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.

UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system
with repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering
disciplines.
 Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
 Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to
time in a probabilistic manner.
 Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.
 Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and
availability analyses by using theoretical approach.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”,
John Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi,2010.

REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam,
2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi,1983.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -

OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
 To understand the Production process and planning.
 To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business
owners.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9
Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions
– Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production
and operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production
/operations management - production as an organisational function, decision making in
production Operations research

UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production -
Functions and significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning-
Capacity measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing
and service industry

UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9

Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and
techniques – Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of
production process systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control
Functions – Planning phase- Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning

UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance –
Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant
Layout: meaning – characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design
- Optimisation and Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)-
REL (Relationship) Chart – Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting
methods.

UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control
systems and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality
Management: Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring
quality - Control Chart (X , R , p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement
(Kaizen) - Quality awards - Supply Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma
approach and Zero Defect Manufacturing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO1: To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for
business owners.
CO2: To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
CO3: To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by
entrepreneurs in Industries.
CO4: To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO5: To comprehend the techniques of controlling, Production and Operations in industries.

REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan
India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.
OCE354 BASICS OF INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the interdisciplinary approach of water management.
 To develop knowledge base and capacity building on IWRM.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IWRM 9

Facts about water - Definition – Key challenges - Paradigm shift - Water management
Principles - Social equity - Ecological sustainability – Economic efficiency - SDGs - World
Water Forums.

UNIT II WATER USE SECTORS: IMPACTS AND SOLUTION 9

Water users: People, Agriculture, ecosystem and others - Impacts of the water use sectors
on water resources - Securing water for people, food production, ecosystems and other uses
- IWRM relevance in water resources management.

UNIT III WATER ECONOMICS 9

Economic characteristics of water good and services – Economic instruments – Private sector
involvement in water resources management - PPP experiences through case studies.

UNIT IV RECENT TREANDS IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9

River basin management - Ecosystem Regeneration – 5 Rs - WASH - Sustainable livelihood
- Water management in the context of climate change.

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF IWRM 9

Barriers to implementing IWRM - Policy and legal framework - Bureaucratic reforms and
inclusive development - Institutional Transformation - Capacity building - Case studies on
conceptual framework of IWRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply appropriate management
techniques towards managing the water resources.
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated
ways of water management.
CO2 Discuss on the different water uses; how it is impacted and ways to tackle these impacts.
CO3 Explain the economic aspects of water and choose the best economic option among the
alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP through case studies.
CO4 Illustrate the recent trends in water management.
CO5 Understand the implementation hitches and the institutional frameworks.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and
policy. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2003.
2. Mollinga P. et al. “Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia Volume
I, Sage Publications, 2006.
REFERENCES
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Background Papers No: 1, 4 and 7, Stockholm, Sweden.
2002.
2. IWRM Guidelines at River Basin Level (UNESCO, 2008).
3. Tutorial on Basic Principles of Integrated Water Resources Management ,CAP-NET.
http://www.pacificwater.org/userfiles/file/IWRM/Toolboxes/introduction%20to%20iwrm/T
utorial_text.pdf
4. Pramod R. Bhave, 2011, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers.
5. The 17 Goals, United Nations, https://sdgs.un.org/goals.
OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques
– Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.

UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9

Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for
dealing with missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.

UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9

Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function –
Validation of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.

UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation
models, Longitudinal studies.

UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
 Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate
techniques to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
 Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the
results correctly with detailed and useful information.
 Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
 Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including
thoughtful and convincing details.
 Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘

REFERENCES :
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda S.Fidell, Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson,
2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean W.Wichern, Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002
OCE353 LEAN CONCEPTS, TOOLS AND PRACTICES LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about the basics of lean principles, tools and techniques, and
implementation in the construction industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and overview of the construction project management - Review of Project
Management & Productivity Measurement Systems - Productivity in Construction - Daily
Progress Report-The state of the industry with respect to its management practices -
construction project phases - The problems with current construction management
techniques.

UNIT II LEAN MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to lean management - Toyota’s management principle-Evolution of lean in
construction industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in
construction - Target value design - Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in
construction industry - Waste Elimination.

UNIT III CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact –
Traditional construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction
and workflow reliability – Work structuring – Production control.

UNIT IV LEAN TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull based
production – Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly
planning meeting- Daily Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in
time.

UNIT V LEAN IMPLEMENTATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9

Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology - Lean in
design - Design Structure - BIM (Building Information Modelling) - IPD (Integrated Project
Delivery) – Sustainability through lean construction approach.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Explains the contemporary management techniques and the issues in present
scenario.
CO2 Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from
manufacturing industry to construction industry.
CO3 Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and
techniques and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4 Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5 Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.

REFERENCES:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability
agenda, CIRIA, 2013.
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way,
Springer, 2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P.,Implementing lean
in construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and
techniques, 2002.
5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and
Assessment of Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005.

OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM), and
its business opportunities.
To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting processes.
To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid
Prototyping- Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process
Chain - ASTM/ISO 52900 Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats:
STL, AMF Applications: Building Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing,
Automobile, Aerospace, Healthcare. Business Opportunities in AM.

UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9

Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and
bottom up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP)
- Process - Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.

UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM):
Materials - Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations -
Applications.

UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9

Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications. Directed
Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.

UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9

Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism:
Gluing or Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes,
Aerosol DW - Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and
its applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-
56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for
Prototyping and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-
1-56990-582-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN
:9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC
Press., United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer.,
United States ,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box
for prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.

CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
2 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
3 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
4 To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
5 To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D
model

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note),
Component material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of
monitoring of NPD applying Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of
Materials), Engg. BOM & Manufacturing BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in
industries like SAP, MS Dynamics, Oracle ERP Cloud – QFD.
UNIT – II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9
Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various
manufacturing process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis,
5 Axis, ), Fabrications, Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical &
Chemical properties and their test report preparation and submission. Fundamentals of
DFMEA & PFMEA, Fundamentals of FEA, Bend Analysis, Hot Distortion, Metal and Material
Flow, Fill and Solidification analysis.

UNIT – III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross
Function Team) discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection
for tool making, Machining – Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting
tool selection – Various Inspection methods – Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric
Optical Measuring), Lay out marking and Cut section analysis. Tool Design and Detail
drawings preparation, release of details to machine shop and CAM programing. Tool assembly
and shop floor trials. Initial sample submission with PPAP documents.

UNIT – IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal
Soundness proving through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement
with customer for testing frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis,
validating samples with simulation results, Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.

UNIT – V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9

Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP,
Importance of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in
shop floor. Prototyping & RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin
models, Sand cores for foundries; Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting
cloud data to 3D model – Advantages & Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) –
Basics, Application and its advantages in NPD (to reduce development lead time, time to
Market, Improve productivity and product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product
development
Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing
process.
Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new
product development
Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Product Development – Sten Jonsson
2. Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger

REFERENCES:
1. Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
Change by Design
2. Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
3. Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
4. Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
 Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
 Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
 Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
 Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices

UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology
and Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile
and Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow,
wireframes, best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives

UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT 9

SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development -
understanding Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API -
Introduction to Cloud services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to
cloud - Embedding ML models to Apps - Deploying application.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept
generation - Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D
Modeling Tools - Part creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics -
Dimensioning & Tolerancing

UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical
Prototyping; 3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive
manufacturing

UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with
simulation tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
● Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
● Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
● Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology

TEXT BOOKS
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson,3rd edition(2014)

REFERENCES
1. https://www.adobe.com/products/xd/learn/get-star ted.html
2. https://developer.android.com/guide
3. https://help.autodesk.com/view/fusion360/ENU/courses/
4. https://help.prusa3d.com/en/categor y/prusaslicer_204

MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
 Learn about the precision machine tools
 Learn about the macro and micro components.
 Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
 Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other
instruments.
 Learn metrology for micro system

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9

Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic
etc. for medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal,
mechanical, electrical properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow,
temperature, inertia, force, acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing
systems.

UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro
engines, micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9

Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism
and other piezo-based devices.
UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9
Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free
abrasive processes, finishing processes.

UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
 Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
 Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
 Apply suitable machining process
 Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other
instruments.
 Apply metrology for micro system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and
Development. Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017

REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New
Delhi, 2005

OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT P C

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
Interpret costing concepts with project execution
Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential
cost, Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’

UNIT – II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of
project execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of
technical and nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution
main clearances and documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site:
Data required with significance, Project contracts

UNIT – III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project
commissioning: mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing;
Distinction between Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-
Volume-Profit Analysis, Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto
Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle Costing

UNIT – IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.

UNIT – V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning
Curve Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.

REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler
publisher, 1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd,
2007.
AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LTPC
\ 3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to understand the working and
characteristics of different types of batteries and their management .

UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9

Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging.
Characteristics- SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing. Other
Batteries-NCM and NCA Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.
UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9
Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation Model.Peak power –
definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic Internal
Resistance. Cloud based and Local Smart charging.

UNITIII BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural Network
Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State space Models-
Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks

UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation
Methods- Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks,
Neuro-fuzzy forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.

UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1
Battery Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-
Flex Ray- CANedge1 package.ARBIN Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling
software and Model-Based Design.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
2. Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
3. Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
4. Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
5. Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion
batteriesin Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs”
ARTECH House, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-
whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet
OAU353 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of sensor
and actuators used in automotive vehicles.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9
Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and
standards-Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error-
Probable error-Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-
Classification. Static characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and
Second order transducers-Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for
standard test inputs.

UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9

Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT

UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9

Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-
Humidity Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.

UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9

Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type
ratings for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz.
Solenoid, relay, stepper motor etc.

UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9

Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable
displacement temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable
displacement type air conditioning system.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
2. Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and
flow.
3. Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
4. Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
5. Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin
DhaneshN.Manik McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH,
2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components,
Networking and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.
REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective,"
7th Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.

OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES L T PC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
 To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
 To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration
design.
 To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
 To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9

Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values –
Mission design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on
launch vehicle integrity.

UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9

Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for
stages and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.

UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9

Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems –
Engine Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and
Engine Optimization.

UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9

TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles –
Testing – Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume
problems in space environment

UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9

Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in
the finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection
system - separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
 Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
 Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
 interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
 Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-
entry.
 Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic
vehicle design.
OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
 To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
 To impart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
 To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business
strategies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9

Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of
Management, Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory-
Fayal's Principles of Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas
McGregor's Theory X and Theory Y-HertzbergTwo FactorTheory of Motivation-Leadership
Styles,Social responsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures: Basic
concepts related to Organisation -Departmentation and Decentralisation.

UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass
Production),Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement
– Business Process Reengineering (BPR)-Statistical Quality Control:control charts for
VariablesandAttributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance Sampling, Objectives of Inventory
control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores Management and Store Records -
JIT System,Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing, Marketing Mix, and Marketing
Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.
UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9
Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM
vs PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection,
TrainingandDevelopment,WageandSalaryAdministration,Promotion,Transfer,PerformanceAp
praisal, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –
Capability Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.

UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path
Method (CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time,
Project Cost Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).

UNITV STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC

ISSUES 9
Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning
Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy
Formulation and Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced
Score Cardas Contemporary Business Strategies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to

CO1:Plan an organizational structure for a given context in the organization to carryout
production operations through Work-study.
CO2:Survey the markets,customers and competition better and price the given products
appropriatey
CO3:En sure quality for a given product or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.
PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO’s
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5

TEXT BOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management,Oxford University Press,2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman,Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,NewDelhi,2004.
3. ThomasN.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management Principles and Guidelines,
Biztantra,2007.
4. P.VijayKumar, N.Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.
REFERENCES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch,R.Guptaand William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic
Management Science,McGrawHill,2012.
4. SamuelC.Certo:Modern Management,2012.

OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
 To apply the concept of product planning,
 To analyze the production scheduling,
 To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
 To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect.
Profit consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-
Economics of a new design.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9
Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis,
Development - Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement
- Techniques of work measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling -
Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards.

UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9

Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack
of product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for
process planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-
Machine capacity, balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-
Gantt charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-
Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress
reporting and expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times
and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering
procedures. Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order
quantity and economic lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer
integrated production planning systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals
of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP
II) and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth,”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for
manufacturing and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S.
Chand and Company, 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,
Khanna Publishers, 1990
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university
press, 2007
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE,
2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition,
Excel books 2007
 PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8

OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in
creating and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
 Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and
Operations Management (both manufacturing and service).
 Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas
of a firm.
 Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations
problems.
 Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation
processes, differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions,
challenges, current priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit ,
framework; Supply Chain Management

UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9

Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative andQuantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing
capacity alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP
II and ERP. Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility
Layout – Principles, Types, Planning tools and techniques.

UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9

Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental
issues. Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.

UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9

Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control.
Purchasing – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value
Analysis. Stores Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory –
COURSE OBJECTIVES, Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.

UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers –
nature,importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling
– Johnson‟s Algorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in
enabling and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business
environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for
Production and Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements
and developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3

TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano,
Operations andSupply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western
CengageLearning, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press,
2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition,
2008.

5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,

Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education,
2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India,
SecondEdition, 2008.
OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in
work health and safety.
2. Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health
and safety
3. Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne
gases, vapours and particulates
4. Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
5. Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Comm on
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.

UNIT II MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9

Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method,
Personal hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.

UNIT III OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9

Element of training cycle, Assessment of needs.Techniques of training, design and
development of training programs.Training methods and strategies types of
training.Evaluation and review of training programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting
Safety, Safety and Health training, Stress and Safety, Exposure Limit .

UNIT IV OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9

Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA,
Process Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA
Standards, Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of
Industrial safety, role of safety department,

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9

Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of
radiation intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive
waste, Control of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on
the auditory system and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries,
Effect of different gases and particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health,
Vibration: effects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing
systems and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations
with respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .

REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma
Jourdan publication
2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council
of India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth-
Heinemann Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -

OSF353 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Teach the principles of safety applicable to the design, and operation of chemical
process plants.
 Ensure that potential hazards are identified and mitigation measures are in place to
prevent unwanted release of energy.
 Learn about the hazardous chemicals into locations that could expose employees and
others to serious harm.
 Focuses on preventing incidents and accidents during large scale manufacturing of
chemicals and pharmaceuticals.
 Ensure that the general design of the plant is capable of complying with the dose limits
in force and with the radioactive releases.

UNIT I SAFETY IN THE STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CHEMICALS AND GASES 9

Types of storage-general considerations for storage layouts- atmospheric venting, pressure
and temperature relief - relief valve sizing calculations - storage and handling of hazardous
chemicals and industrial gases, safe disposal methods, reaction with other chemicals, hazards
during transportation - pipe line transport - safety in chemical laboratories.

UNIT II CHEMICAL REACTION HAZARDS 9

Hazardous inorganic and organic reactions and processes, Reactivity as a process hazard,
Detonations, Deflagrations, and Runaways, Assessment and Testing strategies, Self -
heating hazards of solids, Explosive potential of chemicals, Structural groups and instability
of chemicals, Thermochemical screening,

UNIT III SAFETY IN THE DESIGN OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Design principles -Process design development -types of designs, feasibility survey,
preliminary design, Flow diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagram, batch versus
continuous operation, factors in equipment scale up and design, equipment specifications -
reliability and safety in designing - inherent safety - engineered safety - safety during startup
and shutdown - non destructive testing methods - pressure and leak testing - emergency
safety devices - scrubbers and flares- new concepts in safety design and operation- Pressure
vessel testing standards- Inspection techniques for boilers and reaction vessels.

UNIT IV SAFETY IN THE OPERATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS PLANTS 9

Properties of chemicals - Material Safety Data Sheets - the various properties and formats
used - methods available for property determination. Operational activities and hazards -
standards operating procedures - safe operation of pumps, compressors, heaters, column,
reactors, pressure vessels, storage vessels, piping systems - effects of pressure, temperature,
Flow rate and humidity on operations - corrosion and control measures- condition monitoring
- control valves - safety valves - pressure reducing valves, drains, bypass valves, inert gases.
Chemical splashes, eye irrigation and automatic showers.

UNIT V SAFETY AND ANALYSIS 9

Safety vs reliability- quantification of basic events, system safety quantification, Human error
analysis, Accident investigation and analysis, OSHAS 18001 and OSHMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Differentiate between inherent safety and engineered safety and recognize the
importance of safety in the design of chemical process plants.
CO2 Develop thorough knowledge about safety in the operation of chemical plants.
CO3Apply the principles of safety in the storage and handling of gases.
CO4Identify the conditions that lead to reaction hazards and adopt measures to prevent
them.
CO5Develop thorough knowledge about

TEXT BOOK
1 David A Crowl& Joseph F Louvar,”Chemical Process safety”, Pearson publication, 3rd
Edition,2014
2 Maurice Jones .A,”Fire Protection Systems,2nd edition, Jones & Bartlett Publishers,2015

REFERENCES:
1. Ralph King and Ron Hirst,”King´s safety in the process industries”, Arnold, London, 1998.
2. Industrial Environment and its Evolution and Control, NIOSH Publication, 1973.
3. National Safety Council,” Accident prevention manual for industrial operations”. Chicago,
1982.
4. Lewis, Richard. J., Sr,“Sax´s dangerous properties of materials”. (Ninth edition). Van
Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1996.
5. Roy E Sanders, ”Chemical Process Safety”,3rd Edition, Gulf professional publishing, 2006
 CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - -
2 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - 2 -
3 - 3 1 - - - 2 - - 1 - - - -
4 - 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 2
5 - 2 3 - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
AVg. 2 2.5 3 1.5 - 1 - 1.5 1 - 1 2 2 2

OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics
and
 magnetic applications
 Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic
materials.
 Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
 Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
 Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.

UNIT I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength,
breakdown voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric
conductivity in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of
ferromagnetic materials in static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-
ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric materials, pyroelectric materials.

UNIT II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials,
special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent
magnets, ageing of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis

UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large
scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high
temperature superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments
on fabrication and engineering applications.

UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded
conductors, bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon
 materials, thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of
moisture on insulation.

UNIT V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9

Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser
principles - He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials
- LCD materials - photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and
materials - electro optic modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
 Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
 Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
 Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
 Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
 Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and
Francis, 2nd illustrated edition, 2017.
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications,
2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp;
Sons, 2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley &
Sons,Singapore, (2006).

PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO12
0 1 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2
OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to
understand different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
2. Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
3. Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
4. Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise
the nanomaterials
5. Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.

UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their
mechanical, electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.

UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS9

Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity,
grain growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.

UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.

UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and
X-ray absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their
application to nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture,
stress analysis

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings;
applications in electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
2. Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
3. Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
4. Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
5. Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and
Potential Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.

REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003
2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific
Publishers 2004
 3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004

PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3

OMR352 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T PC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To knowledge on fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
2. To obtain the knowledge in hydraulic actuators and control components
3. To understand the basics in hydraulic circuits and systems
4. To obtain the knowledge in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
5. To apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting

UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9

Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of
fluids - Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of
flow - Friction loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power :
Pumping Theory – Pump Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages,
Disadvantages, Performance, Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable
displacement pumps – Problems.

UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control
valves – Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications –
Accessories : Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols –
Problems.

UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9

Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading,
Double Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization,
Fail-Safe, Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical
hydraulic servo systems.

UNIT IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9

Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler,
Air control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit –
Cascade method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems,
Introduction to fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits

UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9

Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and
Pneumatic systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface
grinding, Press and Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place
applications and tool handling in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and
Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO 1: Analyze the methods in fluid power principles and working of hydraulic pumps
CO 2: Recognize the concepts in hydraulic actuators and control components
CO 3: Obtain the knowledge in basics of hydraulic circuits and systems
CO 4: Know about the basics concept in pneumatic and electro pneumatic systems
CO 5: Apply the concepts to solve the trouble shooting hydraulic and pneumatics

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. James A. Sullivan, “Fluid Power Theory and Applications”, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall,
1997.

REFERENCES
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”. Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McG Raw
Hill, 2001.
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGRaw Hill,
2007.
4. Dudley, A. Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
5. Srinivasan. R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
6. Joshi.P, Pneumatic Control”, Wiley India, 2008.
7. Jagadeesha T, “Pneumatics Concepts, Design and Applications “, Universities Press,
2015.
OMR353 SENSORS LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types,
calibration techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
2. To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
3. To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and
characteristics of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
4. To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and
characteristics of optical, pressure, temperature and other sensors.
5. To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data
acquisition system.

UNIT I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of
Sensors – Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and
Digital Signals, PWM and PPM.

UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical,
Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range
Sensors - Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS -
RF Beacons.

UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement
– Force and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage,
Limitation, and Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading
Sensors – Compass, Gyroscope and Inclinometers.
UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9
Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure
– Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC,
Thermistor, RTD, Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors
- Smart Sensors.
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9
Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement
- DC and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers –
Filter and Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and
direction measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.
 Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0. 0. 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average 8 8
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications
with the 8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and
Hall, 1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent
Machines”, Oxford University Press, 2007.

MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION LTPC

3003
COOURSE OBJECTIVES:

1. To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements

2. To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
3. To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
4. To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
5. To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types

UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and
bearing, stern tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods-
water jet propulsion , screw propulsion.

UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9

Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster –
Advantages, various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer,
bilge keel - stabilizing and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water
and sea water sailing vessel, Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.
 UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9
Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag,
effects of fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship,
cavitations - effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.

UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort
nozzle, ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade
propellers and its advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller
- Thrust creation by propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.

UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9

Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings-
Rudder pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits
and demerits of various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper,
movement of rudders, Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO PO PSO
PO P P P P P P P P PO PO PO PS PS PS PS
1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 5/5 2/2 4/4 4/4 2/2 1/1 1/1 2/2 1/1 1/1 5/5 5/5
=1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1
OMV351 MARINE MERCHANT VESSELS LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:

At the end of the course, students are expected to acquire

1. Knowledge on basics of Hydrostatics
2. Familiarization on types of merchant ships
3. Knowledge on Shipbuilding Materials
4. Knowledge on marine propeller and rudder
5. Awareness on governing bodies in shipping industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HYDROSTATICS 9

Archimedes Principle- Laws of floatation– Meta centre – stability of floating and submerged
bodies- Density, relative density - Displacement –Pressure –centre of pressure.

UNIT II TYPES OF SHIP 10

General cargo ship - Refrigerated cargo ships - Container ships - Roll-on Roll-off ships – Oil
tankers- Bulk carriers - Liquefied Natural Gas carriers - Liquefied Petroleum Gas carriers -
Chemical tankers - Passenger ships

UNIT III SHIPBUILDING MATERIALS 9

Types of Steels used in Shipbuilding - High tensile steels, Corrosion resistant steels, Steel
sandwich panels, Steel castings, Steel forgings - Other shipbuilding materials, Aluminium
alloys, Aluminium alloy sandwich panels, Fire protection especially for Aluminium Alloys, Fiber
Reinforced Composites
UNIT IV MARINE PROPELLER AND RUDDER 8
Types of rudder, construction of Rudder-Types of Propeller, Propeller material-Cavitations and
its effects on propeller

UNIT V GOVERNING BODIES FOR SHIPPING INDUSTRY 9

Role of IMO (International Maritime Organization), SOLAS (International Convention for the
Safetyof Life at Sea), MARPOL (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from
Ships ) , MLC (Maritime Labour Convention), STCW 2010 (International Convention on
Standards of Training, Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers), Classification societies
Administration authorities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students would

1. Acquire Knowledge on floatation of ships

2. Acquire Knowledge on features of various ships
3. Acquire Knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials
4. Acquire Knowledge to identify the different types of marine
propeller and rudder
5. Understand the Roles and responsibilities of governing bodies
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.J.Eyres, “Ship Constructions”, Seventh Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing, USA,2015
2. Dr.DA Taylor, “Merchant Ship Naval Architecture” I. Mar EST publications, 2006
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds
Publications,2000
REFERENCES:
1. Kemp & Young “Ship Construction Sketches & Notes”, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing,USA, 2011
2. MARPOL Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2018
3. SOLAS Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2016

OMV352 ELEMENTS OF MARINE ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to
1. Understand the role of Marine machinery systems
2. Be familiar with Marine propulsion machinery system
3. Acquaint with Marine Auxiliary machinery system
4. Have acquired basics of Marine Auxiliary boiler system
5. Be aware of ship propellers and steering system

UNIT I ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE ON MARINE MACHINERY SYSTEMS 9

Marine Engineering Terminologies, Parts of Ship, Introduction to Machinery systems on board
ships – Propulsion Machinery system, Electricity Generator system, Steering gear system, Air
compressors & Air reservoirs, Fuel oil and Lubricating Oil Purifiers, Marine Boiler systems

UNIT II MARINE PROPULSION MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Two stroke Large Marine slow speed Diesel Engine – General Construction, Basic knowledge
of Air starting and reversing mechanism, Cylinder lubrication oil system, Main lubricating oil
system and cooling water system

UNIT III MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Four stroke medium speed Diesel engine – General Construction, Inline, V-type arrangement
of engine, Difference between slow speed and medium speed engines – advantages,
limitations and applications

UNIT IV MARINE BOILER SYSTEM 9

Types of Boiler – Difference between Water tube boiler and Fire tube boiler, Need for boiler
on board ships, Uses of steam, Advantages of using steam as working medium, Boiler
mountings and accessories – importance of mountings, need for accessories

UNIT V SHIP PROPELLERS AND STEERING MECHANISM 9

Importance of Propellor and Steering gear, Types of propellers - Fixed pitch propellers,
Controllable pitch propellers, Water jet propellers, Steering gear systems - 2-Ram and 4 Ram
steering gear, Electric steering gear
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should able to,
1. Distinguish the role of various marine machinery systems
2. Relate the components of marine propulsion machinery system
 3. Explain the importance of marine auxiliary machinery system
4. Acquire knowledge of marine boiler system
5. Understand the importance of ship propellors and steering system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine engineering”, Revised Second Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2011
2. J.K.Dhar, “Basic Marine Engineering”, Tenth Edition, G-Maritime Publications, Mumbai,
2011
3. K.Ramaraj, “Text book on Marine Engineering”, Eswar Press, Chennai, 2018
REFERENCES:
1. Alan L.Rowen, “Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering, Volume 1&2, The Institute
of Marine Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2006
2. A.S.Tambwekar, “Naval Architecture and Ship Construction”, The Institute of Marine
Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2015

CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the basics of drone concepts
2. To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of drone
3. To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
4. To know about the various applications of drone
5. To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of
drones based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses- Drone
business through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and
employability

UNIT II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9

Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the
parts -Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of
autonomy- Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -
Install program on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi
connection.

UNIT III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled environment-
Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage capacity -
Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications

UNIT IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in delivering
mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of transmission lines
and power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing
UNIT V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9
The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization- Drone
license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO4: Createthe programs for various drones

CO-PO MAPPING:
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc,
2016

REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and
ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for
Security and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.

OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software,
Data, People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial,
Attribute data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.
UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9
Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models -
conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures –
Raster Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and GRID
data models.

UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data Input
–Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation – Topology -
Adjacency, connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file
formats - Attribute Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration

UNIT IV DATA QUALITY AND STANDARDS 9

Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy,
temporal accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –
Interoperability - OGC - Spatial Data Infrastructure

UNIT V DATA MANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9

Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster
Conversion - Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise Vs.
Desktop GIS- distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill
Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction
Geographical Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems, Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006.

CO – PO – PSO MAPPING: GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM

Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
Engineering problems and 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
Design solutions 3 3 3 3 3

OAI352 AGRICULTURE ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and
principles
 To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing management,
Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIAN CONTEXT 9

Entrepreneur Development(ED): Concept of entrepreneur and entrepreneurship assessing
overall business environment in Indian economy- Entrepreneurial and managerial
characteristics- Entrepreneurship development programmers (EDP)-Generation incubation
and commercialization of ideas and innovations- Motivation and entrepreneurship
development- Globalization and the emerging business entrepreneurial environment.

UNIT II AGRIPRNEURSHIP IN GLOBAL ARENA: LEGAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Importance of agribusiness in Indian economy - International trade-WTO agreements-
Provisions related to agreements in agricultural and food commodities - Agreements on
Agriculture (AOA)- Domestic supply, market access, export subsidies agreements on sanitary
and phyto-sanitary (SPS) measures, Trade related intellectual property rights (TRIPS).
UNIT III ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT: FINANCIAL PERSPECTIVE 9
Entrepreneurship - Essence of managerial Knowledge -Management functions- Planning-
organizing-Directing-Motivation-ordering-leading-supervision- communication and control-
Understanding Financial Aspects of Business - Importance of financial statements-liquidity
ratios-leverage ratios, coverage ratios-turnover ratios-Profitability ratios. Agro-based
industries-Project-Project cycle-Project appraisal and evaluation techniques-undiscounted
measures-Payback period-proceeds per rupee of outlay, Discounted measures-Net Present
Value (NPV)-Benefit-Cost Ratio(BCR)-Internal Rate of Return(IRR)-Net benefit investment
ratio(N/K ratio)-sensitivity analysis.

UNIT IV ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES: ECONOMIC GROWTH

PERSPECTIVE 9
Managing an enterprise: Importance of planning, budgeting, monitoring evaluation and follow-
up managing competition. Role of ED in economic development of a country- Overview of
Indian social, political system and their implications for decision making by individual
 entrepreneurs- Economic system and its implication for decision making by individual
entrepreneurs.
UNITV ENTREPRENEURIAL PROMOTION MEASURES AND GOVERNMENT
SUPPORT 9
Social responsibility of business. Morals and ethics in enterprise management- SWOT
analysis- Government schemes and incentives for promotions of entrepreneurship.
Government policy on small and medium enterprises (SMEs)/SSIs/MSME sectors- Venture
capital (VC), contract framing (CF) and Joint Venture (JV), public-private
partnerships (PPP) - overview of agricultural engineering industry, characteristics of Indian
farm machinery industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Judge about agricultural finance, banking and cooperation
2. Evaluate basic concepts, principles and functions of financial management
3. Improve the skills on basic banking and insurance schemes available to customers
4. Analyze various financial data for efficient farm management
5. Identify the financial institutions

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph L. Massie, 1995, “Essentials of Management”, prentice Hall of India Pvt limited,
New Delhi
2. Khanka S, 1999, Entrepreneurial Development, S, Chand and Co, New Delhi
3. Mohanty S K, 2007, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. Harih S B, Conner U J and Schwab G D, 1981, Management of the Farm Business,
Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
2. Omri Ralins, N.1980, Introduction to Agricultural: Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
3. Gittenger Price, 1989, Economic Analysis of Agricultural project, John Hopkins
University, Press, London.
4. Thomas W Zimmer and Norman M Scarborough, 1996, Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey.
5. Mar J Dollinger, 1999, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Prentice –Hall, Upper
Saddal Rover, New Jersey.

CO-PO MAPPING

PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall

correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 1 1 2 1 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 2 1 1 1
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 1 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 1 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 1 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving approach
1 2 1 1 1 1
in agriculture with proper knowledge
and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 1 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity using
modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 1 2 1
linkage.

OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation techniques.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of
Classification and their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters;
Study of important families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9

Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of
Taxon, Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom,
Invertebrates, Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.

UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9

Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species,
Criteria for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and
Protozoa); Criteria for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical
Methods of Microbial Diversity Analysis

UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9

Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List;
Factors affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity,
Dispersal, Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity; Sustainable
Utilization of Bioresources; National Movements and International Convention/Treaties on
Biodiversity.

UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9

In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive breeding,
Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of Keystone Species,
Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany &
Embryology. S. Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A.
(2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine L.Case,
13th Edition 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.

OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
 To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
 To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
 To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain
 To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model

UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9

Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control theory
–Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations – Block
diagram reduction–Signal flow graphs.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I and II
order system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9
Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots –
Determination of Transfer Function from Bode plot.

UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist
stability criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist & Bode
– Closed loop frequency response.

UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear & continuous
time systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability & observability.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw Hill
Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New Age
International, 2018.

REFERENCES:
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education,
2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996 USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System
AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and S.Janardhanan, Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First
Impression2010.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO PO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3
OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
2. To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
3. Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
4. To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
5. To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial
Automation system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition
(SCADA). Industrial bus systems : Modbus & Profibus

UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9

Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC,
power MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.

UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement
and control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process
related interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data
transfer techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data
acquisition system, Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.

UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output
modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication
and networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial
automation, Application of PLC to process control industries.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory
Computer Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages
of DCS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc)
5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system (L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied automation
Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and
Logic Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
 TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies,2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India,8th
Edition, 2006.
3. E.A.Parr, Newnes ,NewDelhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.

REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and
Applications”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New
York, 2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New
Delhi, 2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”, CeneageLearning,
3 rd Edition,2005.
List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105062/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
3. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
4. https://realpars.com/what-is-industrial-automation/
5. https://automationforum.co/what-is-industrial-automation-2/
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1

OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources
and energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis,
energy alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability.
Prospects of Renewable energy sources

UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and
nuclear power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion
processes, fluidized bed combustion.

UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water
heating, solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar
thermal power generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy,
 types of windmills, types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power
generation, wind power in India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion,
ocean thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.

UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10

Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass
conversion, combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline
fuel cell, phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer
electrolyte fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like
thermal energy storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.

UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat
exchangers, distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in
chemical plants, energy conservation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering
CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate
based on local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical
understanding of energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New
Delhi, 1981.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
Course Program Outcomes
Outcomes Statements PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 Students will be able 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
to describe the
fundamentals and
main characteristics of
renewable energy
sources and their
differences compared
to fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the
various fields of
energy engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and
choose the most
appropriate based on
local conditions.
CO4 Explain the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
technological basis for
harnessing renewable
energy sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current
developments and
emerging trends within
the field of renewable
energy technologies
and to develop in-
depth technical
understanding of
energy problems at an
advanced level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to
structure, chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.

UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band
and Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular
beams, Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational
spectroscopy

UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT

SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions
of atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption
isotherms, Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods

UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9

Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers,
Electrified interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical
processes, Gratzel cells

UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9

Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis,
Overview of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch
and Automotive catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface
functionalization and clusters in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate
oscillations and spatiotemporal pattern formation
UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9
Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth
modes, Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques,
Catalytic growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods
and its application in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and
chemistry behind surface phenomena

TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.

REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.

OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
 Make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment

UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical
and electromagnetic properties.

UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate
curves, calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers;
tray, vacuum, osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave,
IR, heat pump and freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and
foammat dryers

UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of
ground material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food,
Rittinger’s, Kick’s and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction
equipment: Principal types, crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and
impactors, attrition mills, buhr mill, tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet
pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting machines (slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)

UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of
mixing, theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers
for lo.w- or medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid
contacting devices, other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry
powders and particulate solids.

UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate
of filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-
pressure filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press,
rotary filters, centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General
considerations, materials for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration,
concentration, polarization, processing variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-
filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis, mode of operation, and applications; Membrane
separation methods, demineralization by electro-dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-
evaporation and osmotic dehydration.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of
food
materials
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical
properties to develop new technologies for processing and preservation.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food
Science & Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie
John Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th
Ed. Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food
Processing Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's
Chemical Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.

OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the
industry
and food service establishments
• To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
• To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
• To ensure processed food meets global standards

UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments, Food
Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common adulterants),
Food Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling. Sanitation in
warehousing, storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging materials. Control of
rats, rodents, mice, birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and Disinfection, ISO 22000 –
Importance and Implementation

UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial Quality
control. Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other utilities.

UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and
processing materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food
inspection and Food Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response and
exposure response modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance system
to monitor food safety, risk communication

UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-security
in Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health Organization
(OIE), International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)

UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National Codex
contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions, Shadow
Committees etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry
and food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world

REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker Inc.,
New
York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons
Publication, 2003

OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical
nature and methods of extraction.
 To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6
Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition,
classification, list of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and
microbes in food, plants, animals and microbes.
UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11
Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans,
lycopene, chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as
lycopene, isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing
nutraceuticals - stability, analytical and labelling issues.

UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different
in vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the
antioxidant activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising
phytochemical release by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during
technological treatments, new food grade peptidases from plant sources.
UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11
The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3
fatty acid and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder,
Cancer, CVD, Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic,
prebiotic and synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role
and use in obesity and nervous system disorders.

UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”,
2nd Edition, CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC,
Publications. 2006
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd
(United Kingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /
Elsevier, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor),
Fereidoon Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis,
2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson
(Author), Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian
Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood
head Publ., 2000
5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2003.

COURSE OUTCOME - NUTRACEUTICALS

CO 1 Acquire knowledge about the nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO 2 Acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes
CO 3 Attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical components
and formulation considerations of functional foods.
 CO 4 Distinguish the various in vitro and in vivo assessment of antioxidant activity of
compounds from plant sources.
CO 5 Gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals
in the prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO 6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national and
international level.

CO – PO MAPPING
NUTRACEUTICALS
COURSE PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
OUTCOME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1

OTT354 BASICS OF DYEING AND PRINTING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of Pretreatment, dyeing, printing and
machinery in textile processing.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Impurities present in different fibres, Inspection of grey goods and lot preparation. Shearing,

UNIT II PRE TREATMENT 9

Desizing-Objective of Desizing- types of Desizing- Objective of Scouring- Mechanism of
Scouring– Degumming of Silk, Scouring of wool - Bio Scouring. Bleaching -Objective of
Bleaching: Bleaching mechanism of Hydrogen Peroxide, Hypo chlorites. Objective of
Mercerizing - Physical and Chemical changes of Mercerizing.

UNIT III DYEING 9

Dye - Affinity, Substantively, Reactivity, Exhaustion and Fixation. Classification of dyes. Direct
dyes: General properties, principles and method of application on cellulosic materials.
Reactive dyes – principles and method of application on cellulosic materials hot brand, cold
brand.

UNIT IV PRINTING 9
Definition of printing – Difference between printing and dying- Classification thickeners –
Requirements to be good thickener, printing paste Preparation - different styles of printing.

UNIT V MACHINERIES 9
Fabric Processing - winch, jigger and soft flow machines. Beam dyeing machines: Printing -
flat bed screen - Rotary screen. Thermo transfer printing machinery. Garment dyeing
machines.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
 OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1: Basics of grey fabric
CO2: Basics of pre treatment
CO3: Concept of Dyeing
CO4: Concept of Printing
CO5: Machinery in processing industry

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Trotman, E.R., Textile Scouring and Bleaching, Charless Griffins, Com. Ltd., London
1990.
2. Shenai V.A. “Technology of Textile Processing Vol. IV” 1998, Sevak Publications,
Mumbai.

REFERENCES:
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles Griffin &
Co. Ltd., U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
2. Dr. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Wood head publishing India, 2018
3. Mathews Kolanjikombil., ”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and Knitted
fabrics”, Wood head publishing India , 2021
4. Bleaching & Mercerizing – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monograph series
5. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Wood head
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3.

COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX:

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively
Program Outcome
Course
P
Outco PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Statement O
mes 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1
Classificati - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
on of
fibres and
CO1
production
of natural
fibres
Regenerat - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ed and
CO2
synthetic
fibres
Yarn - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO3
spinning
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
Knitting - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5 and
nonwoven
Overa - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ll CO
FT 3201 FIBRE SCIENCE LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to learn about the types of fibre and its properties

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE FIBRES 9

Definition of various forms of textile fibres - staple fibre, filament, bicomponent fibres.
Classification of Natural and Man-made fibres, essential and desirable properties of Fibres.
Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cotton, Silk, Wool -Physical and chemical
structure of the above fibres.

UNIT II REGENERATED FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Regenerated Cellulosic fibres: Viscose Rayon, Acetate rayon – High
wet modulus fibres: Modal and Lyocel ,Tencel

UNIT III SYNTHEITC FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Synthetic Fibers: polymer-Polyester, Nylon, Acrylic and
polypropylene. Mineral fibres: fibre glass ,carbon .Introduction to spin finishes and
texturization

UNIT IV SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses of high tenacity and high modulus fibres, high temperature and flame
retardant fibres, Chemical resistant fibres

UNIT V FUNCTIONAL SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses : Fibres for medical application – Biodegradable fibres based on
PLA ,Super absorbent fibres elastomeric fibres, ultra-fine fibres, electrospun nano fibres,
metallic fibres – Gold and Silver coated.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
 Understand the process sequence of various fibres
 Understand the properties of various fibres

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
2. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU | ISBN-13:
3. Mukhopadhyay S. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN:
1870812379
REFERENCES:
1. Meredith R., “Mechanical Properties of Textile Fibres”, North Holland, Amsterdam,
1986, ISBN: 1114790699, ISBN-13: 9781114790698
2. Hearle J. W. S., Lomas B., and Cooke W. D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to
Textiles”, The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN: 1855733196.
3. Raheel M. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
4. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”,
Textile Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN: 1870812115
 5. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties: Fundamentals of Structures and
Mechanics Vol 1”, Ellis Horwood, England, 1982, ISBN: 047027302X | ISBN-13:
9780470273029 36

OTT355 GARMENT MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting and sewing.
 To expose the students to various problems & remedies during garment
manufacturing

UNIT I PATTERN MAKING, MARKER PLANNING, CUTTING 9

Anthropometry, specification sheet, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting,
grading, marker planning, spreading & cutting

UNIT II TYPES OF SEAMS, STITCHES AND FUNCTIONS OF NEEDLES 9

Different types of seams and stitches; single needle lock stitch machine – mechanism and
accessories; needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint

UNIT III COMPONENTS AND TRIMS USED IN GARMENT 9

Sewing thread-construction, material, thread size, packages, accessories – labels, linings,
interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets and
laces, zip fasteners, buttons

UNIT IV GARMENT INSPECTION AND DIMENSIONAL CHANGES 9

Raw material, in process and final inspection; needle cutting; sewability of fabrics; strength
properties of apparel; dimensional changes in apparel due to laundering, dry-cleaning,
steaming and pressing.

UNIT V GARMENT PRESSING, PACKING AND CARE LABELING 9

Garment pressing – categories and equipment, packing; care 340abelling of apparels
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand
CO1: Pattern making, marker planning, cutting
CO2: Types of seams, stitches and functions of needles
CO3: Components and trims used in garment
CO4: Garment inspection and dimensional changes
CO5: Garment pressing, packing and care 340abelling

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science
Ltd., Oxford, 1994.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Introduction to Clothing Manufacture” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1995. 64
3. Harrison.P.W Garment Dyeing, The Textile Institute Publication, Textile Progress, Vol .19
No.2,1988.

REFERENCES:
1. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 1994
2. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985
3. Jai Prakash and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994
4. Ruth Glock, Grace I. Kunz, “Apparel Manufacturing”, Dorling Kindersley Publishing Inc.,
New Jersey, 1995.
5. Pradip V.Mehta, “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992.
 PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
Avg 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 1.4 0.8 1.4 1 0.2 1.8 2.4 1 1.8 2.6 1 2.6

OPE353 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the
industrial environment.
 Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other
laws) enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
 Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases,
accidents / emergencies and other hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade
union safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.

UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9

Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards -
Exposure pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages
and limitations of environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of
control measures for occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and
the selection criteria - Effects on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise,
radiation and excessive stress.

UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting
and colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of
work for manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels –
Process and System Safety.

UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident
investigation - Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major
accident hazard control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental
Health and Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review
– Elements of Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
 Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in
occupational setting
 Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
 What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to
ensure the protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee

OPE354 UNIT OPERATIONS IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart to the student basic knowledge on fluid mechanics, mechanical operations,
heat transfer operations and mass transfer operations.

UNIT I FLUID MECHANICS CONCEPTS

Fluid definition and classification of fluids, types of fluids, Rheological behaviour of fluids &
Newton’s Law of viscosity. Fluid statics-Pascal's law, Hydrostatic equilibrium, Barometric
equation and pressure measurement(problems),Basic equations of fluid flow - Continuity
equation, Euler’s equation and Bernoulli equation; Types of flow - laminar and turbulent;
Reynolds experiment; Flow through circular and non-circular conduits - Hagen Poiseuille
equation (no derivation). Flow through stagnant fluids – theory of Settling and Sedimentation
– Equipment (cyclones, thickeners) Conceptual numericals.

UNIT II FLOW MEASUREMENTS & MECHANICAL OPERATIONS

Different types of flow measuring devices (Orifice meter, Venturimeter, Rotameter) with
derivations, flow measurements –. Pumps – types of pumps (Centrifugal & Reciprocating
pumps), Energy calculations and characteristics of pumps. Size reduction–characteristics of
comminute products, sieve analysis, Properties and handling of particulate solids –
characterization of solid particles, average particle size, screen analysis- Conceptual
numerical of differential and cumulative analysis. Size reduction, crushing laws, working
principle of ball mill. Filtration & types, filtration equipments (plate and frame, rotary drum).
Conceptual numericals.

UNIT III CONDUCTIVE & CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER

Modes of heat transfer; Conduction – steady state heat conduction through unilayer and
multilayer walls, cylinders; Insulation, critical thickness of insulation. Convection- Forced and
Natural convection, principles of heat transfer co-efficient, log mean temperature difference,
individual and overall heat transfer co-efficient, fouling factor; Condensation – film wise and
drop wise (no derivation). Heat transfer equipments – double pipe heat exchanger, shell and
tube heat exchanger (with working principle and construction with applications).

UNIT IV BASICS OF MASS TRANSFER

Diffusion-Fick’s law of diffusion. Types of diffusion. Steady state molecular diffusion in fluids
at rest and laminar flow (stagnant / unidirection and bi direction). Measurement of diffusivity,
Mass transfer coefficients and their correlations. Conceptual numerical.

UNIT V MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS

Basic concepts of Liquid-liquid extraction – equilibrium, stage type extractors (belt extraction
and basket extraction).Distillation – Methods of distillation, distillation of binary mixtures using
McCabe Thiele method.Drying- drying operations, batch and continuous drying. Conceptual
numerical.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
 State and describe the nature and properties of the fluids.
 Study the different flow measuring instruments, the principles of various size
reductions, conveying equipment’s, sedimentation and mixing tanks.
 Comprehend the laws governing the heat and mass transfer operations to solve the
problems.
 Design the heat transfer equipment suitable for specific requirement.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Unit operations in Chemical Engineering Warren L. McCabe, Julian C. Smith & Peter
Harriot McGraw-Hill Education (India) Edition 2014
2. Fluid Mechanics K L Kumar S Chand & Company Ltd 2008
3. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Badger W.I. and Banchero, J.T., Tata McGraw
Hill New York 1997

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Unit Operations Alan S Foust, L.A. Wenzel, C.W. Clump, L. Maus, and
L.B. Anderson John Wiley & Sons 2nd edition 2008
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Vol I &II Chattopadhyaya Khanna
Publishers, Delhi-6 1996
3. Heat Transfer J P Holman McGraw Hill International Ed

OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic
materials
 To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
 Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials
in the industry
 To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
 Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9

Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages,
thermoplastic and thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and
cross-linked structures. General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture,
structure, properties and applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE,
polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride-compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)

UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of
PET, PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins,
polyimides, PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)

UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9

Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and
uses of phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde,
unsaturated polyester resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.
UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9
Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly
(vinyl carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent
polymers- their synthesis, properties and applications

UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE,
bio-PP, bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
 Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of
various engineering thermoplastics
 To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering
thermoplastics, thermosetting resins
 Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on
polyester, epoxy, silicone and PU
 To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous
areas and applications of different biopolymers
REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press
(2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall
(2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd Edn., CRC
press (2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.

OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
 To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
 To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
 To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
 To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9

Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and
specifications. Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer
products. Preparation of test pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers:
processability parameters of rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time,
cure rate index, Processability tests carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup
flow index, gel time, bulk density, bulk factor.

UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set,
dynamic fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests:
Viscoelastic behavior (simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-
Voigt model, strain recovery and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on
mechanical properties, Behavior of reinforced polymers

UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient
of thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.

UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9

Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and
power factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-
efficient, dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties:
transparency, refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9

Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies,
Flammability tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
 Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the
polymers.
 To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
 Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
 Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and
elastomers.

REFERENCES:
1. F.Majewska, H.Zowall, Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis
Horwood Limited Publisher 1977.
2. J.F.Rabek, Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. R.P.Brown, Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons
2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer,
2010.
OEC353 VLSI DESIGN LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks

UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9

MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS
devices. MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9

Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification
of Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .

UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation
using Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.

UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder,
Carry Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed
tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective”, PHI, 2016.(Units II, III IV and V).
2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).
REFERENCES:
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits,
International Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology
and Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley
2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory
and Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO P P P P P P P P P PO PO PO PS PS PS
O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 2 2 1 3 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
Av 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
gO

CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
 To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
 To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9

Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional
Systems for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable
Systems, Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement
sensors, Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction
force sensor.

UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE

DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor
design, signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of
irrelevant information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based,
Human body as a heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy
harvests, Thermopiles.

UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.

UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9

Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication
Techniques- Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive
Inks.Case study- smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9

Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients,
Elderly patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system

TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and JamilY.Khan, Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing Pte.Ltd, Singapore, 2012

REFERENCES:
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian,
Body Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press,
2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg.

CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC

30 03
PREAMBLE:
1. To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
2. This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize
the acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues ,
Computer based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information
system, Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical
Informatics, Bioinformatics

UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9

Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and
planning, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.
UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9
Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR,
Development tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical
information system, Computerized prescriptions for patients.

UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of
CMD, Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model,
semantic networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill
patients, Computer aids for the handicapped.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery,
Surgical simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and
health- Medical education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in
medicine.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
2. Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
3. Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient
record system.
4. Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
5. Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. R.D.Lele, “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw
Hill,2005

REFERENCES:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg.

OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
1. To learn the various methods biological treatment
2. To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
3. To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
4. To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
5. To produce the biocompost from wastes
6. To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products

UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9

Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic
wastes - Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged
fermentation – Batch and continous fermentation

UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from
biomass – Plant biomass for industrial application

UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark
and photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production
- Single stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production -
Enzymatic hydrolysis technologies

UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of
Amylases - Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases

UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in
composting - Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting,
Fundamentals of composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems –
Nonreactor Composting, Reactor composting - Compost Quality
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using
Fungal Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A
Practical Handbook”, CRC Press,

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural
Waste and By-Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of
Waste Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’,
Second Edition, CRC Press, 2014
OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES LTPC
3 003

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical
activity, illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases,
cancer; Prevention – Diet and exercise.

UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma oesophagus;
Causes Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment

UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9

Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol abuse
-– Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and Cardiac
rehabilitation

UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes – Paediatric
and adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI

UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth), Smoking
– Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Kumar&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep
Publications, 2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017

REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008

OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
1. Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
2. Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases

UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9

Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing
Concepts of Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public
Health, Determinants of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education,
Genetics, Food and Nutrition). Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different
disciplines in Public Health.
UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9
Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B,
Hepatitis C, HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus,
atherosclerosis, fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer

UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9

History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and
killed vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in
seed lot systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.

UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9

Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric,
neonatal units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology,
Gastroenterology, Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.

UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9

Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy –
Thermography – Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology,
John Wiley and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. Devlin.Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. al.Editor(s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1.To acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
2. To learn the various sources of Finance
3. To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
4. To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
5. To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9

Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.
UNIT II . SOURCES OF FINANCE 9
Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features –
Merits and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts,
Commercial Papers, Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc

UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS 9

Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital
Budgeting -– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt - Reserves
- Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital.

UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9

Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure –
determinants of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure. Dividend policy -
Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - - Determinants
of Dividend Policy

UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -
Determinants of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash – Objectives
and Strategies of Cash Management. Receivables Management: Objectives - Credit policies.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd

REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011

CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT LT P C

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
1. Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
2. Explain how to Value bonds and equities
3. Explain the various approaches to value securities
4. Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
5. Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.

UNITI THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT

The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of securities,
securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk, Impact of
Taxes andInflationonreturn.
UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES
Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks,
defaultrisk andcreditrating.

UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS

Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis,
dividend capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.

UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India
UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTION
Role of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection; Investor grievances and their
redressal system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill
education, 5th, Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill
Education (India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019

CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LT P C

3 003
OBJECTIVES
 Understand the Banking system in India
 Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
 Understand the development in banking technology
 Understand the financial services in India
 Understand the insurance Industry in India

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9

Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key
Regulations in Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer -
Retail & Wholesale Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.

UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - Loans.Negotiable Instruments –
Cheques, Bills of Exchange & Promissory Notes.Designing deposit schemes– Asset and
Liability Management – NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities
market

UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9

Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money – e-
money –forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in India
– RBI’s Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking & RBI’s
Initiative.
UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9
Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC ––
Leasing and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –
factoring – Merchant Banking

UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –
IRDA – Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the Policy
– revival – settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services,
Pearson,
Delhi, 2017.
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017

CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LT P C

3003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9
Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of
blockchain and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus:
Consensus mechanism - Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain.
Decentralization: Decentralization using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to
decentralization- Blockchain and full ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts -
Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for decentralization.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9

Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and
Payments – Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name
coin – Prime coin – Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart contracts
on a blockchain

UNIT III ETHEREUM 9

Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem - Transactions
and messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum Virtual Machine
(EVM), Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a private net -
Starting up the private network

UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9

Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks
– Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed
Ledger – Corda.

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other
Challenges – Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology,
Decentralization, and Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition,
2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”,
VPT, 2017.

CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LTPC

3 0 03

UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9

Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and
Digital Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block
chain, Artificial Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS
Systems, Immediate Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface
(UPI).Legal and Regulatory Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their
regulations.Digital Payments Smart Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments, Payment
Gateways, Mobile Payments, Digital and Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical, Legal, Privacy,
and Technology Issues

UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9

A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding,
Charity and Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering

UNIT III INSURETECH 9

InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech IoT and InsurTech
,Risk Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in Insurance
Services

UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9

P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending:
Unique opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations

UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9

FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech,
Startups: Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud
detection

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of
technology, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts,
Decentralized Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
 5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent
Pub, 2016

CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
2. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
3. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
4. To learn the Fintech developments around the world
5. To know about the future of Fintech

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure,
Banking Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future
prospects and potential issues with Fintech.

UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal
lending, P2P lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance,
Crowdfunding.

UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry-
P2P insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement
through Quote to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health
insurance.

UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India, Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment for Growth
of FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with FinTech
companies, The new financial world.

UNIT IV FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services,
banking on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech
Supermarket, Banks partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact
on Retail Banking, A future without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology
Handbook for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on
Banking and the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial
service industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage
Publications, 2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services
Paperback, 2018

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP L T P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
 To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful
entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in
Technology oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.

UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9

Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-
Sociological-Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-
Basics of Managing Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and
Operations Planning – Systems Management and Administration

UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles
- Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy-
Job Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs
- Case Studies
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9
Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO
Entrepreneurship – Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global
perspectives.

TOTAL : 45PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO 3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO 4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO 5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New
Delhi, 2021.
2. Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by
Published 2019 by Cengage Learning.

REFERENCES :
1. Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
2. Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence
and Survival of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon,
and Frank Lasch. Wiley Pub.
3. Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, Ft.com.
4. David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5. HarperBusiness,https://fanny.staff.uns.ac.id/files/2013/12/Technopreneur-BASED-
EDUCATION-REVOLUTION.pdf
6. JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2009
7. Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO
Inc; M. Barcelon, UP
8. Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship

CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
 To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful
entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology
oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business
efficiently and effectively
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9
Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams
- Self Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.

UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9

Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training
and team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building -
Building High-Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing
Others - Team Building at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9

Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and
Situation - Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and
Leadership - Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .

UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9

Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model -
Situational Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and
Transformational Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in
Organisational Leadership.

UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9

Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership -
Motivation and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management
- Negotiation and Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends
in Leadership.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO 2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
CO 4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO 5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’

REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of
experience ,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
5. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.
6. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving
team performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).
CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the creativity skills among the learners
 To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
 To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
 To develeop innovative business models for business.
UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities-
Quality of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative
Environment- Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.
UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9
Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity
Training--Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our
creativity – Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities-
Strategies for Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.
UNIT III INNOVATION 9
Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product
Innovation and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators-
Characteristics of Innovation in Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity-
Design Thinking and Innovation- Innovation as Collective Change-Innovation as a system
UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial
Opportunities- Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market
fit
UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9
Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models
– Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models-
Responsible Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO 3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO 4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO 5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty
and effectively
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House,
2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj
Echambadi.
CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing
for entrepreneurs
 To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing,
which they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
 To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven
strategies and the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business
owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of
Marketing - Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern
Components of the Mix - The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.
UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9
Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and
Macro Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of
Environment Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing
Information System, Types and Components.
UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9
Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product
Strategies - Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and
Branding - Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price
Decisions - Cost Based Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing
Strategies - National and Global Pricing.
UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC)
- Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity -
Personal Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning
(STP)-Logistics Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.
UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing
Customer Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in
Industrial / Business Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence
Business - Services Marketing - E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
CO 2 Understand the marketing environment
CO 3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO 4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO 5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing
issues.
REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second
edition,
2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, V.S.Ramaswamy &
S.Namakumari, Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition,
2016.

CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management
for entrepreneurs.
2. To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource
department.
3. To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9

Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager
Roles- Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting
- HR Audit - Challenges in HRM.
UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9
HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job
rotation- Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer
Applications in HR - Recent Trends

UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9

Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee
Engagement.

UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and
Socialisation Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health
and Social Security Measures- Green HRM Practices

UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9

Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal
Methods – Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal -
Retrenchment - Union Management Relationship - Recent Trends
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO 1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO 2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO 3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.

REFERENCES:
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
 3) David A. Decenzo, Stephen.P.Robbins, and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource.
PHI Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases , 9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012

CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the basics of business venture financing.
 To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
 To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
 To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.

UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9

Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy,
Registration Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central
and State Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC
and SIDCO.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9

Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope
– Types - Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement
of funds – Mix of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.

UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9

Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market
instruments – Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management-
Fund based Credit Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.
UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9
Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding -
Private Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding-
Venture Capital.

UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9

Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors-
Developing Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation-
Raising Funds - Seed Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO 2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
CO 3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO 4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO 5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.
REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation
and Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation.
Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And
Ayako Yasuda, Eds., John Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You
Need To Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital
Creates New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment
Choices And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And
The Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.

VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION L TPC

3 003

UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration

UNIT-II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration

UNIT-III (9)
1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach

UNIT-IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs

UNIT-V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance,
New Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.

CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3003

UNIT- I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly

UNIT-II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy

UNIT-III (9)
1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court

UNIT-IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court

UNIT-V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; S.Chand and Company Ltd., New
Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; S.Chand & Co., New Delhi

CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003

UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems
UNIT-II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.

UNIT-III (9)
1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion

UNIT-IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission

UNIT-V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations

CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES LTPC

3 003

UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration
as a discipline and Identity of Public Administration

UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory

UNIT III (9)

Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics,
Organizational Design.

UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership: Traditional
and Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making
UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)

CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC

3003

UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities:
Finance Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission, Comptroller
and Auditor General of India, Attorney General of India

UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government

UNIT III (9)

Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th
Constitutional Amendment Act 1992

UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration

UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India
CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC
3003

UNIT-I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy –
Public policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public
Administration.

UNIT-II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model

UNIT-III (9)
Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy
Implementation –Policy Evaluation.

UNIT-IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups
and Role of Political Parties.

UNIT-V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy –
Agriculture policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press,
2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling
Publishers,
2016.

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.

UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling
techniques, Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9
Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one
sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.

UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov –
test for goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.

UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
 To understand and solve business problems
 To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
 To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business
environments
 To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.

REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood H.Siddiqui, Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd
Edition
2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas A.Williams, Jeffrey D.Camm, James
6. Cochran, Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western)
Asia,
Singapore, 2016.
7. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.

CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC

3003

OBJECTIVES:
 To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
 To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision
making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.

UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9

Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures

UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9
Classification, Association, Clustering.

UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different
domains.
2. Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
3. Apply various prediction techniques.
4. Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
5. Develop and implement machine learning algorithms

REFERENCES:
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann
Publishers 2006
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd
Edition, 2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and
Customer support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley.
2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.

CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC

3003

OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned
with the overall business strategy.
 To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
 To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
 To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9

People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business
– HR metrics and KPIs.
UNIT II HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9
Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee
referral hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.

UNIT III HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally
trained -Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.

UNIT IV HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover-
grades, performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics:
Promotion index - Rotation index - Career path index.

UNIT V - HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age
profiling - Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
 The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work
settings.
 The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.

REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR Metric.London:
Kogan Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics ,Understanding Theories and Applications,
SAGE Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. , Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo
selection,developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New
Jersey:Pearson Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and
Optimize Your Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of
Human Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill,2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.

CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC

3 003

OBJECTIVE:
To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social
media

UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9

Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping,
Data Exploration, Market Basket Analysis
UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9
History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using
Social Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media
Pages- Linking Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.

UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.

UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning,
Critical Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data
Analysis.

UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic
analysis, online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
 The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their
potential impact.

REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private
Limited, 2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016

CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and
methods in operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the latest
developments in the field.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics,
transforming supply chains.

UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9

P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models,
Space Determination and Layout Methods.

UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9

Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system
and LIMIT, Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.
UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9
Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation
Problems, Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem,
Scheduling Algorithms.

UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an
Techniques, the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
 To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of
certainty, risk and uncertainty.

REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network
Design: Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson
Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time:
Supply Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan,
Arunachalam Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in
Operations/Supply Chain Management , I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.

CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target
finance applications.

UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of
capital, Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.

UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9

Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time
series-examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.

UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial
model for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.

UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle
charts, simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.
UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9
Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit
risk model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
 The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using
excel, Python and R.

REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013
by Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11
Sep 2017 by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices
and to understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction,
maintenance and decommissioning of infrastructure projects.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9

Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development
goals (SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and
Development linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators -
Performance indicators of sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and
practices: global and Indian – Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle -
Constraints and barriers for sustainable development - future directions.

UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9

Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and
port transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment
(EIA), Land acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost
effectiveness Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic,
demand, political, socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of
Infrastructure Projects to mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with
multiple Stakeholders on Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated
planning - Clash detection in construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information
technology – Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based
Management System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management,
precision control and real time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable
construction – Data management for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource
efficiency benefits of effective logistics - Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design
considerations, Design Parameters and Procedures – Quality control and Assurance - Use of
sustainable construction techniques: Precast concrete technology, Pre-engineered buildings.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9

Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement
concrete - Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable
consumption – Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green
engineering - Extended producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies,
Practices, Guidelines, Methods, And Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly -
Dematerialization, rematerialization, transmaterialization – Green procurement and green
distribution - Analysis framework for reuse and recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and
recycling - Communication of Life Cycle Information - Indian Eco mark scheme -
Environmental product declarations – Environmental marketing- Life cycle Analysis (LCA),
Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA, Thermodynamic LCA - Extending LCA - economic dimension,
social dimension - Life cycle costing (LCC) - Combining LCA and LCC – Case studies

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An
Integrated Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information
Technology and Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health
Monitoring for Infrastructure projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure
Facilities - Capacity Building and Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure
Implementation, Infrastructure Management Systems and Future Directions. – Use of
Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data Analytics and Cloud Computing, Artificial
Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth Generation (5G) Network services for
maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.
CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve
sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th
Edition , Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee
Publication Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
5. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
8. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”,
SPRINGER, 2022.
9. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
10. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and
Sustainability: International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook -
 General guide for Life Cycle Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European
Union;2010
11. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
12. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering
Tomorrow's Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2

CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce
the concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of
sustainable agricultural systems for a changing world.

UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE

CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes -
Ecological services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food
systems - Defining sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference
between regenerative and sustainable agriculture systems

UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9

Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of
healthy soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil -
Management practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest
and disease control

UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the
productivity of water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced
irrigation systems and agricultural practices for sustainable water use

UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials
produced using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for
sustainable agriculture
UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9
Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability
- Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production -
Goals and components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:

On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to

CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of
sustainable agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological
use of resources
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in
non-sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to
a sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem

REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future
of Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020
2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N.,
Springer, 2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E.,
Springer, 2016
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC
Press, 2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press,
2014
CO – PO Mapping - SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE PRACTICES

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation

CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
 To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
 To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
 To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
 To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its
applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9
Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials-
Biocompatibility-Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and
porous materials-Bonding types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface
properties and adhesion of materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-
tissue response to implants- Impact and Future of Biomaterials

UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9

Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–
Types of polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric
biomaterials -Polyethylene -Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and
polyglycolic acid (PGA) -Polycaprolactone (PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –
Polyurethan- reactions polymers for medical purposes - Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and
derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes and their biological applications

UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9

General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon-
Calcium phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical
Composites-Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix
Composite (MMC)–glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds

UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9

Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium
alloys-Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-
surface properties of metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of
metallic implants – biological tolerance of implant metals

UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of
nanosize-nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-
Nanosurface and coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics-
BioNEMs -Biosensor-Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their
importance.
 Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
 Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite
materials
 Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
 Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical
applications.

REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to
Biomaterials Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press,
2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, R.S.Lakes “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. M.Jaffe,W.Hammond, P.Tolias and T.Arinzeh “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood
head publishing, 2013.
 5. Buddy D.Ratner and Allan S.Hoffman Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to
Material in Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and
Biomaterials: Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional
Bionanomaterials” springer, 2020.
9. Sujata.V.Bhat Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.

CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
 To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials
used.
 To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
 To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic
application
 To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind,
solar etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials
for sustainable electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally
available materials – Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal
plants – Nuclear energy

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary
battery (Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel
Metal Hydride) – Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery
(Anode materials – Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium
Titanate) (Cathode Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion
battery (ethylene carbonate and propylene carbonate based)

UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells,
alkaline fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel
cells, solid oxide fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell –
Fuel utilization – electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts
( Platinum, Platinum alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported
platinum catalysts) – Anatomy of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate,
current conductors, bipolar plates and monopolar plates).

UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of
Si and wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon
solar cells – multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic
concentrators – Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar
cells – Perovskite solar cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials
used in solar cells ( metallic oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled
carbon nanotubes, two-dimensional Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells
materials - copper-phthalocyanine and perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes -
boron subphthalocyanine- tin (II) phthalocyanine)

UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo
capacitors and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-
parameters of supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials
(transition metal oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes,
nanocarbons, non-noble metal, chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame
work (MOF), activated carbon fibres (ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI),
a ternary hybrid composite- conductive polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of
nanocomposites for the SC electrodes (carbon–carbon composites, carbon-MOs composites,
carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs composites) - Two-Dimensional (2D) Electrode
Materials - 2D transition metal carbides, carbonitrides, and nitrides.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
 Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.
 Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
 Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
 The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the
performance of various materials

REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J.
Skinner, Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold
Lamm, Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and
technological applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; B.Viswanathan. M.Aulice Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia
Forouzandeh, Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature
solid oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative
materialistic development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today:
Proceedings, 2022.
CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology
and efficiency, and sustainability.
 To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9

Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and
green engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass
efficiency, and other green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic
plans.

UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types
of waste, chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.

UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids,
water as a reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono
chemical methods, microwave-assisted reactions

UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design
– Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer
chemistry for accident prevention

UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential
substitutes for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5 – To understand advanced technology in green synthesis

TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly,
Taylor & Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC,2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) , Wiley
publications,2008

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017
CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LTPC
3003

OBJECTIVES:
 to understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants
generated due to industrial activity.
 To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the
purpose of environmental risk assessment.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards-
water quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring-
Concepts of environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.

UNIT II MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling -
sampling of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.

UNIT III ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric
methods -Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in
sewage; Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution
measurements; analysis of particulates and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of
sulfur, carbon monoxide, hydrocarbon; Introduction to advanced instruments for
environmental analysis

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) &

RISKASSESSMENT 9
Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for
National Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard
identification- exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.

UNIT V AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9

Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online
Data Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System -
Review of Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers-
data acquisition system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality
control; regulatory overview.

OTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know
CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.
CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability
of the environment.
CO5 the various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the
environment.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and
soild wastes / Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc

REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of
Analysis, CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.

COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX

Course Program Outcomes

Outco P P P P P P P P P P P P PS PS PS
mes O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9 O1 O1 O1 O1 O2 O3
0 1 2
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -
CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1

CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE

DEVELOPMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
2. To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
3. Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
4. Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies
for attaining sustainable development
5. Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development

UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix,
consumption pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy
pricing – Energy security

UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal
(SDG) - Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty.
Globalization and Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income
and growth.

UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind,
Hydro, Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits

UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity
Authority - National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan,
RE integration, Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
2. Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
3. Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
4. Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
5. Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.

REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford
University Press, U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University
Press, 2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
7. https://www.niti.gov.in/verticals/energy

CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental
implications of energy utilisation
2. To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
3. To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
4. To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical
utilities
5. To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage

UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production
and consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP
UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9
Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy
costs, bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing
system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution,
energy audit instruments

UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9

Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid
Heaters. Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator,
regenerator, heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and
thermocompression

UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers -
Energy conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors,
illumination systems and cooling towers

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal
(SDG). Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities,
Income and growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact
of poverty,

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the prevailing energy scenario
2. Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
3. Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
4. Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
5. Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development

REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”,
Logman Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”,
4th Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report
prepared by TERI for MoEF, 2011.